library of congress 



□ 001344152)3 






r. **6* . 

* / °o. % 






«> A ‘V'*'^’' .o' 5 V‘^-’\A 

\^ V * s *-w-/* X 4 ,<A p» • ^ V* **‘aL** *9^ * * * °* ^ 

^ X/ .*«* ^ * 


A c 


• AHn o 



- -** A^'X* '•WMzf* <&' 01 

Hr '••»* A *'A‘‘ <(y X '••»• A 

- o ^ H C° ^ 

•^0* 



vv 




4 O> 

ft » «<* «• 


’f -,-w^. (.' o - 

A° *<?• *"’■’ A "* 

,<A P * * X A **V£/ 

► . 6^ 5* _ • a yi i 

♦ 




V <* VNJD*V A* V . <r“ 

s '^' ■’W 






„.o> , 0 ° \ % '.’-’\A ‘‘J*. 

^ C 4 . „<y p'••<»* v 1 *LVL'* <^x _*$' p 


i* .r. 


<\. *'..»* <0 


° V* Hf\ ® -, 

A «y X °. 

.V 



*- a* ^e. A 

of o #t^*V A X * 7^.1 «y 

^ . °^. # * 9 A° ^ •»’ A 

v a? a^°% * 




a lt( . •fc. 4V 
c° .W% °*> ,/ / 



* u 4 A 
: *«r 


• .A A* •* 

_ - * A V *£*. • 

<$* 

Hr *° * * ** A H* ‘ • • s «u 

a v o 0 w 0 -» rA . »• ' « ^ 

j*p- • ** v 3 f , . l ^>/r??-j_ * 

n <, <s5A\\ri v \' j ' 'jv >. ^ ? &(\[/Z%b * 


* o 

^ < Hp V 

^ o i 0 vl 


^ <A oV^R''- ^>. A ' C JZJIM^\ ^ A oV^ML^- 'Ha A " - Hp i 


.o v % 



o •' o Ha * \* <l^ 

v' V j^V" V° *iV- ^ *"” v v \..> 

• .r^. ^ <*' *'AW. /gt^ z :'Mk x %A - 

. *.^&.* 'a 

\5 'o. . « A <. *c> 'o., 

^O aA c o«^ "b rA * 1 1 • * ^CP 

C v ° .<*• /.sssaw* C u / ' 




0 


. 





•--•’* f°° '^^ r '* S A . . ^ f o0 

, „ y . 4 V 5 • • ^ ^r\ A> i O <0 \\ A * S * * ^ A * « < • 

\ =V > -jfi^'. •%, > .%&£•. % J -^fe- % / .A 

' ' ‘ 


y »»••- > 




• » - A 


F ^ * 
A V o 0 " ° -» 'H* 

<N * <S 44 \\n v %N'' 

A o/x^ssmL^ “• 
o V 


0 . -,^ f ,. , V 3S* V 

/#\M^ >*• 

r °vPV * i- 


^•. «5 Ht. * 

y / o o 


_j» ® •» 

J ,* ^ • 



V s . . 

1 c. 9 


° A ° u 

;* <,v X °- M 


o, '.-.»• .A <x .6* Hp 'o.,- A <^ ^7.y .0' Hr '“• 

-^> A v , o« o <S> A ,i»». A v , o w o <j> v l i » "H- 

A . _r 4 SN\ «• ^ ^0 t* + O A % *f» .0 t* -» C 

, * o *n » ^xvAV\,^ tv . 0 ° «\ « ' 5 NX\\V'k' p 4 / 


Hp V 

^7 o \0 v* 



v>* 


^ o \y v\ 

> ' . * X - 
1 f o ^ *»,*■ 

^ X A* * 

°» v^ : 

• A Ho o 


.7 


\° V 


4 O. , 

n > Xv « > 


A * 

o '^"* 4 ^ 3 ^ • r\ Hi. A' O .' rv 

<v . °4. '■-»’ *0 V *•■’• °^. ♦..•• i 0 ° 

V 4 s V'* O. »0~ p * * “» %> A C 4 a<* 

• Hp A ♦ tfCCgg/h,® >$, A * • Hr* A * J' 

: ^ vy *^5R' 

^ v ~.o o i///M\\\r ® ■» Sjiiii’nfitK^x ® ot///\$v§$ * «V«^. j ' 

^ X oyj|\}^ A X *-^SP,* A" X A ^ •- 

<* + r < 5 ^ 'o.»<» 4 <v ^ S 7 .,' ,o v a. -> * 




A o»*s <*» 



H X C° tljtoL* o 
". ^ 0 < 


O • A 




<A c° M °+ X* 

, -* 'H? A 0 • H. 


sP vs 


vp A * c 
*; ^o ^ !> 

« A -tv A ^ v.-^fi^cwo \y Hi, >V1 

\A V^-/ \ 9 / V*V V— 

v ^ s !r7/* H>, A v p «*o, H> V ^ 4 “A'* H>. p^'o* H? 4 A %*“ 

> *«„ ^ v c# / " “ ■ 







• A y V •* 
> aV *£*. 



° H* A * 

° o 


* ° 
_ “ A Hr* o 

/j£r ^ /jy >-Cx •■ 




O H © 








Cv * 



4 O 




* * A^ C ^ > ** ° » © 0 * ^0° ^ ** * , , • - ft -. 

aO v **•*- ^ ^ ,9^ i> r • °- ^> V s * S# -L'* r ^c\. a v 

* ^ *+ •*»*'. % .VAft*. ^ *♦ •*»£• *<fc / . 

*% -3HK- -** V ••? * : SR - : -®?- ; /% : 


°. : 



<* ^.. 


<\ *•<..** .G v 'X ' 0t - <' >.* 

# -V% ^ ,0* t « i '/* ^O, A^ S C°*° ♦ ^ 

* %> C ©WZfev ° A* ^ c v * 




. t • • „ ^ 

,° sLrtvZ * v. 


o • * 


o V # 

° 3y 0 ^ V"<^/j^fs A 

9 o° ^ ^*v:^ y * 


. ^ 0 • 

• A o. 

N -CL* *» 

► - ** «> O. %' 

" 1 ‘ / °^. •'•-« ^ * 

$ ^ £ 4%; ^ ^ o * 

v> V 'W&W: * Vv V : lsilr : Xv •■, 
■■ °y<#vy * v v «y ^ •? 


<* <\ 
Jtr i°"°+ o 

O .lT> • c^V\ . ** 


w 


..•' ,0 





*■ •£. .A *■ 

• ^ A^ ♦ 

c to cp » 


c°* *« 




* aV«** - 

;* i* % • 



V c «//, %£ 


.. * * .0 


° <£V ° 

' + ^>7 

' ,-r 



<6 ’ * n^ V .t» * ^ ^ 

% V „ 0° .>^, 


O H 0 



-q5 ^ aP v k» ’*' i ^'«,* -o5 ^ *> ° 

.u ^ ^ O^ - OMO o o^ V <V ^oTo 9 ,c 

.Q’ t < * o, 5 s * • * e » • <j^ A, A 4 s • • f <> rt> 

W* /jdjfe- \/ :&k. :Osk\ \/ 





^ < =>* 


•> * aV«A, -*' 

^ * AV -A. . 

„ „ 4 °> 

’o * i.* A 





;* ^ % ■ 


. * <£> ° 0 . 

^ *'••»* A <A AV/i' .o v V •i'.T*' A 

^ Cj • w 1 # -f C> *^ - ° w <* * <£, 0 i. I & j o w « * 

-, w v A ^ c° ♦W2fe.*. o / 




> <^ -0I^- v 

*" 1 * * ^ °^. ^ °« 0 0 ^° \> * 
v **^L% c\ *<y ^• o, 

'f'v o'<3 * 





A'Ca o 



^ o' 

4 O, • , 

y * •#’ 

<V ^ * 0 » 0, A 0 ^ ,? V, 

V % A, ,0 V «> V* 




° A ^?A O 


<> *' . . 


* ^ a” 1 

' <UY • 



«■ .A-* ■• 

;• & % * 



'~h. “ * * ,V' V *••» «W X*. “ • » \ ' \> ■•• 

.*•'*♦ ^O aJ» c 0 " a ■» ^ 0^ . • *■' a ■» *^0 4$^ 0 °JL° * 

w^% ° A* V . C u ° jjr ^ , C * 



O N 0 


•* o5 bt. « 

r /t* * "^yyiv& * bv ^s. *■ ■ 

> * Q-. * 

f, "’ % * °"° 

^ ^ ,LVLa 



a^ 4 K » ^ ^r 

y y^novZ* 




-. ^. > »<» « 



v 


\ « <;S o' 1 

' A v <#*, • 



* V< ^ J . 

^ -. : «> :T ,’ ■<.• x, / 

0 " a •» A . 1 " < A 

“ '- a .c 9 A «• 

- +* o* «*-A . 



,-i°x. . 



• A A %.*'*•"•• 4 

9 - * i •-"'. •’■.. . v' V .J^.„ V a 

. v; ,. .., ; ^ v . , y/M .^: ^ v 

aV <> *-a* 4 ,G^ *o, 'o. a a A <A 

G v c, o “ 0 -» A «•■'*« A c 0 *' 0 -» <s 

" J< “ ^ *P >0 /yyj-i ■» °-» *i*p’ • . f 

k ' '^^*- •'■ 








•o V 



v •?*’ •* «> V"i" v '& • ^ » * 7 V* v 

^ °°^ v *» « 0 ° ^ *'*<'*’ C \.' 4 ’‘>- <>^, ^°° ^ *•«’* aS 

i > 5 • • » S~\ A V 1*0 '*A 1 \ « • • ^ A I 

V -V U *-K A ✓ ^ * S? ts ^ ^ V c ♦ TA A*' 

-k ♦P. ► . K ^ . • . A A v <** *P^ A V' ► 


• ^ *, 

- oA 


“ t'o 'Co O ■ 


j> * A'b. j 

aV "K, . _ 

^ ^ 4 v V* ^ * ‘Qj 

'O, 'o.A A <a 'A * 4 A V 'O, 

«.***> A V o« «. *<> n V .t*»„ A 

J*^*- »^c^NCv ^ rV -» 

O* .V o' 


j» * aV»^* X ■ 

^ * A V V^* 


9 A'Co < 


’ o * » 



e « o 


0 A o 



* *7* ^ * 

- ^0* 



& (“is ^ 


*T 

o V 


^ > «5 ^ * W^sSK° ?V° ^ V w/; „^ . 

«, x;^\/ . v^- / \ 


^ b* J . 5^ 


A a /^S A j 



















































* 




































































SHEA’S 

AMERICAN LINGUISTICS. 

SERIES II. 


No. I. 








GRAMMAR AND DICTIONARY 


OF THE 


LANGUAGE OF THE ITIDATSA 


(MINNETAREES, GROSVENTRES OF THE MISSOURI). 


WITH AN 


INTRODUCTORY SKETCH OF THE TRIBE. 


WASHINGTON MATTHEWS. 




NEW YORK: 

CRAMOISY PRESS. 
1873. 






Edition of 100 Copies. 


No. 


JOED MUNSEED, 
ALBANY. 


,\°A 



INTRODUCTION. 


The Hidatsa, Minrretaree, or Grosventre Indians are one 
of the three tribes which at present inhabit the permanent 
village at Fort Berthold, Dakota Territory, and hunt on the 
waters of the upper Missouri and Yellowstone rivers, in 
north-western Dakota and eastern Montana. 

The history of this tribe is so intimately connected with 
that of the politically allied tribes of the Arickarees and 
Mandans that we cannot well give an account of one with¬ 
out making some mention of the other. In the general 
account of the village and its inhabitants, which follows, all 
the tribes are included. 

A level terrace of prairie land, some four miles wide, 
extends from the base of the high bluffs, which form the 
western edge of the “ Coteau du Missouri,” southward to 
the Missouri. It becomes gradually narrower as it ap¬ 
proaches the river and terminates in a steep bluff of soft 
rock and lignite which overhangs the river; on the south¬ 
ern extremity of this terrace, near the brow of the bluff, 
stand the Indian village and the old trading-post of Fort 
Berthold. This is on the left bank of the Missouri in 
latitude 47° 34' north, and longitude about 101° 48' west. 

Eastward and westward from the bluff', along the river, 
extend the bottom-lands, which are so low as to be occa¬ 
sionally entirely overflowed by the spring floods of the 
Missouri. In the neighborhood of the fort the bottoms are 
covered partly with forest trees, willows and low brush, 
but chiefly with the little fields or gardens of the tribes 
who dwell in the village. In these fields they arc cultivat- 




VI 


INTRODUCTION. 


iug now the same plants which they have cultivated proba¬ 
bly for centuries,— beans, sunflowers, tobacco, little round 
squashes and Indian corn. Their fields are cleared among 
the willows in various irregular shapes and sizes. Each 
woman in the village owns her own patch of ground, and 
except in cases where those of the same family “join farms,” 
the little gardens are separated by trifling willow fences or 
by allowing some of the brush to remain uncut as bounda¬ 
ries. 

The way in which agriculture is conducted is of the most 
primitive character, the ground is turned up with hoes, and 
five years ago the aboriginal hoe made from the shoulder 
blade of the bufialo was still largely in use. Xothing know 
they, of course, of the science of agriculture and year after 
year the unchanged seed of the same plant is stuck down, 
not only in the same piece of ground, but in the very same 
hole out of which the roots of last year’s plant were pulled. 
Add to the imperfect modes of cultivation the further dis¬ 
advantages of a cold and dry climate, a short season, an 
inferior soil, the frequent incursions of hordes of grasshop¬ 
pers, and the dangers from the attacks of inimical tribes, 
and it may readily be conjectured that the rewards of hus¬ 
bandry are but poorly proportioned to the labor expended; 
and such is the case, their crops only partly aid in sustain¬ 
ing them. Hunting, and the scanty annuities received 
from the government make up the balance of their meager 
subsistence. 

The village consists of a number of houses, built very 
closely together and without any attempt at regularity of 
position, the doors face in every possible direction, and 
there is so much uniformity in the appearance of the lodges 
that it is a very difficult matter to find your way among 
them. 

Most of the houses are the peculiar, large, earth-covered 
lodges, such as were built by various tribes of Indians of 
the plains in the valley of the Missouri, and so often and 
accurately described bv various early travellers; Lewis and 


INTRODUCTION. 


Vll 


Clarke, Prince Maximilian and others. These lodges, con¬ 
sist of a wooden frame, covered with willows, hay and 
earth; a hole in the top of each lodge lets in the light and 
lets out the smoke; there is a door-way on one side, and 
these are the only apertures in the building. In the door¬ 
way hangs a door of bull-hide or “ puncheons ” and it is 
protected by a narrow shed or storm door some six or 
eight feet long. The floor is of hardened earth; and in its 
centre is a circular depression about a foot deep and three 
or four feet wide, with an edging of flat rocks, this is the 
fire place. The frame of a lodge is thus made.— A number 
of stout posts, from ten to fifteen, according to the size of 
the lodge, and rising to the height of about five feet above 
the surface of the earth, are set about ten feet apart in a 
circle; on the tops of these posts solid beams are laid ex¬ 
tending from one to another. Then toward the centre of 
the lodge four more posts are erected, these are of much 
greater diameter than the outer posts and rise to the height 
of ten or more feet above the ground. These four posts 
stand in the corners of a square of about fifteen feet, and 
their tops are connected with four heavy logs or beams 
laid horizontally. From the four central beams, to the 
smaller external beams, long poles, as rafters, are stretched 
at an angle of about 30° with the horizon, and from the 
outer beams to the earth a number of shorter poles are laid 
at an angle of about 45°. Finally a number of saplings or 
rails are laid horizontally to cover the space between the 
four central beams leaving only a hole for the combined 
skylight and chimney. This frame is then covered with 
willows, hay and earth as before mentioned ; the covering 
being of equal depth over all parts of the frame. From this 
description it will be seen that the outline of the elevation 
of a lodge is an irregular hexagon while that of its ground 
plan is polygonal, its angles being equal in number to 
the shorter uprights. Prince Maximilian’s artist usually 
sketches these lodges very correctly, but Mr. Catlin, al¬ 
though a good observer, and although he describes the 


Vlll 


INTRODUCTION. 


construction of a lodge well, and pictures its interior with 
much accuracy, invariably gives an incorrect representa¬ 
tion of its exterior. Wherever he depicts a Mandan, 
Arickaree or Minnetaree lodge he makes it appear as an 
almost exact hemisphere and always omits the storm-door. 
It would seem that in filling in his sketches he adopted the 
hemisphere as a convenient symbol for a lodge. These 
dwellings, being from thirty to fifty feet in diameter, from 
ten to fifteen feet high, in the centre, and from five to seven 
feet high at the eaves are quite commodious. The labor 
of constructing them is performed mostly by the women, 
hut in lifting and setting the heavier beams the men assist. 
If, by the aid of steel axes obtained from the whites, the 
task of building such a house is no easy one at this day, 
how difficult it must have been a century ago, when the 
stone axe was their best implement and when the larger 
logs had to be burned through in order that pieces of suita¬ 
ble length might be obtained ! 

Every winter, until 1866, the Indians left their perma¬ 
nent village and, moving some distance up the Missouri 
valley, built temporary quarters, usually in the centre of 
heavy forests and in the neighborhood of buffalo. The 
objects of this movement were that they might have fuel 
convenient and not exhaust the supply of wood in the 
neighborhood of the permanent village. It was also advis¬ 
able that, during a portion of the year at least, they should 
not harass the game near home. The houses of the winter 
villages resembled much the log cabins of our own western 
pioneers. They were neatly built, very warm, had regular 
fire-places and chimneys built of sticks and mud, and 
square holes in the roofs for the admission of light. Seven 
or eight years ago there were some cabins of this descrip¬ 
tion in the permanent village at Fort Berthold, every year 
since they are becoming gradually more numerous and 
threaten to eventually supplant the original earth-covered 
lodges that were built in the due and ancient form. The 
practice of building winter quarters is now abandoned. 


INTRODUCTION. 


IX 


As game has recently become very scarce in their country 
they are obliged to travel immense distances, and almost 
constantly, when they go out on their winter hunts. Re¬ 
quiring, therefore, movable habitations they take with 
them, on their journeys, the ordinary skin lodges or “ tipis ” 
such as are used by the Dakotas, Assiniboines and other 
nomadic tribes in this region. 

In the accounts, given by historians, of the early wars of 
our people with the red race, we find that a common and 
usually successful plan of reducing them to submission 
was, on entering their country, to set fire to their granaries 
and destroy their stores of corn. Such a plan of warfare 
would utterly fail if tried on the agricultural tribes of 
the upper Missouri. More than once have their Dakota 
euemies entered their villages and burned their houses to 
the ground, but they have never yet been able to touch a 
single grain of the garnered product of their fields, for 
that was securely hidden beyond a hope of discovery in 
their underground caches. When their crops are harvested, 
and before they start on their winter hunt, they dig their 
caches or clear out those dug in previous years. A cache is 
a good sized cellar, usually round, with a small opening 
above, barely large enough to allow a person to descend; 
when finished it looks much like an ordinary round cistern. 
Reserving a small portion of corn, dried squash, etc., for 
winter use, they deposit the remainder in these subterra¬ 
nean store-houses along with household utensils and other 
articles of value which they wish to leave behind. They 
then fill up the “ orifices of entrance ” with earth which they 
trample down and rake over and thus obliterate every trace 
of the excavation. Some caches are made under the floors 
of the houses, others outside, in various parts of the village 
grounds; in each case, the distance and direction from some 
door, post, bedstead, fire-place or other object is noted so 
that the stores may be found again on the return of the 
owners in the spring. 


X 


INTRODUCTION. 


On the prairie, a short distance behind the village, are 
scattered around the scaffolds and the graves, whereon and 
wherein are deposited the dead. Formerly all who died 
in the village were placed on scaffolds, as is the custom 
with most of the Missouri valley tribes, but the practice of 
burying in the ground, after the manner of the whites, is 
gradually becoming more common, and every year the 
scaffolds decrease and the graves increase in number. 
When at a distance from their village on their hunts, if 
encamped in the neighborhood of timber, they lay the 
corpses in the branches of the trees instead of building 
scaffolds.* 

On the plain, between the cemetery and the village, may 
he seen some half dozen tall, forked logs erected at distances 
of a few hundred feet apart. They are evidently of differ¬ 
ent ages, one looks quite fresh, as if recently taken from 
the woods, some appear older, others are rotten at the base 
and ready to fall, and a few of the oldest are now lying on 
the ground. Each year one of these forked logs is set up. 
On the day when it is determined to commence their an¬ 
nual religious ceremonies, the men of the Hidatsa tribe, 
dressed and mounted as for a war party, proceed to the 
woods. Here they select a tall, forked cottonwood which 
they fell, trim and bark, to this they tie their lariats 
and by the aid of their horses drag it toward the village. 
In the procession the man who has most distinguished him¬ 
self in battle, mounted on the horse on whose back he has 
done his bravest deeds, takes the lead; others follow in the 
order of their military distinction: as they drag the log 
along they fire their guns at it, strike it with their sticks, 
and shout and sing songs of victory. The log, they say, is 
symbolical of a conquered enemy whose body they are 
bringing into the camp in triumph. When the log is set 


* To point irreverently to sorqe of these rude sarcophagi, and say “ these 
are good Indians,” or, “ those are the only good Indians you ever see,” is 
one of the standard good jokes of the country and it is not uncommon to 
hear witty gentlemen repeat this a dozen times a day. 



INTRODUCTION. 


XI 


U P, they again proceed to the woods to cut and bring in 
willows. A temporary lodge of green willows is then built 
around the log and in this lodge for four days and four 
nights is performed the daKpike or yearly ceremony of the 
Hidatsa. The most remarkable features of the ceremony 
are the voluntary and self-imposed lasts and tortures which 
rival, and perhaps excel, in their barbaric cruelties those of 
the more famous “Okeepa” of the Mandans. 

Unlike the Hidatsa, the Mandans and the Arickarees per¬ 
form their annual religious ceremonies in houses erected es¬ 
pecially for religious purposes, and which may properly be 
called temples although usuallv designated by the whites as 
“ medicine lodges.” In front of each of the temples is an 
open space or plaza. The objects of veneration in the Arick- 
aree plaza are a painted boulder and a dead cedar tree. The 
“ medicine ” of the Mandan plaza is a small circular pali¬ 
sade, which is emblematic of the ark in which the Xoah of 
Mandan mythology was saved from the flood. Within the 
temple and around the palisade is still performed the Man¬ 
dan Okeepa , which, Catliu so accurately describes in his 
“ North American Indians” 

When Lewis and Clarke ascended the Missouri, in 1804, 
they found four tribes of agricultural Indians, numerous 
and prosperous, inhabiting the upper Missouri valley west 
of the Dakota nation. They had eight permanently in¬ 
habited towns, several which they lived in temporarily and 
a number more which they had abandoned and allowed to 
go to ruin. They are spoken of in Lewis and Clarke’s 
journal as the “Ricaras,” “Mandans,” “Minnetarees,” and 
“ Ahuahaways.” All that are left of the four tribes are now 
gathered together in this one village, at Fort Berthold, 
which does not probably number over 2500 souls. The 
last named tribe, the Ahnahaways or Amaliamis, ceased 
long ago to have an independent existence. After the 
small pox epidemic of 1838, the few that were left joined 
the kindred tribe of the Minnetarees, accepting the chief of 
the latter as their chief, and adopting the traditions, myths, 


Xll 


INTRODUCTION. 


and ceremonies of the Minnetarees as their own. Almost 
the only evidence we have of their former existence is the 
mention made of them by early travellers and the few 
orphan words of their language which have been adopted 
into the Minnetaree tongue. • There are but few white men, 
even among those who have dwelt for years in the country, 
who know that such a people ever did live, and the Indians of 
Fort Berthold are always referred to as “ the three tribes.” 
The remains, now nearly obliterated, of their old towns, 
may to day be discovered by sharp sighted observers on 
almost every prairie terrace adjacent to the Missouri, along 
six hundred miles of its course from the mouth of the lower 
White-Earth to the Little Missouri. 

To the philologist it is an interesting fact, that this trio 
of savage clans, although now living in the same village and 
having been next-door neighbors to each other for more 
than a hundred } 7 ears, on terms of peace and intimacy, and 
to a great extent intermarried, speak nevertheless totally 
distinct languages, which show no perceptible inclination 
to coalesce. The Mandan and Grosventre (or Minnetaree) 
languages are somewhat alike and probably of a very 
distant common origin, but no resemblance has yet been 
discovered between either of these and the Aric-karee 
(“ Ricara ”). Almost every member of each tribe, under¬ 
stands the languages of the other tribes, yet he speaks his 
own most fluently, so it is not an uncommon thing to hear 
a dialogue carried on in two languages, one person, for in¬ 
stance, questioning in Mandan, and the other answering 
back in Grosventre, and vice versa. Many of them under¬ 
stand the Dakota tongue and use it as a means of inter¬ 
communication and all understand the sign language. So 
after all they have no trouble in making themselves under¬ 
stood by one another. These Indians must have excellent 
memories and even “ good capacity for study ” for it is not 
uncommon to find persons among them, some even under 
twenty years of age, who can speak fluently four or five 
different languages. 

O O 


INTRODUCTION. 


Xlll 


It is probably eighty years or more since the whites first 
visited these Indians. In 1804 British traders and French 
interpreters were found in their camps; yet their inter¬ 
course with civilized men has been comparatively little. 
We have added to their artificial wants, have furnished 
them with a few iron tools, with gunpowder and woven 
fabrics but have taught them scarcely anything. The ma¬ 
jority of them have no knowledge whatever of the English 
language, and until within the last five years knew nothing 
of the use of money,— all mercantile transactions were con¬ 
ducted by barter. Besides their agriculture and architec¬ 
ture, which have been already alluded to, they had the 
knowledge of many other useful arts, still practised by 
them, which were entirely of native origin. They manu¬ 
factured pottery; they built boats of buffalo hide; made 
mats and baskets of various descriptions, and wooden 
bowls, so durable that they last for many generations; they 
formed spoons and ladles out of the horns of the buffalo and 
Rocky Mountain sheep. Their hair-brushes they made 
sometimes out of porcupine quills, but more commonly 
of grass — the long, tough awns of the stipajuncea; they 
fashioned whistles of the bones of large birds and fifes and 
other wind instruments out of wood, some of these were 
for musical purposes, others to imitate (for the hunter’s 
benefit), the bleat of the antelope or the whistle of the elk. 
They garnished their clothing with porcupine quills which 
they colored brilliantly with dye-stuffs of their own dis¬ 
covery. They had flint and horn arrow-heads and horn 
wedges with which they split wood; they knew something 
of the manufacture of glass, and made rude medallions out 
of it; they possessed various pigments, and with them re¬ 
corded the events of their day in symbolic pictures : and in 
the manufacture and use of the various appliances of war 
and the chase they had no superiors on the plains. 

Many years ago they were considered ripe for the expe¬ 
riment of civilization ; they stand to day just as fit subjects 
as ever for the experiment which never has been, and pos- 


XIV 


INTRODUCTION. 


sibly never will be tried. They are a martial people, and 
the men have naturally quite as much prejudice against 
performing a woman’s work as those of any savage race, 
yet their good judgment is fast overcoming their repug¬ 
nance and many of them, and by no means the cowards and 
imbeciles of the camp, are beginning to perform labors 
formerly deemed degrading; they are chopping wood, 
mowing hay and hoeing in the corn-fields. 

During a short period in their history the Arickarees 
were at war with the whites; for over forty years, how¬ 
ever, they have strictly maintained peace, and have fought 
for us and against our enemies. The Mandans and Minneta- 
rees claim never to have shed a white man’s blood, although 
some of their number have been killed by the whites. For 
their fidelity they have been repaid by starvation and neg¬ 
lect. During the past six years many, particularly among 
the Arickarees, have died of actual hunger or the diseases 
incident to a state of famine. Legislative attention is, 
however, being turned toward them, and it is now proposed 
to remove them to a climate and a soil where they can 
more easily support themselves. 

When giving the population of the village, or speaking 
of the comparative strength of each tribe it must be remem¬ 
bered that our estimates are based chiefly upon conjecture. 
It is said that they allowed a census to be taken immedi¬ 
ately before the epidemic of 1838. The pestilence followed 
almost exterminating them. Like the “Chosen People,” 
they believed the calamity to be a divine punishment in¬ 
flicted because of their sinful curiosity, and have ever since 
resisted all efforts that have been made to ascertain their 
numbers. Many ingenious plans have been devised for 
counting them without their knowledge, but they have sus¬ 
pected and thwarted every one. The Arickarees are, 
however, generally supposed to stand first in numerical 
importance, the Hidatsa second and the Mandans third. 

The people, whose language is discussed in the accom¬ 
panying grammar, are commonly called on maps, in offi- 


INTRODUCTION. 


XV 


cial reports, and by white men in the Indian country, 
“ Grosventre.” This was a name given to them by the 
early French and Canadian adventurers. The same name 
was applied also to a tribe, totally distinct from these in 
language and origin, which lives some hundreds of miles 
west of Fort Berthold, and the two nations are now distin¬ 
guished from one another as “ Grosventres of the Missouri ” 
and “ Grosventres of the Prairie,” names which would lead 
a stranger to suppose that they were merely separate di¬ 
visions of one tribe. 

In the account of Edward Umfreville, who traded on the 
Saskatchewan river from 1784 to 1787, we find mention of 
a tribe of Indians who lived near the falls of the south 
branch of the Saskatchewan, and whom he calls “Fall In¬ 
dians.” But he remarks : “ In this people another instance 
occurs of the impropriety with which the Canadian French 
name Indians. They call them Grosventres, or Big-Bellies; 
and without any reason, as they are as comely, and as well 
made as any tribe whatever; and are very far from being- 
remarkable for their corpulency.”* The tribe to which 
he refers is doubtless that which is now known as the 
“ Grosventres of the Prairie.” The similarity of the Ca¬ 
nadian misnomers in all probability led Captain Lewis, in 
1804, to speak of the Minnetarees on the Missouri as “ part 
of the great nation called Fall Indians.” From Umfreville’s 
vocabulary of the Fall language, we can discover no affi¬ 
nity between the Fall and Ilidatsa tongues. Umfreville’s 
opinion as to the impropriety of the name “ Gros ventre,” 
would apply as well to those “ of the Missouri ” as those 
“ of the prairie.” 

In the works of many travellers they are called “Min¬ 
netarees,” which is a clumsy orthography of the word 
Minitari. This, although a Ilidatsa word, is the name 
applied to them, not by themselves, but by the Mandans; 
it signifies “ to cross the water ,” or, “ they crossed the water” 


* Present State of Hudson Bay,etc., bylEdward Umfreville, Loud., 1790, p. 197 



XVI 


INTRODUCTION. 


The name may allude to the Hidatsa tradition of their own 
origin, or to their account that they came originally from 
the north-east, and had to cross the Missouri before reach¬ 
ing the old Mandan villages which were on the west hank 
of the river, or the name may have originated from some 
other cause, but the story, be it true or false, which is now 
given by both tribes concerned, to account for its origin is 
this: When the wandering Minnetarees first reached the 
Missouri, and stood on the hank opposite to one of the 
villages of the Mandans, the latter cried out, “ who are you.” 
The strangers, not understanding what w r as said, but sup¬ 
posing that the Mandans (who were provided with boats), 
asked them what they wanted, shouted in return, “ Mini¬ 
tari,” to cross the water , or, “ Minitari miliats,” we will cross 
the water. The Mandans supposed that in this reply the 
visitors gave them their name, and called them Minitari,* 
ever after. 

The origin of the word Hidatsa is obscure, yet it is the 
name by which these Indians now designate themselves, 
and for this reason is the name which most frequently ap¬ 
pears in this essay. One of their villages on Knife river, 
was named Hidatsa; and probably when they were reduced 
by small-pox the majority of the survivors came from that 
village, which then lent its name to the whole tribe. Just 
as the Mandans of late years call themselves Metutahanke, 
which was the name of their most populous village, pre¬ 
vious to the epidemic. The name Hidatsa is said by some 
to mean “ willows,” but I know of no species of willow 
which bears this name. That the tribe, or a portion of it, 
were once called Willows seems probable, for in Lewis and 
Clarke’s journal w r e find one of the villages spoken of as 
“ Minnetarees Metaharta,” or “ Minnetarees of the Wil- 


*Iu the dictionary this word will be found written Miditadi, and its com¬ 
ponent words midi, water and tadi to cross over. The reasons for this 
change of letters will be found by consulting the grammar, where it is 
shown that the letters n and r are interchangeable with d. 



INTRODUCTION. 


XVII 


lows.” Prince Maximilian too, writing in 1833, speaks of 
the “ Village of the Great Willows.” 

The history of the Ilidatsa tribe, as told by themselves, 
may be divided into three periods. The first period in¬ 
cludes the story of their origin and early migrations. This 
part of their history is so mixed up with unquestionable 
fable that it would require a close critical examination to 
determine what parts of it, if any, have the slightest found¬ 
ation in truth. The second period includes one or more 
generations before the advent of the whites. During this 
time they have accounts of events which seem probable and 
many of which are corroborated by facts now cognizable. 
The third period extends from the first advent of the whites 
to the present time. Their accounts of the events of the third 
period are corroborated by the testimony of travellers and 
of living white men, while exact dates may, in many cases, 
be gleaned from books of travel and from various written 
and printed records. Their history may be epitomized as 
follows: 

In the first period it is related that they originally dwelt 
beneath the surface of a great body of water, situated to 
the north-east of their present home. From this subaqueous 
residence some persons found their way out, and discovering 
a country much better than that in which they resided, 
returned and gave to their people such glowing accounts 
of their discoveries that the whole people determined to 
come out. Owing to the breaking of a tree, on which they 
were climbing out of the lake, a great part of the tribe had 
to remain behind in the water, and are there yet. After 
coming up they commenced a series of wanderings over the 
prairies. During these wanderings they were often on the 
eve of death by starvation, but were always rescued by 
being miraculously fed, not with manna, but with buffalo 
meat. Stones were strewn upon the prairie by direction 
of the Deity, and from them sprang to life the buffalo 
which they slaughtered. After some time they sent four 
couriers to the south, who returned with tidings of a great 

3 


XV111 


INTRODUCTION. 


river and a fertile valley, of a nation who dwelt in houses and 
tilled the soil. They brought hack with them, too, corn and 
other products of the country. Toward this promised land 
the tribe now directed its steps, and guided by the couriers 
they reached in due time the Mandan villages on the Mis¬ 
souri. When they arrived, however, instead of putting to 
death the newly found people, they encamped quietly 
beside them, learned of them the arts of peace and have 
ever since dwelt near them. 

-During their wanderings the spirit or genius of the sun 
married one of the women of the tribe and took her into 
the sky. Their child returned to the earth, and under the 
name of Itamapisa or grand-chilcL , became the great prophet 
of his mother’s people. 

From some accounts given of their life, previous to their 
coming out of the lake, it would seem as if their tradition 
originally mentioned an insular home or a home beyond 
some great body of water. The mode of coming out of 
the lake, and the breaking of the tree by which they 
arose seem to be borrowed from the Mandan traditions. 
Recently the story-tellers say that the water out of which 
they came is the Minnewakan, or Devil’s Lake in Northern 
Dakota. This lake is called by the Ilidatsa “ Midihopa,” 
which, like the Dakota name, signifies sacred or mysterious 
water. 

In the second period we have accounts of their learning 
from the Mandans the arts of building, agriculture, etc., 
of their warlike expeditions against various nations, east, 
west, north and south, of the separation of the Crow nation 
(see “ kiliatsa ” in dictionary) and other events. 

In the beginning of the third period the Ilidatsa dwelt 
in two villages on the Knife river, close to its confluence 
with the Missouri, about thirty miles by land and sixty by 
river from their present residence. Near to them lived the 
Amaliamis in one village and, some five miles below the 
mouth of Knife river, the Mandans in two villages. Al¬ 
though probably within the third period, the Mandans lived 


INTRODUCTION. 


XIX 


further down the Missouri. Thus Lewis and Clarke found 
them in 1804, they then tilled the soil and lived in much 
the same manner as they do now. In 1832, after the trad¬ 
ing post, known as Fort Clarke, had been established at the 
lower Mandan village, Mr. Catliu visited these tribes and 
spent a few weeks among them, taking sketches and por¬ 
traits. In the following year Prince Maximilian of Wied 
visited Fort Clarke and spent some time among the In¬ 
dians ; his descriptions are usually correct and accurate. 

During the small-pox epidemic of 1838, the Ilidatsa were 
reduced to about live hundred souls or less. This disease 
subsequently visited them, further reducing their numbers. 
In 1845, they, with a portion of the Mandans, abandoned 
their villages on Knife river and, moving up the Missouri, 
established the village where they now live. In the same 
year the American Fur Company built, with the assistance 
of the Indians, the trading post of Fort Berthold. A few 
years later the remainder of the Mandans moved up to the 
new village, and in 1863 the Arickarees joined them. The 
three tribes have ever since occupied the same village. 

The early travelers describe their towns as being forti¬ 
fied with ditches and stockades. This method of protect¬ 
ing themselves was retained until the winter of 1865, when 
they cut down the palisades for fire-wood. They have 
never since erected them. To the discontinuance of forti¬ 
fications, they were probably led by the growing weakness 
of the Dakotas and by having in their neighborhood United 
States’ troops. 

With regard to the character of the tribe under discus¬ 
sion I prefer to take a few extracts from the works of other 
observers. 


\JProm “Among the Indians," by Henry A. Boiler, Philadelphia, 1868.] 

“ I shall ever look back upon the years spent in the In¬ 
dian country as among the pleasantest of my life, and if in 
all my dealings with white men I had found the same 


XX 


INTRODUCTION. 


sense of honor that characterized my “savage" friends, 
my appreciation of human nature would he much higher." 
(From preface. These remarks refer more particularly to 
the Indians of Fort Berthold, for there the author spent 
the greater part of the time that he lived “ among the 
Indians.”) 

“During the whole time that I lived among the Gros 
Ventres, I never missed a single article, although I took no 
trouble to keep my things out of sight. My house would 
often he crowded with Indians; sometimes only one or 
two would he present ; yet if called away I felt satisfied 
that on my return I would find everything just as I left it.” 
(Pages 239 and 240.) 


[From “ Western Missions and Missionaries ” by Her. P. J. DeSmet, Neio 

York, 1859 .] 

“ Some days after, we stopped at Fort Berthold, to land 
some goods at the great village of the Minataries, or Osier 
tribe, nicknamed the Gros Ventres of the Missouri.” 

* * * * “ The threat chief of the latter 

village, called Four Bears, is the most civil and affable In¬ 
dian that I met on the Missouri.” (Pages 76 and 77.) 


[From “ Illustrationsetc., “ of the North American Indians," by Geo. Catlin, 

London, 1866 .] 

“ There is no tribe in the western wilds, perhaps, who are 
better entitled to the style of warlike, than the Minatarees; 
for they, unlike the Mandans, are continually carrying war 
into their enemies’ country; oftentimes drawing the poor 
Mandans into unnecessary broils, and suffering so much 
themselves in their desperate war excursions, that I find 
the proportion of women to the number of men as two or 
three to one, through the tribe.” (Yol. i, p. 187.) 


INTRODUCTION. 


XXI 


[From “The Solitary Hunter,” by John Palluscr, Esq.] 

“ The Miuitarees are a noble, interesting people. They 
are most absurdly termed Grosventres by the French trad¬ 
ers, there being not the slightest foundation for branding 
them with that epithet.” (Chap, viii, 2.) 

Decently the tribe is deteriorating in character as well as 
in numerical strength. 

The Mandans and Grosventres are generally of lighter 
complexion than many of the surrounding tribes, and this 
peculiarity has always characterized them. Mr. Catlin 
argues that the latter have become fair by intermarriage 
with the former; but at this day the Mandans say that, when 
the Minnetarees (including the Crows) first came among 
them, they were a fairer race than themselves. 

The Hidatsa worship a Deity whom they call “ Itsika- 
mahidis,” The First Made , or the first in existence. They 
sometimes designate him as “ Itakatetas,” The Old Man 
Immortal. The word “ Mahopaictias,” which is the equi¬ 
valent for The Great Spirit of other Indian tongues, may, 
in this language, be applied to anything of a very won¬ 
derful or sacred character, hence the term is often vaguely 
or metonymically applied to the Itakatetas. Some Indians 
say that itsikamahidis means he who first made , but such a 
rendering is not in accordance with the present etymology 
of the language. However, they assert that he made all 
things, the stars, the sun, the earth and the first represen¬ 
tatives of each species of animals and plants, but that no one 
made him. He also, they say, instructed the first repre¬ 
sentatives of the tribe in all the ceremonies and mysteries 
now known to them. 

Whether or not I shall say that the Hidatsa have other 
objects of worship depends entirely upon what value I give 
to the term “worship.” I fear that no little confusion has 
crept into our literature on the subject of mythology in 


XXI1 


introduction. 


consequence of a vague use of this word. If we limit the 
word to its strictest meaning, I should say that these In¬ 
dians worship but one Deity; but if we speak of it in its 
most extended sense, I should say that they worship every¬ 
thing in nature. Not man alone, but the sun, the moon, the 
stars, all the lower animals, all trees and plants, rivers and 
lakes, many boulders and other separated rocks, even some 
hills and buttes which standalone,—in short, everything, not 
made by human hands, which has an independent being or 
can he individualized, possesses a spirit, or more properly 
a “shade;” for the term they use, dalii or idahi (the word 
is seldom used without the incorporated pronouns) signi¬ 
fies a shade or dim, ill-detined shadow. To these shades 
some respect or consideration is due, but not equally to all. 
For instance, the shade of the giant cottonwood, the great¬ 
est tree of the upper Missouri valley, is supposed to possess 
an intelligence, and may in some cases, if properly ap¬ 
proached, assist them in certain undertakings; but the 
shades of shrubs and grasses are of little importance. 
When the Missouri, in its spring-time freshets, cuts down 
its banks and sweeps some tall tree into its current, it is said 
that the spirit of the tree cries while the roots yet cling to 
the land and until it falls into the water. Formerly it was 
considered wrong to cut down one of these great trees and, 
when large logs were needed, only such as were found fallen 
were used; and to-day some of the more credulous old men 
declare that many of the misfortunes of the people are the 
result of their modern disregard for the rights of the living 
cottonwood. 

They believe neither in a hell nor in a devil; but believe 
that there are one or more evil genii in female shape (see 
mahopamiis in dictionary), who inhabit this earth and may 
harm the Indian in this life, but possess no power beyond the 
grave. When a man dies, they suppose that his shade lingers 
four nights around the camp or village in which he died 
and then goes to the lodge of his departed kindred in the 
“Village of the Dead.” During these four nights those 


INTRODUCTION. 


XX111 


who disliked or feared the deceased and do not wish a visit 
from the shade, scorch with red coals a pair of moccasins, 
which they leave at the door of the lodge; the smell of the 
burning leather, they claim, keeps the ghost out; but the 
true friends of the dead man take no such precautions. 
After arriving in the village of the dead, he is rewarded 
for his valor, self-denial and ambition in this life, by re¬ 
ceiving the same regard in one place as in the other. There 
the brave man is honored, and the coward despised as in 
this life. Some say that the ghosts of those who commit 
suicide occupy a separate part of the village, but their con¬ 
dition differs in no-wise from the others. In the “ next 
world ” human shades hunt and live on those of buffalo and 
other animals that have here died. Whether the shade of 
the buffalo then ceases to exist or not I could find none 
prepared to tell me, but they seem to have a dim faith in 
shades of shades and in shade-lands of shade-lands; belief in 
a shadowy immortality being the basis of their creed. 


As the subject of the Indian system of relationship has 
received much special attention of late years, some of the 
Ilidatsa names for relations are here synoptically given, 
although they may be found also in the dictionary, each in 
its alphabetical order. 

adutaka, grandfather or great-grandfather, or grandfa¬ 
ther’s brothers. 

iku, grandmother, great-grandmother, grandmother’s 
sisters. 

ate, father, father’s brothers, uncles in the male line. 

ate-ka’ti, a true father. 

tatls, another term for father, never used with the pro¬ 
nouns. 

ika’ or ikas, mother, mother’s sisters, aunts in the female 
line. 

liidu, a true mother (same word as for bone). 


XXIV 


INTRODUCTION. 


hu, another term for mother, said to be of amabami 
origin. 

itadu, a mother’s brothers, uncles in the female line, 
isami, a father’s sisters, aunts in the male line, 
itakisa, a general name for sisters and female cousins, 
also the only name for a man’s younger sister, 
itame'tsa, a general name for brother or male cousin, 
also used in the sense of companion as in English. 
The only term for a woman’s elder brother, 
itaku, a woman’s younger sister, 
idu, a woman’s elder sister, 
madu, my elder sister. 

itsuka, a man’s or woman’s younger brother, 
iaka, a man’s elder brother, 
idisi, a son, used by both parents, 
ika, a daughter, a brother’s daughter, 
kida, a husband. 

itadamia, a wife, a wife’s sisters, particularly her younger 
sisters. 

ua, a true wife. 

isikisi, a husband’s brother. 

The terms used above are, with one exception, for rela¬ 
tions of the third person, many of them having the posses¬ 
sive pronoun of the third person ‘ i ’ inseparably prefixed, 
or to be removed only when the pronouns of the first and 
second persons are used. To make the forms of the first 
and second persons ‘ ma ’ and ‘ di ’ are prefixed or substi¬ 
tuted for ‘ i,’ or the fragmentary pronouns ‘ m ’ and ‘ d ’ 
used;—we have thus mate, my father, matsuka, my younger 
brother , dua, your wife , diaka, your elder sister , etc. The 
words tatis, ika’ and hidu do not take possessive pronouns 
ordinarily, but are the same for all persons. All these 
terms may end with s. (See grammar, 89.) 

It will be seen that certain terms for brother and sister 
are used only for those of the male, others only for those 
of the female, 


INTRODUCTION. 


XXV 


Where the term “ brother ” is used in defining the above 
words, male cousins and adopted brothers are commonly 
included. 

Many more ethnographic notes will be found scattered 
through the dictionary and will not be here repeated. 


From Mr. Charles Paqueneau of Fort Berthold, who has 
spent the greater part of his life with the Hidatsa and is 
the only fluent, English-speaking interpreter of the lan¬ 
guage living, I obtained, during the spring of 1870, the 
complete fabulous history of the tribe, its mythology, 
legends and much other information of that character, 
which it has taken him years to gather. My notes on these 
subjects, with all my manuscripts and other possessions, 
were destroyed by a fire at Fort Buford, on the night of 
the 28th of January, 1871. As I never afterwards had an 
opportunity of conversing with Mr. Paqueneau, the lost 
information was never restored. I might have rewritten 
much from memory but errors would probably have crept 
into it. Some of the remembered accounts, which I had 
subsequently corroborated by direct conversation with In¬ 
dians, are embodied in this essay. 

Fort "Wood, New York Harbor, 

June 13 th, 1873. 


4 









HIDATS A GRAMMAR 


I. LETTERS. 

1. Twenty letters, exclusive of the apostrophe, are used in this work to 
express in writing the Hidatsa language. Fifteen of the letters are essen¬ 
tial, and five non-essential. 

Essential Letters. 

2. Of the essential letters, five are vowels, and ten, consonants. 

3. The vowels are a, e, i, o and u. 

a has three sounds;—a (unmarked) has the sound of English a in father ; 
h (short) has the sound of English a in what; a (obscure) has the 
sound of English short u in tun. 

e has three sounds;— e (unmarked) has the sound of English ai in air ; 
8 (short) has the sound of English e in ten ; e (long) has the English 
sound of e in they. 

i has two sounds;— i (unmarked) has the sound of English i in marine; 
I (short) has the sound of English i in tin. 

o has the sound of English o in tone. 

u has the sound of English u in rude. 

4. The apostrophe (’) is placed after vowels to denote a peculiar force or 
aspiration, not initial, in pronouncing them, which slightly modifies the 
sound. 

5. The consonants are c, d, li, h, k, m, p, s, s, t and z. 

c has the sound of German ch in ich. 

d has the common English sound, before consonants, but before vowels 
it has a slight sound of English th in this, d is interchangeable 
with n, l, and r. 

h has the sound of English h in hat. 

li represents the guttural surd no longer in use in English, it is like the 
German ch in machen, but a somewhat deeper sound. 

k has the English sound as in took. 

m has the ordinary English sound as in man; it is interchangeable 
with b and w. 

p lias the ordinary English sound as in pan. 

s has the sound of English s in sun. 




28 


s lias the sound of English sh in shun. 

t lias, before consonants, the ordinary English sound as in tin, but 
before vowels it has a slight sound of English tli in thin. 
z has the sound of English z in azure. 

Non-essential Letters. 

G. The non-essential letters are five of the seven interchangeable conso¬ 
nants of the language; they are b, 1, n, r and w ; they have all the ordinary 
English sounds. The language might be written or spoken without them, 
b, and w, are interchangeable with the essential letter in, and 1, n, and r, with 
the "essential letter d. 

Remarks. 

7. As no great advantage could be seen in retaining two sets of charac¬ 
ters, capitals are here entirely dispensed with in writing the Indian words; 
when, however, the word “ Hidatsa” is used as an English word, the initial 
letter is a capital. Proper names are easily recognized by the termination s. 

8. The following letters of the English, it will be seen, are not included 
in this alphabet,— f, g, j, q, v, x and y. The sound of f, g* and v, are not 
in the language. It is a difficult matter for these Indians, or any one else, to 
pronounce i followed by a vowel (and many other vowel combinations) 
without an intervening consonantal sound of y; elsewhere in their tongue, 
this sound is not heard, and a character to represent it would be useless, 
k is the equivalent of q. English j might be represented by dz, and x by 
ks, but neither of these combinations have been found in the Hidatsa. 

9. Some of the tribe occasionally pronounce the first sound of a like 
English a in hall, and make other slight variations of the vowel sounds 
which, however, seem to be onty individual peculiarities of speech or modi¬ 
fications unavoidably produced by preceding or succeeding consonants. 
It is believed that all the standard variations are duly represented. 

10. Often before a final ts, and more rarely before a final k or s, long 
vowels may be shortened, e changed to I, and a to a. (^f^f 30-33). 

11. It was originally thought advisable to include a short u in the alpha¬ 
bet or to introduce a new character to represent the sound of English u in 
tub ; but it is now believed that wherever this sound constantly occurs, it 
is as a modification of a. 

12. o is never shortened as in the English word not, but a sound much 
like short o is heard in the modification of a, which is represented thus a. 

13. The sounds of English u in pure and oi in oil are not found in this 
language; nor is the sound of ou in our ever used except occasionally in 
the adopted word ho or liao. 


* In the words hold, ipfioki, matsfioki and one or two others, I have 
occasionally heard the k softened into a hard g. 



21 ) 


14. The nasal modification of vowels, so common in the Dakota, does 
not properly belong to the Hidatsa, although a few of the tribe use it with 
aspirated a in the words a’tsi, ida’ti, iha’taha, and llaka’ta. 

15. The sound represented by c occurs only after i, and in accented syl¬ 
lables which are not terminal. 

16. The English sound of ch in chain is represented by ts. 

17. In words beginning with ts, the t is occasionally dropped by women 
and young people, who thus say sakits for tsakits, sitska for tsitska, etc.; 
but according to the best usage of the language, the plain sibilant is never 
found alone with a vowel and never begins a syllable. 

18. Sometimes ts is used where tsis to be regarded as the standard, thus 
itsuasuka, a horse , may be pronounced itsuasuka. 

19. In acquiring the language, and making a correct analysis of its words, 
one of the greatest difficulties to be encountered is the interchangeability 
of certain consonants. 

20. There are two series of interchangeable consonants; a labial series 
consisting of m, b and w, and a dental, or linguo-deutal, series consisting of 
d, 1, n and r. The constituent sounds of each series are subject to inter¬ 
changes so arbitrary and frequent that no definite rules can be given for 
them. The following remarks, however, will be found to apply. 

21. m is regarded as the standard letter of the labial series; it is the one 
most commonly used by those who are considered the best speakers of the 
language. Before the vowel i, b is as commonly used as m in initial sylla¬ 
bles, and w more commonly, in median and terminal syllables. 

22. d is the standard of the dental series. When r is substituted for d, it 
is more commonly done by men than by women, while the latter appear 
to have a greater preference for 1 and n than the former. A desire for 
euphony seems sometimes to determine speakers in their choice. 

23. Whenever, in any word, a non-essential letter is heard as often, or 
nearly as often, as its corresponding essential, the fact is shown in the dic¬ 
tionary in one of three ways: 1st, by putting the modified syllable in 
brackets and indicating its position in the word by dashes, thus “ liamua 
[-bu-]” and “Rami [-wi] ” denote that these words are very often pro¬ 
nounced liabua and hawi; 2d, by placing the entire modified word in 
brackets; and 3d, by giving the modified word in its alphabetical order, 
referring to the same word with the standard spelling. 


II. SYLLABLES. 

24. The words are divided into syllables in such a manner as to make 
the etymology as clear as possible. It is designed that eq,ph syllable shall 
represent one complete factor of a word, or, in case of contraction, more 
than one, but not the fragments of these factors joined together in an arbi- 


30 


trary way to simplify the task to the tongue and ear of the English-speak¬ 
ing student. 

25. A very large proportion of the syllables end with vowels. The more 
common cases in which they end with consonants are given below. (HIT 
26-33). 

26. Initial and median syllables may end with c or k. 

27. Syllables ending in i occasionally take c after i when another sylla¬ 
ble is suffixed H 15); this most frequently happens when the added syllable 
begins with k, p, or t; thus we have micki from mi, and lialipicti from 
halipi. 

28. In the prefixes ak, dak and mak, the k is seldom transferred to the 
following syllable. 

29. Terminal syllables (and consequently words) may end in k, t, s and ts. 

30. A syllable may be closed by k ; 1st, when verbs ending in ki, form 
the imperative by dropping i, as amaki is changed to amak; 2d, when ak, 
duk and tok are used as suffixes ; 3d, when ak, dak or mak stand alone; 
and 4th, in the words duk, tok and tsak^k. 

31. A syllable may be closed by t, when a verb ending in ‘ ti ’ forms its 
imperative by dropping i, as kipsuti is changed to kipsut. 

32. Proper names commonly end with s. 

33. A word which closes a sentence, or stands alone forming a sentence 
by itself, commonly terminates in ts if not with k, t or s. ' ts,’ answers the 
purpose of a Vocal period in most cases. (See ^ 166). 

34. Syllables are frequently contracted by the elision of their vowels. 

35. A contracted syllable, when not terminal, belongs to the succeeding 
syllable. 

36. A syllable consisting of a single vowel, when following immediately 
an accented vowel, or standing immediately between two other vowels, 
may sometimes be omitted. 


III. WORDS. 

37. Words will be considered under the usual eight heads (articles ex¬ 
cluded) of nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, con¬ 
junctions and interjections. 


NOUNS. 

38. For convenience of description, nouns may be divided into two 
classes, primitive and derivative. 


31 


Primitive Nouns. 

39. Primitive nouns are such as, with our present knowledge of the lan¬ 
guage, we are unable to analyze either in whole or in part; as ma’ snow, 
i’, mouth , ista, eye , etc. 

40. Nearly all the monosyllabic nouns are primitive, as are also the 
names of many things which are longest known to the people 

41. Many of the primitive nouns of the Hidatsa have, in kindred lan¬ 
guages, their counterparts, which they closely resemble in sense and sound. 

Derivative Nouns. 

42. Derivative nouns are such as we are able to analyze in whole or in 
part. 

43. Derivative nouns may be formed from words of any class, but chiefly 
from verbs, adjectives and other nouns, either primitive or derived, by cer¬ 
tain prefixes and suffixes, the commonest of which are i, adu, o, aku, ma, 
the possessive pronouns and the diminutives, daka and kaza. 

44. ‘ i’ prefixed to transitive verbs forms nouns denoting the instrument 
or material with which the action is performed: thus ita, an arrow , is from 
ta, to kill, and ikipakisi, a towel from kipakisi, to rub back and forth. 

-Nouns formed in this way are commonly prefixed by other nouns 

(denoting the recipient of the action), by the prefix 1 ma’, or by both ; thus 
maikipakisi, iteikipakisi and maiteikipakisi, arc more commonly used 
than ikipakisi, although all these words denote the same thing. Norms 
of the material are seldom heard without such prefixes; thus rnaiki- 
kaki, thread (from kikaki, to sew), and maiteidusuki, soap (from ite, the 
face, and dusuki, to wash), are not heard in the simple forms of ikikaki 
and idusuki. 

45. * adu’ (an adverb of time and place when used alone) is employed, 
as a prefix, to form nouns under the following circumstances. 

46. ‘ adu’, prefixed to verbs, forms nouns denoting the part on which 
the action is performed ; as adukikaki, a seam, from kikaki, to sew. Here 
‘ ma’, or the name of the thing to which the part belongs, precedes ‘ adu’. 

47. ‘ adu ’ is also prefixed to verbs to form nouns, which signify the place 
where an action is performed; thus from kidusa, to put aicay carefully , 
comes adukidusa, a place of deposit. In this case ‘ ma’, or the noun de¬ 
noting the object of the action, frequently precedes ‘ adu’, e. g. maaduki- 
dusa, a place where anything is put aicay or stored, matakiadukidusa, a 
cupboard. 

48. ‘ adu’ is prefixed to intransitive verbs and adjectives to denote one 
or more of a kind or class, which the verbs or adjectives describe; thus 
from idakisa, left handed, comes aduidakisa, a left handed, person, and from 



32 ' 


kiadetsi, brave, skillful, etc., comes adukiadetsi, one of the brave or skilled. 
In this case ‘ ma ’ usually precedes ‘ adu’. 

49. ‘ o’, prefixed to a verb, may form therewith the name of the action ; 
as in odidi, walking, gait, from didi, to walk. 

50. ‘o’ is used in the same way as ‘ adu ’ to denote the place where, or 
the part whereon, an action is performed, as in odutsi, a mine, from dutse, 
to obtain. 

51. ‘aku’, prefixed to a transitive verb, forms a noun denoting the agent 
or performer of the act, and is nearly or quite synonymous with the En¬ 
glish suffixes er and or. In this case ‘ aku’ is commonly preceded by the 
name of the object; thus from masipisa, grapes, and duti, to eat, we have 
masipisaakuduti, grape eater, i. e., the cedar bird, or ampelis cedroruni. 

52. ‘ aku’ is sometimes used in the same sense as ‘ adu ’ in par. 48. In 
this sense it is common before the adjectives denoting color ; as in akutohi, 
beads, from tolii, blue ; and akusipisa, black cloth, from sipisa, black. 

58. ‘ ma’ (to be distinguished from the pronoun ma) is a prefix of very 
extended use in the language. With some nouns, however, it is rarely used, 
while to a different class it is indispensable. It may be regarded as an in¬ 
definite particle, or as a universal noun or pronoun, qualified by the words 
to which it is prefixed. Some of the more common instances of its use are 
here given. 

54. ‘ma’ is prefixed to nouns of the instrument beginning with ‘ i,’ as 
in par. 44, when the object on which the instrument is employed is not 
designated. When, for precision of definition, the object is named, its 
name takes the place of ‘ ma.’ When the name of the material, of which 
the instrument is made, is included, it commonly precedes ‘ma’; thus 
from maidutsada, a sled, comes mida-maidutsada, a wooden sled. 

55. ‘ma’ is prefixed to adjectives to form the names of articles which 
possess, in a marked degree, attributes to which the adjectives refer; thus 
from tsikoa, sweet, we have matsikoa, sugar. 

56. ‘ ma ’ is prefixed to verbs to form the names of objects on which the 
action denoted by the verb has been performed ; thus from kidutskisi, to 
wash out, comes makidutskisi, a lot of washed dothes. 

57. Many words beginning with ‘ma’ drop this prefix when incorpo¬ 
rated with the possessive pronouns. 

58. The possessive pronouns, (m), ma, mata, (d), di, dita, i and ita, are 
placed before the name of the thing possessed, when together they are pro¬ 
nounced as one word, and the pronoun regarded as a prefix. 

59. In many cases where possessive pronouns are prefixed, the noun 
denoting the thing possessed loses its first syllable, has its accent removed, 
or is otherwise much changed; as in itapa, his moccasins, from hupa mocca¬ 
sins ; itasi, his robe, from jnasi, a robe. 


33 


60. Some words are rarely, others never* heard without a prefixed pos¬ 
sessive pronoun; as itadsi, leggings, his leggings, isami, a father's sister, 
itsuka, a man's younger brother. 

61. But few words, formed as shown only in paragraph 58, are given in 
the dictionary, while all known words in the 3d person, formed as in 
paragraphs 59 and 60, are laid down. Iu the cases of such words as are 
referred to in paragraph 60, as never being heard without a pronoun, the 
noun, with the pronoun omitted, is given sometimes as a hypothetical word. 

Diminutives. 

62. ‘ daka’, which, when used alone, means the offspring or young of 
anything, is employed as a diminutive suffix of general application. Ex.— 
idaka, his or its young (the offspring of any individual or species mentioned) ; 
dahpitsidaka, a bear's cub, from dahpitsi, a bear; miiptsidaka, a hatchet , 
from miiptsi, an axe. 

63. ‘ kaza’ is a diminutive suffix, whose use is limited to about twenty 
■words of the language, including proper names. Ex.—masuakaza, a puppy, 
from masuka, a dog ; miakaza, a young woman, from mia, a woman ; ama 
tikaza, the Little Missouri River, from amati, the Missouri. 

64. The adjective kadista is also used as a diminutive. 

Compound Nouns. 

65. There are certain words -which may be considered as compound 
nouns, because they closely resemble in structure compound nouns in En¬ 
glish ; although no definite distinction can be made in Hidatsa between 
compound and other derived nouns, since the so called prefixes and suffixes 
are really words,—the most of them capable of being used alone. 

j 

66. Compound nouns are formed in the various ways described in pars. 
44, 46, 47, 54 and 57, and also by simply placing two or more nouns to¬ 
gether or by joining nouns to verbs, adjectives and adverbs; e. g., istamidi, 
tears, from ista, the eye and midi, water; masitadahpitsisui, bacon, from 
masi, white man, itadalipitsi, his bear , and sm, fat; istaoze, eye-wash, colly- 
rium, from ista, eye and oze, to pour into; itahatski, the Dakota Indians, 
from ita, arrows, and hatski, long ; amasitakoamasi, the people of Rupert 
Land, from amasitakoa, at the north, and masi, white men. 

67. When a compound noun is formed by simply placing two nouns to¬ 
gether, the first word commonly denotes the possessor, the second, the 
thing possessed. See par. 83. 

68. Sometimes verbs, adjectives and adverbs are used as nouns without 
undergoing any change of form ; as oze, to pour, a drink ; patsatikoa, at the 
west, the west. 

♦This construction is only found with names of things, which necessarily belong to some 
one, and cannot otherwise exist (as blood relations), or are usually so conceived, (as cer¬ 
tain articles of personal property), and only to a limited number of such names. 



34 


Properties of Nouns. 

Gender. 

69. Gender is distinguished by using, for the masculine and feminine, 
different words, which may either stand alone or be added to nouns of the 
common gender. 

70. matse, man , sikaka, young man , itaka, old man , the terms used for 
male relations (as itsuka, idisi, etc.), for callings exclusively masculine, and 
the compounds of these words (as makadista-matse and itakalie), are nouns 
of the masculine gender, applied to the human species. 

70. mia, woman , kaduhe, old woman , terms used for female relations (as 
idu, itakisa, etc.), for those employed in labors exclusively feminine, and the 
compounds of these (such as miakaza, a young woman), are nouns of the 
feminine gender, applied to the human species. 

71. Kedapi, bull, when used alone means a buffalo-bull; hut as a suffix, 
either with or without the interposition of ‘ adu’, it designates the male of 
any of the lower animals. 

72. mite, the generic name for buffalo, means also a buffalo cow. 

73. mika, a mare, is used as a suffix to denote the females of the lower 
animals. It follows the specific name with or without the intervention of 
‘ adu’. 

74. When the species has been previously mentioned, or is otherwise un¬ 
derstood, the specific name need not be prefixed to kedapi, adukedapi, 
mika or adumika. 

Number. 

75. Hidatsa nouns suffer no change of form to indicate the difference 
between singular and plural. 

76. Some nouns we know to be singular or plural from their original 
meaning or from the sense in which they are used. In other cases our only 
means of making a distinction is by the use of numeral adjectives, or such 
adjectives as ahu, many, etsa, all, kausta,/<?w, etc. 

Case. 

77. In view of their syntactical relations, Hidatsa nouns may be parsed 
as having the same cases as nouns of other languages, hut they are not 
inflected to indicate case except, doubtfully, in the possessive. 

78. Possession is ordinarily shown by the use of the possessive pronouns, 
which stand before the noun denoting the thing possessed, and are usually 
considered as prefixed to it. 

79. Two kinds or degrees of possession are indicated in the language. 
One of these may be called intimate, integral, or non-transferable possession ; 
such as the possession we have in the parts of our body, in our blood re- 


35 


lations; the possession which anything lias in its parts or attributes — the 
words idakoa, his f riend or comrade , and iko’pa, her f riend or comrade, are 
put with this class. The other kind, or degree, is that of acquired or trans¬ 
ferable possession; it is the possession we have in anything which we can 
acquire, or transfer from one to another.* 

80. Intimate or non-transferable possession is shown by the use of the 
simple possessive pronouns, i, his, her, its, di, your, ma, my, and the con¬ 
tractions, m and d. Ex.— saki, hand, isaki, his or her hand, disaki, your hand, 
masaki, my hand; iaka, a man's elder brother , diaka, your elder brother , 
miaka, my elder brother. 

81. Transferable possession is shown by the compound possessive pro¬ 
nouns, ita, dita and mata, which are formed by adding the syllable ‘ta’ to 
the simple pronouns. Ex.—midaki, a shield, itamidaki, his shield, ditamidaki, 
your shield, matamidaki, my shield. 

82. The noun denoting the possessor is placed before the noun denot¬ 
ing the thing possessed, and when the former appears in a sentence, only 
the possessive pronoun of the third person can, of course, be used. 

83. Possession may be indicated by simply placing the name of the 
possessor before that of the thing possessed, without the use of an inter¬ 
vening pronoun; the two words may be written separately, or as a com¬ 
pound word (T[^[ 66, 67), if the signification requires it. Some cases of this 
mode of showing possession may be regarded as simply an omission of the 
pronoun i; others as the use of one noun, in the capacity of an adjective, 
to qualify another noun. 

84. When the name of the possessor ends with a vowel, the ‘i’ of ita may 
be dropped, in which case the names of possessor and possessed, with the 
interposed 4 ta’, may be written as a compound word with a vowel or syl¬ 
lable elided, as shown in pars. 34 and 36. But if we regard the 1 ta’ as be¬ 
longing to the noun denoting the possessor, we have as true a possessive 
case as is made by the English “ apostrophe and s.” The possessive par¬ 
ticle ‘ ta’ is never used alone as a prefix. 

85. The position of a word in a sentence and the conjugation of the verb 
which follows, usually show whether it is in the nominative or objective. 
Often, too, the case is rendered unmistakable by the meaning of the word 
and the context. 


Proper Nouns. 

86. Proper names, whether of persons, domestic animals, or places, are 
usually terminated with the consonant s, if not already closed by another 
consonantal sound, as t or k. 

87. 4 s ’ may be regarded as the regular sign of a proper noun. It is well 
to end any proper name with s, where another terminal consonant does 

* The terms here employed for the different classes of possession, as shown by the dif¬ 
ferent kinds of pronouns, are the best which, at present, present themselves; but they do 
not accurately cover all cases. 



36 


not interfere, but it may be omitted when, in calling a person, we accent 
the last syllable of his name, when we annex the word azi to the name of 
a river and occasionally under other circumstances. 

88. ‘s’ is not suffixed to the names of tribes or nations when the whole 
people are referred to. Perhaps such words are not regarded as proper 
nouns by this tribe; but if the name of the tribe is used to distinguish one 
member of it, and is thus employed as a proper name, it takes the terminal 
‘§.’ 

89. Words temporarily employed as proper names (as terms of relation¬ 
ship, etc.), may take the terminal s, if there would be danger of ambiguity 
without it. 

90. The name of a person may consist of a single word, usually a noun ; 
as tsatses, Eagle (the spotted eagle), motsas, Coyote , amazis, Beans. 

91. Personal names are, however, more commonly compound words 
formed — (1) of two nouns; as pedetskihis (pedetska and ilii) Crow-crop t 
ista-uetsSs, Iron-eye; — (2) of a noun and a verb ; as tsakaka-amakis, Sit- 
ting-bird , dahpitsi-iduhis, Rising-bear ;—(3) of a noun and an adjective; as 
tsesa-hadahis, Lean-wolf , tsakaka-tohis, Blue-bird ; — (4) of a noun and ad¬ 
verb; as midikoa-miis, Woman-at-the-water ; — (5) of a pronoun, noun and 
adjective; as itamidaki-ihotakis, Ilis-white-shield, — and in various other 
ways.* 

92. Names of females often begin with the word mia (wia, bia), or end 
with miis (wiis), both of which mean woman. Ex.—miahopas, Medicine- 
woman, miadahpitsis, Bear-woman , tsakawiis, Bird-woman, matahimiis, 
Turtle-woman. 

93. Localities are named from physical peculiarities or historical associ¬ 
ations. The names of various localities known to the tribe are appended 
to the dictionary. 


SYNTAX OF NOUNS. 

94. A noun precedes a verb, adjective, noun in apposition, or any 
part of speech used as its predicate. Since there is no verb “ to be ” used 
as in English, any word, except a conjunction or interjection, may be em¬ 
ployed as the predicate of a noun. 


* Children are named when a few days old ; sometimes four names are given, but only 
one used. In after years, the names of the males are formally changed once or oftener, 
the earliest change being usually made after a youth has first struck au enemy. The 
names of women are rarely changed. Sometimes, if a name is long, a part of it is dropped. 
Nicknames are sometimes given on account of absurd sayings, ludicrous circumstances 
or personal peculiarities, and such names occasionally supplant the true ones. Young 
men are sometimes named from distinguished warriors, deceased. Horses are rarely 
named, but dogs very often, particularly such as are made pets by children. White men 
known to the tribe are ordinarily named by these Indians from personal peculiarities; as 
“ Long-neck,” “ Fish-eyes,” “ Antelope-eye,” etc. Names of whites are sometimes trans¬ 
lated, thus Pierre is rendered mis, a rock. 



37 


95. The name of ‘ the person spoken to ’ commonly follows a verb in the 
imperative; but in almost all other cases a noun, whether subject or object, 
stands before the verb. 

96. When the names of both subject and object appear, the former usually 
precedes the latter. 

97. The name of the possessor precedes that of the thing possessed. 


PRONOUNS. 

98. Hidatsa pronouns may be divided into four classes, namely, personal, 
relative , interrogative and demonstrative. 

Personal Pronouns. 

99. Personal pronouns are of two kinds, simple and compound, 

100. Simple, or primary, personal pronouns consist, in the singular, of 
but one syllable; they may stand alone, as separate words, but are usually 
found incorporated with other words. 

101. Compound personal pronouns consist of more than one syllable, 
are derived from simple pronouns, and, except those in the possessive case, 
are used as separate words. 

102. Personal pronouns exhibit, by their different forms, their person , 
number and case. 

103. They have the first, second and third persons , the singular and 
plural numbers , and the nominative, possessive, and objective cases. 

Simple Pronouns. 

104. The simple personal pronouns are five in number; they are ma and 
mi (sometimes contracted to m) for the first person, da and di (sometimes 
contracted to d) for the second person, and i for the third person. 

105. They stand alone when used for repetition and emphasis, but other¬ 
wise are incorporated with other -words. 

106. ma(I) and da (thou) are the proper nominative forms; they are used 
as the nominatives of transitive verbs, but may also be employed as the 
nominatives of certain intransitive verbs which have an active sense; as 
amaki, he sits, amamaki, 1 sit, adamaki, you sit. They may be prefixed or 
suffixed to, or inserted into verbs; thus we have, kikidi, he hunts, makikidi, 
1 hunt, dakikidi, you hunt; katsihe, he extinguishes , katsima, 1 extinguish, 
katsida, you extinguish ; akakasi, he writes, amakakasi, 1 write, adakakasi, 
you write. 

107. ma (my) is used in the possessive case, prefixed to the noun denot¬ 
ing the thing possessed, in intimate or non-trausferable possession; as in 
masaki, my hand, from saki, hand ; matsi, my foot, from itsi, his foot, (If 80). 


38 


108. mi (me), di (tliee), and i (him, her, it) are prefixed to transitive 
verbs to denote the object; as from kidesi, he loves, we have mikidesi, he 
loves me, dikidesi, he loves thee, ikidesi, he loves him, her or it, midakidesi, 
(me thou lovest), you love me, and dimakidesi, (thee 1 love), 1 love you. 

109. mi and di are, however, used as the nominatives of such intransitive 
verbs as imply only quality or state of being, and of qualifying words used 
as verbs. 

110. di (thy, your) and i (his, her, its, theirs) are also used in the posses¬ 
sive case, prefixed to the name of the thing possessed, to denotenon-trans¬ 
ferable possession (*i~ 80). Examples — disaki, your hand, isaki, his hand, 
from saki, hand; ditsi, your foot, itsi, his foot (the hypothetical word “ tsi ” 
is not used without the possessive pronouns). 

111. ma and mi, da and di, are commonly contracted, when placed before 
vowels, according to orthographic rules already given (1f^[ 34 and 35); as in 
makulii, my ear, dakuhi, your ear, from akufii, ear,- mista, my eye, dista, 
your eye, from ista, eye. 

112. The possessive pronoun, i, is often omitted before words beginning 
with a vowel, where possession is intimated; thus akuhi, ear, is also his or 
her ear ; ista, eye, also his or her eye. 

113. The plural forms of simple pronouns are not incorporated: they are 
mido, plural of ma and mi; dido, plural of da, and di, and hido, plural of i. 

Compound Personal Pronouns. 

114. The compound personal pronouns are formed from the simple pro¬ 
nouns by means of suffixes. The words most readily recognizable, as of 
this class, are micki, dicki and icki (with their plurals), aud the possessives, 
mata, dita and ita. 

115. micki (1st person), dicki (2d person) and icki (3d person) are used 
in an emphatic and limiting sense, and are nearly synonymous with the 
English words myself, thyself and himself or herself. They may be used 
alone, as nominatives or objectives to verbs, but are commonly repetitious, 
being followed by the simple incorporated pronouns with which they agree, 

11G. Their plurals, used in the same way as the singular forms, are midoki 
(ourselves), didoki (yourselves) and hidoki (themselves). 

117. mata (my, our), dita (thy, your) and ita (his, her, its, their) are com¬ 
pound possessive pronouns, and are ordinarily used to indicate an acquired 
or transferable possession (Tlf 79, 81); they are prefixed to nouns, denot¬ 
ing the thing possessed (*[ 82). 

118. In compound words, formed of the names of possessor and possessed 
with the pronoun ita, the i of ita may sometimes be dropped. See ^ 36 
and 84. 

119. mata, dita and ita, have not separate forms for singular and plural. 

120. The words matamae (1st pers.), ditamae (2d pers.) and itamae (3d 


39 


pers.), are used respectively as the equivalents of the English words, mine 
or my own, thine, or thy own, and hie, Tier's, its, their's, or his own, etc., and 
also as the equivalents of the Dakota words, mitawa, nitawa and tawa. 
The Hidatsa words, however, I regard not as pronouns, but as nouns 
formed by prefixing the compound possessive pronouns to the noun ‘ mae.’ 
According to the usual custom with interchangeable consonants, these 
words are often pronounced, “ matawae,” “ nitawae,” and “ itawae.” 

Synopsis op Personal Pronouns. 



Simple. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1st pers. - 

f nom., ma and mi. 

{ poss., ma. 

all cases, mido. 

2d pers. J 

[obj., mi. 
r nom., da and di. 
poss., di. 

all cases, dido. 

1 

3d pers. -! 

.obj., di 

'nom.-(■“ 131). 

poss., i. 

all cases, hido. 

1 

.obj.,i. 

Compound. 

With ‘ki’ for emphasis and limitation. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

1st pers., micki. 

midoki. 

2d 

pers., dicki. 

didoki. 

3d pers., icld. 

hidoki. 


With ‘ta’ to denote transferable possession. 

Singular and Plural. 

1st pers., mata. 

2d pers., dita. 

3d pers., ita. 

Relative Pronouns. 

121. The interrogatives tapa, what, tape, who, the formative prefix aku 
and some other words are used as relative pronouns 

Interrogative Pronouns. 

122. Interrogative pronouns, and all other interrogative words of the 
language, begin with t, which, being always followed by a vowel in these 
words, has a slight sound of English th in thing. 

123. tape, who, tapa, what, taka, what, to, which or where, tua, which, 
how, are the principal interrogative pronouns. 

124. Their compounds, tapeitamae, whose? tapata, takata, tota, whither? 
todu, where? tuami, how many? etc., etc., are sometimes used as pronouns, 
although considered nouns, adjectives or adverbs. The line of distinction 
is often difficult to be drawn. 



40 


Demonstrative Pronouns. 

125. The demonstrative pronouns are hidi, this , hido, that, with ku and 
se or sia, that , him, distinctive or emphatic forms. 

126. Their compounds are hidimi, this many, hidika, this much , liiduka, 
this way, kutapa, what is that? kuadu, that place, kutsaki, setsaki, that 
alone, sedu, just there, etc., etc. These, like the compounds of interroga¬ 
tive pronouns, are used as pronouns, but more commonly as other parts of 
speech. 

SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 

127. All simple pronouns in the objective case, or used separately for 
emphasis, and usually all compound pronouns in any case precede the 
verb. 

128. Personal pronouns in the objective commonly precede those in the 
nominative. 

129. When mi or di is used as the nominative of an intransitive verb 
(T[ 109), or of any word used as such, it stands before the verb. 

130. When ma or da is used as an incorporated pronoun in the nomina¬ 
tive (T[ 106), its position in the verb is usually determined as follows : (1st) 
In a verb formed directly from a verbal root and beginning with any conso¬ 
nant (except m followed by a), the pronoun is prefixed in the indicative; 
as in kikiski, he measures, makikiski, I measure, dakikski, you measure; 
patsaki, he cuts, mapatsaki, 1 cut, dapatsaki, you cut. (2d) In a verb 
formed directly from a verbal root and beginning with a vowel, or the syl¬ 
lable ma, the pronoun is inserted in the indicative; while the verb, if begin¬ 
ning in the third person with i or o, is made to begin with a in the first 
and second persons. Ex.— asadi, he steals, amasadadi, I steal, adasadadi, you 
steal; maihe, he tries , mamahe, 1 try, madahe, you try; iku’pa, he hales, 
amaku’pa, 1 hate , adaku’pa, you hate ; odapi, he discovers, amodapi, 1 discover, 
adodapi, you discover. (3d) In a transitive verb formed from an intransitive 
verb by the addition of he, ha or ke, the pronoun is suffixed. 

131. There is no incorporated pronoun in the third person nominative.* 

132. The use of incorporated pronouns being necessary to the conjuga¬ 
tion of verbs, they cannot be omitted when several verbs refer to the same 
subject or object. 

133. Incorporated possessive pronouns must be prefixed to the name 
of each thing possessed, even when but one possessor is indicated. 

134. A demonstrative, relative or interrogative pronoun usually stands 
at the beginning of the clause to which it belongs. 

135. When a relative and demonstrative pronoun appear in the same 
sentence, the clause containing the former usually stands first. 


* Possibly in maihu and maihe we have exceptions to this rule. See 1100. 



41 


136. Some modifications of the above rules will be discussed under the 
head of verbs. 


VERBS. 

137. Almost any word in the language may be used and conjugated as 
an intransitive verb, and may again, by certain suffixes, be changed to a 
transitive verb and conjugated as such. 

138. Adjectives, nouns, adverbs and prepositions are often thus treated ; 
pronouns, conjunctions and interjections, rarely. 

139. But there is a large number of words in the language, which are 
used only as verbs and are not derived from other parts of speech; these 
may be called verbs proper. 

140. Many verbs proper we cannot analyze and therefore consider them 
as primitive verbs. Such are ki, to bear or carry, hu, to come, de, to depart, 
eke, to know, etc. 

141. Other verbs proper, which we call derivative, are formed, by the use 
of certain prefixes and suffixes, from verbal roots, from primitive verbs and 
from other derivative verbs. 


Verbal Roots. 

142. Verbal roots are not used as independent words. A great number 
have been found in the language but satisfactory meanings have been dis¬ 
covered for a very few only, some of which are here given for illustration: 
liapi, bark, peel, ftese, tear through, ftofti, break across, hu, spill, overset, kahe, 
spread, stretch, kape, tear into, lacerate, kaptsi, notch, kide, push, kiti, clear 
off, ktade, pound in, peg, midi, twist, mitsi, mince, mu, make noise, mudsi, 
roll up, papi, roughen, chap, pi, penetrate, pftu, or pftuti, squeeze or press out, 
pkiti, smooth out (? fr. kiti), psu, dislocate, ptsu or ptsuti, thrust forth, sipi, 
loosen, ski, open out, sku, extract, suki, erase, ta, destroy, taki, place in con¬ 
tact, shut, tapi, squeeze, tsa, separate, tsada, slide, tsa’ti, stick, polish, tsiti, raze , 
tski, squeeze on a small surface from different directions, shear, strangle, etc., 
tskipi, pare, tskise, wash, tskupi, bend. Some of these may be modified 
roots, containing something more than the simplest radical idea, but could 
not be well further analyzed. 

143. Some of the prefixes and suffixes referred to are independent words, 
but many of them are used only when connected with verbs. Some are to 
be regarded as adverbs, others perhaps as auxiliary verbs. 

Prefixes. 

144. The more important prefixes, whose meanings have been determined, 
are ada, ak, da, dak, du, ki, mak, and pa. 

145. ‘ ada’ immediately precedes the root, and denotes that the action is 
performed by the foot, or by means of heat or fire; as in adahohi, to break 

6 


42 


across with the foot, from Rolii, break across; and adakite, to clear off by fire, 
as in burning a prairie, from the root kite, clear off. 

146. ‘ ak ’ denotes that the action is performed with or on something; as 
aksue, to spit on, from sue, to spit. 

147. ‘ da ’ denotes that the action is done, or may properly be done, with 
the mouth; it stands immediately before the root, and is often pronounced 
* ra ’ or ‘ la.’ Ex.—datsa, to bite off, from tsa, separate; daliese, to tear with 
the teeth, from the root liese, tear. 

148. ‘dak’ (or daka) stands immediately before a root or verb to denote 
that the action is performed with a sudden forcible impulse, or with great 
force applied during a short time, and usually repeated at short intervals; as in 
daktsaki, to chop , from tsaki, cut; dakahohi, to break across with a blow, from 
the root Rolii, break across, n is often used as the initial sound of this prefix. 

149. ‘ du ’ is prefixed to roots, to convert them into verbs, without mate¬ 
rially adding to their significance; it may be said to denote general or inde¬ 
finite causation; is sometimes pronounced ru or lu. Ex.—duRoRi, to break 
across in any way or by any means, from RoRi break across; dumidi, to twist 
in any way, from the root midi, twist. 

150. ‘ ki’ is sometimes added directly to verbal roots, but more commonly 
to verbs. It may be added to any verb, no matter how formed, and is the 
most extensively used verbal prefix in the language. It intensifies the 
meaning; denotes that the action is done forcibly, repeatedly, completely, 
with difficulty or over the entire object. Sometimes it merely strengthens, 
without altering the meaning of the verb; in other cases it totally changes 
its application. Some verbs are never used without it. Ex.—dafipa, to put 
the arms around, kidaRpa, to hug; pati, to fall down, kipati, to fall from a great 
height. The words kime, to tell, and kidesi, to love, have not simpler forms. 

151. ‘ mak ’ (or maki) is prefixed to verbs to denote opposition or recip¬ 
rocity ; that the action is performed by two contending parties, that the 
motion is from opposite directions, that two actors mutually and recipro¬ 
cally perform the action; thus from pataki, to close, comes makipataki, to 
close anything which has both sides moved in the act, as a book or a pocket 
comb, and from iku’pa, to hate, makiiku’pa, to hate mutually, to hate one 
another. 

152. ‘pa’ is a causative prefix denoting that the action is done by the 
hand, or by an instrument held in the hand, or that it may be properly so 
performed. It stands immediately before roots and primitive verbs. 
Ex.—paRu, to pour tcith the hand, from Ru, spill; pamidi, to twist with the 
hand from midi, twist. 


Suffixes. 

153. The principal suffixes to verbs are adsi, adui, de, he, ha, ke, ksa 
and ti, with duk and tok for the subjunctive, di, diha, mi and miha for the 
future indicative, and ts for the closing of sentences. 


43 


154. ‘adsi’ denotes a resemblance or approach to the standard described 
by the simpler form of the verb; it is most commonly, however, used with 
adjectives, rarely with verbs proper (T[ 222). Ex.—mitapa, to lie, to deceive, 
mitapadsi to equivocate. 

155. ‘adui’ denotes progression and incompleteness in action on condi¬ 
tion ; it answers sometimes the purpose of the English termination ing in 
present participles. Verbs ending in ‘ adui ’ are intransitive and usually pre¬ 
ceded by ‘ Id.’ Ex.—titsi, thick, titsadui, or kititsadui, gradually increasing 
in thickness; isia, bad, isiadui, deteriorating, to become progressively worse. 

15G. Verbs lose their fiual vowels when ‘ adsi’ and ‘ adui ’ are suffixed. 

157. ‘ de ’ may be translated, almost, nearly, about to, and denotes an 
incomplete action or condition. It is added to, and forms, intransitive verbs. 
Ex.—tsipiti, to fall upon the water, to be in a condition to sink, tsipitide to be 
about to fall, or nearly falling, on the water. 

158. ‘ lie,’ signifying generally to make or cause, changes some intransi¬ 
tive verbs, and words used as such, to transitive. Verbs take it in the third 
person indicative, but rarely retain it in the first person; while in the 
second person indicative, and in the imperative, it is dropped or changed 
to ‘ lia.’ The incorporated pronouns are suffixed to verbs formed by the 
addition of‘he,’ which suffix they sometimes follow, but more commonly 
replace. Ex.—komi, complete, finished, komilie, he finishes, komima, I finish, 
komida, you finish, komihada, finish thou ! 

159. ‘ ha’ is the form of ‘ he’ used in the second person. 

160. ‘ ke,’ signifying to cause, to change, to use for, is added to intransi¬ 
tive verbs, to form transitive verbs. It is more extensive in its application 
than ‘ he ’ and may be added to any of the numerous words of the language 
which are capable of being used as intransitive verbs. It is retained in all 
persons, tenses and modes, and followed by the incorporated pronouns. 
When ‘ ke ’ is suffixed, the verb is most commonly put in the intensive form, 
The more familiar instances, onty, of its use are given in the dictionary. Ex. 
hisi, red, hisike, to dye or color red, dyed red; isia, bad, isiake, to make bad, 
change from good to bad, damaged, debased, kiisiake, (intensive), he damages, 
kiisiakema, 1 damage, kiisiakeda, you damage ; ati, a house, kiatike, to use 
for a dwelling, or convert into a dwelling ; midi, water, kimidike, to liquefy. 

161. ‘ ksa’ denotes that an action is performed habitually or excessively, 
or that a quality exists to a great or excessive degree; it is used with verbs 
proper and adjectives. Ex.—mitapa, to lie or deceive, mitapaksa, to lie habitu¬ 
ally or excessively; ide, to speak, ideksa, to speak garrulously or unguardedly, 
to say too much, (*[ 227) 

162. ‘ ti,’ denoting a favorable condition or readiness to perform an act, 
it is added to intransitive verbs, forming new intransitive verbs. Ex.—liua, 
to cough, liuati, to be about to cough, to feel a desire to cough; halipi, to sneeze, 
hahpicti, to desire to sneeze; tsipi, to sink, tsipiti, to fall upon the water, to be 
placed in a condition favorable for sinking. 


44 


163. ‘ duk,’ used alone as an adverb of future time, is suffixed to subjoined 
verbs, to denote doubt or condition in regard to future time, and is there¬ 
fore equivalent to a sign of the subjunctive mode in the future tense. Ex. 
miadeheduk ditamamits, If I am angered, I will kill you. 

164. ‘tok,’ an adverb used to denote doubt and interrogation, is usually 
used independently, but may be suffixed to verbs to indicate the past and 
present tense of the subjunctive mode; as in madetok diamakatats, had I 
gone 1 would not have seen you. 

165. ‘di’ (2d person singular), dilia (2d person plural), ‘ mi’ (1st person 
singular) aud ‘ miha ’ (1st person plural) denote the future tense, indicative 
mode, and may follow any verb which takes ma and da for its incorporated, 
nominative pronouns. They have the appearance of being only repeated 
pronouns, but are probably different forms of a regularly conjugated, aux¬ 
iliary verb. 

166. A verb, or any word used as such, in the indicative mode, when 
closing a sentence, and therefore when standing alone and forming a sen¬ 
tence by itself, is terminated in ‘ ts,’ if in other situations it ends in a vowel 
(Tf 33). By comparison of this with previous rules, it will be seen that a 
large majority of the words of the language are capable of receiving this 
termination. In the conjugations following, some of the verbs are shown 
with the terminal l ts’ (T[Tf 193,195). 

167. ta ’ (not), and ta (only), are often pronounced as if suffixed; they 
are regarded, however, as independent adverbs. 

168. There are verbs which are heard to end sometimes in ‘ i ’ and some¬ 
times in ‘ e,’ and apparently when a passive sense is meant by the former 
and an active by the latter. Owing, however, to the indistinct manner in 
which final vowels are so often pronounced, and to certain individual lib¬ 
erties taken with vowel sounds, the value of this peculiarity, as a gram¬ 
matical rule, cannot now be estimated. A few words, where this change 
of terminal vowels was often heard, are given in both forms in the dictionary. 

169. Many verbs ending in i or e change these letters to a in the second 
person indicative and also in the imperative when the final i or e is not 
dropped. 

Properties of Verbs. 

Person. 

170. The first aud second persons are shown by the incorporated pro¬ 
nouns, ‘ ma ’ and ‘ mi ’ for the former, ‘ da ’ and 4 di ’ for the latter. The 
third person is shown by the simple form of the verb. 

Number. 

171. In the conjugation of the verb number is indicated only in the 
future indicative, where ‘mi’ and ‘di’ are used in the singular, for the 
first and second persons respectively, and ‘ miha’ and ‘ diha ’ in the plural. 
See 1 165. 


45 


Mode. 

172. Three modes only, the infinitive, indicative and imperative , are shown 
in the conjugations of verbs. The subjunctive and potential are indicated 
by adverbs or additional verbs. 

Infinitive. 

173. The infinitive mode is the same as the third person indicative, the 
simple form of the verb. It is, however, rarely used, finite verbs being 
employed instead; thus “ I try to cough ” is more frequently rendered 
maliua mamaliets, 1 cough, 1 try than hua mamahets, to cough 1 try. 

174. In the third person no distinction is made between -the infinitive 
and indicative; thus hua maihets may be rendered either to cough he tries 
or he coughs he tries. 

Indicative. 

175. The simple form of the verb is used as the third person indicative. 
For the first and second persons this is modified by the incorporated pro¬ 
nouns; and for the future tense, as shown in pars. 165 and 171. 

Imperative. 

176. The imperative mode has five forms. 

177. The first consists in using the same form as the second person in¬ 
dicative ; this is done mostly in verbs which have the incorporated pro¬ 
nouns suffixed. 

178. The second is made by changing final ‘ i ’ or ‘ e ’ of the infinitive to 
‘ a,’ or using an infinitive ending in a or u. 

179. The third is formed by dropping the final ‘i’ of verbs ending in 
‘hi’ and sometimes of those ending in ‘ti,’ thus we have amak, impera¬ 
tive of amaki. 

180. In the fourth form the auxiliary ‘ da ’ is added to the second form 
of the imperative; it is usually, but not invariably, placed after the verb. 
‘ da’ seems to be a form of the verb de, to depart, meaning go thou! 

. 181. The fifth form of the imperative mode is made by adding ‘ diha ’ 
instead of ‘ da.’ 

182. The fourth and fifth forms are used when immediate compliance 
with the order is desired. 


Tense. 

183. But two distinctions, in regard to time, are made in conjugating 
verbs: one of these is for indefinite, the other for future time. 

184. Other varieties of time are expressed by adverbs, suffixed or inde¬ 
pendent, or by other words used independent!} 7 . 

185. The indefinite tense, used for both present and past time, is shown by 
the simple form of the verb, with or without the incorporated pronouns. 


40 


186. For the future tense, indicative mode, ‘ mi’ and ‘ miha’ are added to 
the indefinite, for the first person, and ‘ di ’ and ‘ diha ’ for the second per- 

\ son; in the third person the form is the same as in the indefinite. 

Conjugation. 

187. All transitive and some intransitive verbs are properly conjugated, 
having different forms for the different modes and tenses. 

188. The greater part of the intransitive verbs, and words used as such, 
are not properly conjugated, since they suffer no change of form in the dif¬ 
ferent modes and tenses 

189. The verbs which are conjugated, may be known by taking ma (I), 
and da (thou) for their incorporated pronouns in the nominative; while 
those which are not conjugated, have the pronouns mi and di incorporated 
in the nominative case. 


Conjugated Verbs. 

190. The conjugation has three principal forms. In the first form the 
pronouns are prefixed; in the second,inserted; and in the third,suffixed. 

191. In adding the pronouns, however, some additional changes are made 
in the verb, producing in all ten varieties of the conjugation. 

192. In the first variety the incorporated pronouns are simply prefixed 
to the third person, or simple form of the verb ; while the latter remains 
unchanged. Example.—kidSsi, to love, or he loves. 

Infinitive Mode. 
kiSsdi, to love. 

Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Singular and Plural. 

3d person, kidesi, he, she, or it loves or loved, they love or loved. 

2d person. dakidSsi, thou lovest, you love or loved. 

1st person, makidesi, I or we love or loved. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3d person, kidgsi, he she or it will love. 

2d person, dakedSsidi, thou wilt love. 

1st person. makidSsimi, I will love. 

Plural, 

3d person, kidgsi, they will love. 

2d person. dakidSsidiha, you will love. 

1st person. makidSsimiha, ice will love. 

Imperative Mode. 

kidesa, kidesada, kidSsadiha, love thou, love ye. 


47 


193. In the second variety the first letter of the simple form is dropped 
when the pronouns are prefixed, and the pronouns are contracted to ‘ m ’ 
and ‘ d.’ The words belonging to this variety are not numerous; they all 
begin with 1 d,’ and consequently in the indicative mode, indefinite tense, 
the forms of the first and third persons are the same. Ex.—duti, to eat , to 
chew. 

Infinitive Mode. 
duti, to chew, or eat. 


Indicative Mode. 


Indefinite Tense, 

Singular and Plural. 

(without terminal ts.) (with terminal ts.) 

3d person, duti, he eats, etc., dutits. 

2d person, duti, you eat, etc., dutits. 

1st person, muti, 1 eat, etc., mutlts. 


Future tense. 


Singular. 

3d person, duti, he will eat, etc., 
2d person, dutidi, thou wilt eat. 
1st person, mutimi, 1 will eat. 


Plural. 

3d person, duti, they will eat. 

2d person, dutidiha, you will eat. 
1st person, mutimiha, we win eat. 


dutits. 

dutidlts. 

mutimlts. 

dutits. 

dutidihats 

mutimihats. 


Imperative. 

dut. da’ dut, etc. eat, eat thou. 


194. The third variety of the conjugation has the pronouns prefixed to 
the unaltered simple form ; but the letter ‘ a ’ is in turn prefixed to the pro¬ 
nouns, causing them to appear inserted in the verb ; further, the pronouns 
are contracted by the omission of their vowels. Most verbs beginning 
with ‘ o ’ belong to this variety. Ex.—okipapi, to find, to recover something 
lost, but not to make an original discovery. 

Infinitive Mode. 
okipapi, to find. 

Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Sing, and Plur. 

3 d pers. okipapi, he, she or it finds . or found or they, etc. 

2c? pers. adokipapi, you find or found. 

1st pers. amokipapi, I or we find ox found. 


48 


Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3d pers. okipapi, he, she, or it will find. 

2d pers. adokipapidi, thou wilt find. 

1st pers. amokipapimi, 1 will find. 

Plural. 

3d pers. okipapi, they will find. 

2d pers. adokipapidika, you will find. 

1st pers. amokipapimika, we mil find. 

Imperative Mode. 
okipapa, okipapa da’, okipapa dilia. 

195. In lire fourth variety the incorporated pronouns are inserted in the 
verb by being placed immediately after the first syllable of the simple form ; 
■while no change is made in the latter except the separation of the syllables. 
Verbs conjugated thus have ‘ a ’ or ‘ e ’ for their first syllables. Ex.— eke, 
to know, to recognize. 

Infinitive Mode, 
eke, to know. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Sing, and Plur. 

(without terminal ‘ ts.’) (with terminal ‘ ts.’) 

3d pers. eke, he, etc. knows or knew. 

2d pers. edake, you know or knew. 

1st pers. emake I know or knew. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3d pers. eke, he, etc., will know. 

2d pers. edakedi, thou wilt know. 

1st pers. emakemi, 1 will know. 

Plural. 

3d pers. eke, they will know. 

2d pers. edakediha, you will know. 

1st pers. emakemiha, we will knoic. 

Imperative Mode. 
eka, eka da’, eka diha. 

196. To the fifth variety belong verbs beginning with 4 ma.’ In it the 
incorporated pronouns come after the first syllable, and are substituted for 


ekfets. 

edakSts. 

emak&ts. 


ekSts. 

edakedits. 

emakemlts. 

ekSts. 

edakedihats. 

emakemihats. 


49 


the second syllable of the simple form, which is, therefore, changed by the 
loss of a syllable. Ex.— mafhu, to trade, to buy. 

Infinitive Mode. 
maihu, to trade. 

Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Singular and Plural. 

3 d pers. maihu, he or she trades or traded, they , etc. 

2d pers. madahu, you trade or traded. 

1 si pers. mamahu, I or we trade or traded. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3 dpers. maihu, he or she will trade. 

2d pers. madahudi, thou wilt trade. 

1 si pers. mamaliumi, 1 wild trade. 

Plural. 

3 dpers. maihu, they will trade. 

2d pers. madahudiha, you will trade. 

1 st pers. mamahumiha, we will trade. 

Imperative Mode. 
madahu da’, maihu da’. 

197. In the sixth variety the incorporated pronouns are inserted in the 
same way as in the fourth; but the syllable ‘ da ’ is inserted, in the first and 
second persons, immediately before the last syllable of the verb. This extra 
interpolated syllable does not seem to answer the purpose of either pro¬ 
noun, adverb or auxiliary; its utility has not been discovered, asadi, to 
steal, atadi, to go out of a house , and perhaps a few other verbs are conju¬ 
gated in this way. 

Infinitive Mode. 
asadi, to steal. 

Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Singular and Plural. 

3c? pers. asadi, he or she steals or stole, they steal, or stole. 

2d pers. adasadadi, you steal or stole. 

1st pers. amasadadi, I or we steal or stole. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3 d pers. asadi, he or she will steal. 

2d pers. adasadadidi, thou wilt steal. 

1st pers. amasadadimi, 1 will steal. 

7 


50 


Plural. 

3rZ pers. asadi, they will steal. 

2d pers. adasadadidiha, you will steal. 
1st pers. amasadadimiha, we will steal. 

Imperative Mode. 
asada da’, asada diha. 


198- To the seventh variety belong verbs beginning in ‘ i ’ ( not the in¬ 
corporated pronoun of the third person objective). Here the incorporated 
pronouns are inserted, but ‘ i ’ is changed to ‘ a.’ Ex.— fka, to see. 

Infinitive Mode. 
ika, to see. 

Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Singular and Plural. 

3 d pers. ika, he or she sees or saw , they see or saw. 

2d pers. adaka, you see or saw. 

1st pers. amaka, J or we see or saw. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3 d pers. ika, he or she will see. 

2d pers. adakadi, thou wilt see. 

1st pers. amakami, I will see. 

Plural. 

3 d pers. ika, they will see. 

2d pers. adakadiha, you will see. 

1st pers. amakamiha, we idll see. 

Imperative Mode. 
ika, ika da’, ika diha. 

Besides these, ika has a reduplicated form iD the imperative, used in an 
exclamatory manner, ikaka! See there ! Behold ! 

199. The eighth variety is distinguished by the incorporated pronouns 
of the nominative being substituted for the last syllable of the infinitive 
form. Nearly all transitive verbs formed from intransitive verbs by the 
suffix ‘ he’ belong to the eighth variety. Ex.— hapihd, to lose. 

Infinitive Mode. 
hapihe, to lose. 


51 


Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Singular and Plural. 

3 d pers. liapihe, lie or she loses or lost, or they lose or lost. 
2d pers. liapida, you lose or lost. 

1st pers. hapima, 1 lose or lost, or we lose or lost. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3d pers. liapihe, he will lose. 

2d pers. liapidadi, thou wilt lose. 

1st pers. hapimami, 1 will lose. 

Plural. 

3d pers. liapihe, they will lose. 

2d pers. lig,pidadiha, you will lose. 

1st pers. hapimamiha, we will lose. 

Imperative Mode. 
liapida, da’ liapida, liapihada. 


200. The ninth variety is the same as the eighth, with the addition of 
the simple possessive pronouns, in full or contracted, prefixed to the verb. 
In this variety are found but lew verbs; they are formed from nouns by the 
addition of the suffix ‘ he’; they undergo a double inflection, one to denote 
possession of the noun, and the other to show person, tense, etc., in the 
verb. Ex.— uahe, to make or cause to he a wife, to teed, from ua, a wife. 
ualie in its active sense, or used personally, is said of the male. 

Infinitive Mode. 
uahe, to make a wife, to wed. 

Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Singular and Plural. 

3d pers. uahe, he makes his wife, he or they wed or wedded, etc. 

2d pers. duada, you make your wife or wives, you wed, or wedded, etc. 

1st pers. muama, I make my wife, I or we wed, etc. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3d pers. uahe, he will make his wife, or wed. 

2d pers. duadadi, thou wilt make thy wife, or wed. 

1st pers. muamami, Twill make my wife, or wed. 


I 


Plural. 

3d pers. uahe, they will make their wives, or teed. 

2d pers. duadadiha, you will make your wives , etc. 

1st pers. muamamiha, we will make our wives , or wed. 

Imperative Mode. 
duada, duaha da’, dualia diha. 


201. In the tenth variety the pronouns are suffixed to the simple form, 
which in itself remains unchanged. Transitive verbs formed from the intran¬ 
sitive by the addition of ‘ ke ’ are conjugated in this way. Ex.— kitsakike, to 
render completely good , to make whole or sound, to change from bad to good , 
etc., from tsaki, good. 


Infinitive Mode. 
kitsakike, to make good. 

Indicative Mode. 

Indefinite Tense. 

Sing, and Plur. 

3d pers. kitsakike, he she it or they make or made good. 
2d pers. kitsakikeda, you make or made good. 

1st pers. kitsakikema, I or we make or made good. 

Future Tense. 

Singular. 

3d pers. kitsakike, he she or it will make good. 

2d pers. kitsakikedadi, thou wilt make good. 

1st pers. kitsakikemami, 1 will make good. 

Plural. 

3d pers. kitsakike, they will make good. 

2d pers. kitsakikedadiha, you 'will make good. 

1st pers. kitsakikemamika, we tvill make good. 

Imperative Mode. 
kitsakikeda, kitsakike diha. 


Unconjugated Verbs. 

202. All adjectives, adverbs, nouns, etc., used as predicates of nouns are 
regarded as intransitive verbs; there beingnocopula in the language. These 
intransitive verbs, and such others aJdenote only quality or condition, suffer 
no change of form to denote differSnt modes and tenses. They may, how¬ 
ever, take the incorporated proE ‘ mi’ and ‘ di’ for their nominatives. 


53 


203. These pronouns are prefixed. To verbs beginning with consonants 
they are usually prefixed in full. Ex.— hid, old, to be old. 

hie, he she or it is or was old, they are or were old. 
diliie, thou art or wert old, you are or were old. 
miliie, 1 am or was old, we are or were old. 

204. Before verbs beginning with vowels, the pronouns are often con¬ 
tracted. Ex.— adahise, to be ignorant. 

adahise, he is or was ignorant , they are or were ignorant. 

dadahise, thou art or wert ignorant, etc. 

madahise, I am or was ignorant or we were ignorant, etc. 

205. Transitive verbs in the third person, or used in a passive sense or 
impersonally, with pronouns in the objective case prefixed, have the same 
appearance as the uncoujugated intransitive verbs, except that for the third 
person the objective pronoun ‘ i ’ is used ; thus from, alioa, to conceal, we 
have 

iahoa, he conceals it, or it is concealed. 
diahoa, he conceals you , or you are concealed. 
mialioa, he conceals me, or I am concealed. 


Irregular and Defective Verbs. 

206. There are a few irregular and defective verbs in the language of 
which the following are examples. 

207. hi, to draw into the mouth, to drinlc or inhale, may, with terminal 
‘ ts,’ be conjugated thus, 

1. hits, he drinks or drank or will drink, they drink, etc. 

2. dats, you drink or drank. 

3. mats, 1 drink or drank. 

4. dadits, you will drink. 

5 marnits, 1 will drink. 

Here, in the fourth and fifth forms, there are (with the terminal) but the 
pronouns and signs of the future tense, and in the second and third forms > 
only the pronouns. 

208. matu, there is or there are, has no other form. 

209. muk (sometimes pronounced as the English word book) signifies 
“ give me." It may be an irregular imperative of the verb ku, to give, but 
is more probably a defective verb. 


Compound Verbs (so called). 

210. Sometimes two verbs are usee, together to express an idea for which 
there is no single word in the language When both verbs are in the third 
person indicative, or when one is ip infinitive, they often appear to us 


54 


as a single word, particularly if their English equivalent is a single word; 
but when conjugated, it is found that each assumes its own proper form, 
the same as if used independently. Ex.— akhu, to bring, consists of ak to be 
with, and hu, to come. This when inflected appears as two separate words, 
one in the second, the other in the first conjugation, thus: alt-hu, he brings, 
dak-dahu, you bring, mak-mahu, I bring, dak-dahudi, you will bring, mak- 
mahumi, 1 will bring, etc. 

211. Again, a noun and a verb may be used together to express an idea 
for which there is no single word in the language; thus from hi, to draw 
into the mouth, we have ope-hi, to draw tobacco into the mouth, i. e., to 
smoke, and midi-lii, to draw water into the mouth or drink. 

212. Some expressions, such as these, are, for convenience of definition, 
put in the dictionary as ‘ compound verbs.’ 

SYNTAX OF VERBS. 

213. Almost all sentences are closed by verbs or words used as such ; the 
principal exception being where interrogative adverbs are used to qualify 
an entire sentence. 

214. When a verb denoting quality or condition, and another denoting 
action, are used in the same sentence with a common subject, the former 
precedes the latter; or, in other words, conjugated verbs commonly follow 
unconjugated verbs. 

Verbs in the infinitive usually precede those in the indicative. 

215. Any word used alone, with the terminal ts, in answer to a question 
may form a sentence by itself, for it is used as a verb in the simple form 
where a personal pronoun of the third person is understood to be in the 
nominative. 

216. In this language, as in other languages, “ active transitive verbs 
govern the objective case.” It might be said that all transitive verbs govern 
the objective case for the existence of a passive form is questionable^ 168). 
When an objective pronoun is followed by the simple form of a transitive 
verb, the latter may be parsed as in the third person indicative; although 
in translating the expression into English, a verb in the passive voice may 
be used. 

217. Other points connected with the syntax of the verb have been re¬ 
ferred to in the discussion of the etymology. 


ADJECTIVES. 

218. There are certain intransitive verbs in the Hidatsa, which are used in 
the same sense as the adjectives of European languages, and maybe trans¬ 
lated by them. For the convenience of the English student, these verbs 
will be called adjectives and described as such. 


55 


219. There are a large number of the adjectives, which we cannot ana¬ 
lyze with our present knowledge of the language, and which may be called 
primitive. 

220. Derivative adjectives are formed from primitive adjectives, from 
other derivatives, from nouns, adverbs, etc., by forming compound words, 
or by the use of suffixes having the force of adverbs. 

221. The force of the adjective is modified by the adverbial suffixes and 
also by adverbs used independently, as shown in the following paragraphs. 

222. ‘ adsi ’ is suffixed to denote an approach to the standard quality, 
or positive degree, as indicated by the simple form of the adjective; thus 
from hisi, red, scarlet, comes hisadsi, of a dull red color, crimson or purple. 
(T 154). 

223. ‘ isa’, or ‘ ise’, is of much the same signification as ‘ adsi’, but some¬ 
times applied differently; it signifies, like or resembling. Ex.— Fromtohi, 
blue, sky blue, comes tohisa, of an impure or uncertain blue, bluish; from sipi 
black, comes sipisa, resembling black, i. e., of a deep color hardly to be dis¬ 
tinguished from black. ‘ adsi ’ may follow ‘ is6 ’ to denote a wider variation 
from the standard quality. 

224. ‘de’ is a suffix, which may be translated almost or nearly. Ex.— 
kakihi, round, kakihide, almost round; tsamutsi, straight, tsamutside, 
almost straight. 

225. ‘ di ’ increases the signification of the adjective to which it is suffixed ; 
its use is not very extended; it seems to be suffixed only to words of three 
syllables, ending with ‘ i ’ and accented on the penult. Ex.— padopi, short, 
low sized, padopidi, very short; tamuhi, minute, tamuliidi, very minute. 

226. tsaki, good, takes as an increased or intensified form, tsakicti, which 
may be a compound of tsaki and ictia, great, tsakicti, commonly takes the 
suffix ‘di’; thus, tsakictidi denotes a very high degree of excellence. 

227. ‘ ksa’ denotes that the quality exists excessively, habitually or con¬ 
tinuously. Ex.— isla, bad, isiaksa, very bad, persistently bad. See par. 161. 

228. ka’ti, much, true, truly, is a word used independently as an adjective 
and adverb. As an adverb it is used to limit the significance of adjectives 
to the true or standard qualities; as in hisi-ka’ti, true red, bright red, isia- 
ka’ti, truly bad, unqualifiedly bad. 

229. When two nouns are compared together in regard to quality, and 
either one used as the standard of comparison for the other, the expressions 
itadotadu and itaokadu are used. The former means at the near side of it, 
and iudicates the less degree; the latter signifies on the far side of it or 
beyond it, and indicates the greater degree. These expressions give us 
more nearly the equivalents of the comparative degree of English than any 
thing else in the Hidatsa. 

230. An adjective may be formed of a noun and an adjective. Ex.— 
From mika’, grass, and tohisa, bluish, comes mika’tohisa, green ( grass-bluish). 


56 


231 Some adjectives are compounds of two other adjectives, as tsidisipi, 
bay, from tsidi, yellow and sipi, black. 


Numerals. 

232. The Hidatsa system of numeration is strictly decimal, consequently 
there need not be more than ten primitive numeral adjectives. 


233. There are, however, not more than eight, these eight are 


duetsa (or luetsa), one, 
dopa (or nopa), two, 
dami (or nawi), three , 
topa, four , 


kfliu,^re, 

akama (or akawa), six, 
sapua, seven , and 
pitika, ten. 


234. dopapi, eight, is a compound of dopa, two, and pi, (which seems to 
be the root of pitika); it probably signifies ten less two. 


235. duetsapi, nine, is a compound of duetsa, one, and pi, and seems to 
mean ten less one. 


236. Multiples of ten, less than one hundred, are named on the same 
principle as in English; thus we have 
dopapitika (two tens), twenty, akamaapitika, sixty, 

damiapitika, thirty, sapuapitika, seventy, 

topapitika,/o?*<y, dopapiapitika, eighty, and 

kihuapitika, fifty, duetsapiapitika, ninety. 

It will be seen that the first word of each of these compounds, if not or¬ 
dinarily ending in a is made to do so in this connection, and that the accent 
is sometimes removed. 


237. The word for one hundred, pitakictfa, signifies great ten. The term 
for one thousand is, pitakictia-akakodi,- — the meaning of akakodi, I know 
not. 


238. Numbers over ten, but not multiples of ten, are named by the addi¬ 
tion of the word ahpi {portioned ; a part or division), thus: 

alipiduetsa, eleven, dopapitika-ahpiduetsa, twenty-one, 

alipidopa, twelve , dopapitika-ahpidopa, twenty-two, 

ahpidami, thirteen, damiapitika-ahpidami, thirty-three, 

ahpitopa, fourteen, topapitika-ahpitopa, forty-four, etc. 


239 With the exception of the word for first, itsika, the ordinals are 
formed by prefixing‘i’ to the cardinal numbers; thus, we have idopa, second, 
idami, third, itopa, fourth, etc. 


SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 

240. Adjectives usually immediately follow the nouns or pronouns which 
they qualify. 

241. Qualifying words are often seen used as nouns or pronouns; this is 
particularly the case with numeral adjectives, and such words as ahu, 
many, etsa, all , ilia, other, kausta, few, etc. 


ADVERBS. 


242. There are adverbs which are apparently primitive, as tii, not, duk, 
when, tia, a long time, etc. Many primitive adverbs are used as suffixes, as 
already shown when describing verbs and adjectives. 

243. A large number of adjectives are used as adverbs, without under¬ 
going any change of form. When primitive adjectives are thus used, they 
appear as primitive adverbs. Ex.— sua, slow, slowly, hita , fleet,fleetly, 5/tsa, 
near , tisa,/ar. 

244. Derivative adverbs are formed from nouns, from demonstrative and 
interrogative pronouns, from adjectives and from other adverbs. 

245. A large number of adverbs of place are formed from nouns by suf¬ 
fixing the prepositions (postpositions), du, ha, ka, koa, and ta; thus from 
dumata, the middle, we have dumatadu, in or through the middle, dumataha, 
toward the middle, dumataka, on the middle, dumatakoa, at the middle, and 
dumatata, facing the middle, or in the direction of the middle. 

246. Words formed thus (^[ 245), might be regarded as merely nouns in 
the objective, with their governing prepositions; but they are pronounced 
and used as if belonging to the same class of words as the English adverbs 
windward and forward. Since every noun in the language is capable of 
taking one or more of these postpositions, the number of adverbs of this 
character is very great. 

247. From nouns, adverbs of time are formed by suffixing ‘ du’, ‘ duk ’ 
and ‘ sedu’; the first of these means in or during any time, the second in 
or during future time, the third, in or during past time; thus from maku, 
night, we have makudu, during the night, nightly, m&kuduk, during the 
coming night, “ to-night," makusedu, during the past night or “ last night 
from oktsia, meaning also night, we have oktsisedu, oktsiadu and oktsiaduk ; 
from ata daylight or dawn, we have ataduk, to-morrow, etc. 

248. From pronouns, adverbs are formed in much the same way as from 
nouns; thus from the demonstrative ‘ se ’ we have sedu, in that time or 
place , sekoa, at that place, just there, seta, in that direction, and from the 
interrogative ‘ to ’ we have tota, whither, todu and toka, where, wherein, 
whereat. 

249. When adjectives are used as adverbs, the same suffixes, to modify 
their force and meaning, are used in the one case as in the other. Adjec¬ 
tives which can denote the manner of performing the action are those 
chiefly used as adverbs. 

250. Adverbs are formed from numeral adjectives by suffixing to the 
names of the cardinal numbers ‘ du ’ and the compound preposition 
‘ tsakoa ’; thus we have dopadu, at two times or on two occasions, twice, 
damidu, thrice, topadu,/<>«?• times, and also dopatsakoa, at or in two places, 
damitsakoa, at or in three places, topatsakoa, in four places, etc. 

8 


58 


251. From ordinals, adverbs are formed by the addition of ‘ dll’; thus, 
itsikadu, in the first place or order, firstly, idopadu, in the second place or 
order, secondly, idamidu, thirdly, itopadu, fourthly, etc. 

252. In adverbs of time, formed by adding to nouns ‘ du’, ‘ duk ’ and 
‘ sedu ’ as indicated in par. 247, the numeral adjectives are inserted between 
the noun and the adverbial suffix in the manner and for the purpose here 
indicated ; thus from oktsi or oktsia, night: 

oktsiadu, during the night. 

oktsidopadu, during two nights. 

oktsitopadu, during four nights. 

oktsfaduk, during the coming night or to-night. 

oktsidopaduk, two nights hence, or during the night after next. 

oktsidamiduk, three nights hence. 

oktsitdpaduk, four nights hence. 

oktsfsedu, last night, during last night. 

oktsidopasedu, night before last, two nights ago. 

oktsit6pasedu,/<?wr nights ago. 

253. Adverbs formed from nouns are often used as nouns; thus ataduk, 
during to-morrow or to-morrow, oktsisedu, during last night, or last night , 
adesedu, during last summer, or last summer. 

254. Adverbs are used as predicates to nouns, and in this position, there 
being no copula, fill the office of intransitive verbs. 

255. “ Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives and other adverbs,” as in other 
languages. 

256. Adverbs usually precede the words which they qualify ; but ka’ti, 
much, or truly, ta, not, ta, only, and the interrogative tok, more commonly 
follow the words they qualify. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

257. ak (T146) which is prefixed to verbs, and du, in or during, lia, toward, 
ka, in, koa, at, ta, in the direction of, facing, which are suffixed to nouns 
(1 245) to form adverbs, fill more fully the office of prepositions than any¬ 
thing else in the language. They are not, however, used as independent 
words; and, from the position which they occupy in regard to nouns, would 
be more properly called postpositions. 

258. aka, on, and api, with, are perhaps to be regarded as independent or 
separate prepositions. 

259. There are many adverbs which answer the purpose of prepositions 
and may be translated by the English prepositions. Adverbs formed from 
nouns which are the names of place, belong particularly to this class; thus 
from mikta, the bottom, comes miktakoa, below and miktata, down; from 
amaho, the interior, amahoka, within or in; from atasi, all out of doors, ata- 
sikoa, out. 


59 


260. Prepositions, separate and incorporated, and all adverbs used as 
prepositions follow the nouns which they govern. 

261. When incorporated, they may be found suffixed to the nouns which 
they govern, or prefixed to the verbs which follow; but in either case they 
come, of course, after the noun. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

262. There are two words which are possibly simple conjunctions, they 
are Isa, and, also, and duma, but. 

263. Other words used in joining words and sentences, perform also the 
duties of adverbs and prepositions, and are properly to be classed as such. 

264. Conjunctions commonly stand between the words, clauses or sen¬ 
tences which they connect. 


INTERJECTIONS. 

265. There are not many words which are purely exclamatory or interjec- 
tional; a large number of the words, which are used as interjections, being 
verbs. 

266. The following words, however, cannot be well analyzed, and may 
be regarded as true interjections: 

u \ oh! expressing pain or astonishment and commonly preceding a sen¬ 
tence. 

ihe ! there now / does that satisfy you ? etc. 

ki! is used in doubt and astonishment. 

hidi! used by children when teased; perhaps from the demonstrative 
pronoun hidi. 

hukahe! used by men to express surprise and delight; as, when much 
game is killed at a volley, etc. 

tsakak'! an expression of disgust and impatience, may be a derived word. 






DIC TIO N A R Y 


OF THE 


HIDATSA LANGUAGE. 






HIDATSA DICTIONARY 


a. 

a ada 


a, n. a tree, a plant, the entire plant 
as distinguished from its parts;—used 
after * ma ’ or as a suffix to nouns; as 
kohati, corn , kohatia, a stalk of corn. 
a, n. a muscle. 

a a te, v. t. to strike by throwing, 
to hit or bruise with a stone or other 
missile. 

a a ti, v. hurt or bruised by a 
missile. 

a da [ara], n. the arms, the fore¬ 
legs of quadrupeds. 

a da, n. the hair of the head, the 
locks. 

a da, a causative prefix to verbs, 
denoting that the action is done by 
the foot, or by heat or fire. (Tfl45) 
a da a du ic ti a, n. fr. ada and 
aduictia; the brachium. 

a da du i, v. i. fr. ade and adui; 
becoming painful. 

a da ha, v. i. to be burning; burnt, 
parched, charred. 

a da ha he, v. t. 3d pers., to parch 
or burn. 

a da ha ke, v. t. fr. adalia; to 
cause to burn,to be burned or parched. 

a da ha pe, v. t .fr. adh and liapi; 
to kick, to bark or denude by kicking. 

a da he he, v. t. to seize, take 
hold of, cling to;—also adaftelii. 
a da he se, v. t .fr. ada and liese; 


to tear with the foot, to tear with the 
paws, as a beast. 

a da hi se, v. t. to be ignorant 
of.—madahisets, I don’t know, I am 
ignorant. 

a da hi se ke, v. t. to make igno¬ 
rant, to leave in ignorance. 

a da ho hi, v. t .fr. adS, and hohi; 
to break with the foot. 

a da hpa ko a, n. the Mandan 
Indians. 

a da hpi, n. fr. adu and ahpi; a 
part of anything;—also adahpi. 

a da hpi ke, v. t. to make or be 
made a portion, to make one thing 
a part of another. 

a da hu, v. t. fr. ada and hu; to 
spill with the foot, to upset by kick¬ 
ing. 

a da 1 du ti [-ruti], n. fr. ada 
and iduti; ribbon or braid used in 
tying up the hair. 

a da ka, v. t. 2d pers. of ika, to 
see. 

a da ka da ho [ara-], n. the 

Arickaree Indians; perhaps from 
ada, the hair or locks. This name, 
it is said, was originally applied to 
the Arickarees from their manner of 
wearing their hair,—the meaning of 
the last three syllables is now un¬ 
known. 




ada 


64 


add 


& da ka pg, v. t.fr. ada and kape; 
to scratch with toe nails, or with 
paws as a dog. 

a da kl de, v. t.fr. kide; to push 
with the foot. 

a da ki te, v. t.fr. adh and kite; 
to burn otf, to clear by fire. 

a da ki ti, v. cleared off by fire, 
as a burned prairie. 

a da ku’pa, v. t. 2d pers. of 
iku’pa, to hate. 

a da mi di [-widi], v. t.fr. ada 
and midi; to twist with the foot. 

a da pa pa du i, v. i.fr. lidapa- 
pi; becoming scorched or sunburnt. 

a da pa pi [ala- or ela-], v. i. 
scorched, sunburnt. 

a da pa pi de, v. i., adj. almost 
scorched. 

a da pa' pi he, v. t. 3d pers., to 
scorch or chap. 

a da pa pi ke, v. t. to cause to 
become scorched or sunburnt, to ex¬ 
pose to sun or fire, 
a da pe, v. t, to kick, 
a da su ki, v. t.fr. ad&andsuki; 
to erase with the foot. 

a da ta hpi, v. i. to snap or crackle 
in the fire. 

a da ta hpi he, v. t. he makes 
snap by fire. 

a da ta hpi ke, v. t. to cause to 
snap by fire. 

a da ta pi, v. t. fr. hda and tapi; 
to squeeze with the foot, to trample 
on. 

a da te, v. i .fr. ada and te; to be 
bruised under foot, to be trampled to 
death. 

a da te he, v. t. 3d pers., to tram¬ 
ple to death. 

a da ti, n .fr. adu and ati; a camp¬ 
ing ground, a place marked with the 
remains of old camps. 


a d& to’' ti, v. t. fr. to’ti; to agi¬ 
tate or shake to and fro with the foot. 

a da tsa ki, v. i. fr. tsaki; to be 
severed by fire. 

a da tsa ki he, v. t. to sever by 
fire. 

a da tska pi, v. t. fr. Sd& and 
tskapi; to press with the toes, to walk 
on tip toes. 

a da tska ti, v. t. fr. &d& and 
tskati; to enter or pass through on 
tip-toes. 

a da tsku a du i, v. i. becoming 
progressively moist. 

a da tsku i [aratskui], adj. 
moist, wet. 

a da tsku i de, v. i.fr. adatskui; 
almost wet. 

a da tsku i ke, v. t. to wet or 
moisten, wetted. 

a de, v. i., adj., to be warm, un¬ 
pleasantly warm, painful. 

a de, n. warm weather, summer, 
a de a du i, v. i. same as adadui. 
a dg de, adj. almost painful, 
a de du [-ru], adv./r. ade; dur¬ 
ing the summer. 

a de duk [-ruk], n. and adv./r. 
ade; next summer, during next sum¬ 
mer.—ade-dopa-duk, two summers 
hence, ade-dami-duk [ade-nawi- 
ruk], three summers hence, ade- 
topa-duk, four summers hence. 

a de he, v. i.fr. ade; to be angered, 
he is angry. 

a de he ke, v. i. fr. adelie; to 
make angry, 

a de ke, v. t. fr. ade; to make 
warm or painful, changed from a 
comfortable to a painful condition. 

a de ksa, adj. fr. ade and ksa; 
sultry. 

a de se du [-ru], n. and adv./r. 
ade and sedu; last summer, during 


adi' 


65 


adu 


last summer.—ade-dopa-sedu [ade- 
nopa-seru], two summers ago. ade- 
topa-sedu, four summers ago. 
a di [ari], n. a road, a trail, 
a di a sa dsi, adj. poor, destitute, 
a di a sa dsi ke, v. t. to impo¬ 
verish. 

a di i ta du i, v. i. fr. adiiti and 
adui; becoming hungry. 

a di i ti, v. i. adj. hungry.—ma- 
diiti, or b&diitits, I am hungiy. 

a di 1 ti ke, v. t. to cause to be 
hungry,—to be made hungry. 

a di sa, u. the little raven of the 
northern plains, probably the comis 
colurnbianus of Wilson. 

a di sa i ta pa" his, n. Sec Local 
Names. 

a dsi, a suffix to verbs and adjec¬ 
tives denoting an approach to the 
standard. See 154. 

adu [aru], prob.fr. du; a suffix- 
denoting time and place, an adverb 
of time and place. 

a du, a prefix to verbs forming 
nouns; a part, a place, one of a kind. 
1 45-47. 

a du a da pa pi, n .fr. adapapi; 
a sunburnt surface. 

a du a du i, v. i .fr. adui; becom¬ 
ing bitter. 

a du a ka, fr. adu and aka; out¬ 
side part, skin or rind. 

a du ak sa ki, n. fr. adu and 
aksaki; a contusion, a contused 
wound. 

a du a ptse, n. fr. aptse; the 
edge of a knife. 

a du e di, n. fr. adu and edi; 
ordure. 

a du e ta, n. a sore place, a scar 
or ulcer. 

a du hi da, n. fr. hida; new 
goods or articles. 


a du hi du, n. fr. hidu; the 
skeleton, the bony part of any mem¬ 
ber. 

a du ho pi, n .fr. adu and liopi; 
a perforated or excavated place, a 
hole. 

a du ha ku pi, n. fr adu and 
hakupi; a groove, a crease, a longi¬ 
tudinal depression. 

a du ha pi, n .fr. liapi; any place 
to lie down, a bed, either temporary 
or permanent. 

a du he pi, n .fr. adu and hepi; 
a shallow place in a lake or river, a 
shoal. 

a du i, a suffix to verbs signifying 
continuation or progress. (^[155) 
a du i, v. adj. bitter, sour, pungent, 
a du f, n. fr. adu and i; hair, 
feathers, the entire plumage of a bird 
or coat of an animal. 

a du ie ti a, n. fr. adu and ictia; 
the main part, the larger part of 
anything as distinguished from its 
smaller parts. 

a du i da hpi, n .fr. idalipi; an 
incised wound, a knife-cut. 

a du i da ki sa, n. fr. adu and 
idakisa; a left-handed person, the 
left side. 

a du i de, n. fr. adu and ide; 
speech, language, a word. 

a du i de, v. i. adj. fr. adui; 
almost bitter or sour, as changing 
milk. 

a du i di tsi, n. fr. adu and 
iditsi; scent, smell, odor. 

a du i di tsi-i si" a, n. (isia, 
bad) ; a stench. 

a du i di tsi-tsa" ki, n. (tsaki, 
good) ; an agreeable odor. 

a du i ke, v. t./r. adui; to change 
from sweet to bitter, 
a du l ksa, adj. excessively bitter. 


9 


adu 


G6 


adu 


a du I ptsi, n. fr. adu and iptsi; 
an upright, a perpendicular support, 
as a chair leg. 

a du i sa mi ke, n .fr. adu and 
isamike; young twigs sprouting 
from a stump. 

a du l si, n./r. aduandisi; rind, 
covering, exterior; nearly synony¬ 
mous with aduaka. 

a du i si a, n./r. isia; an inferior 
or rotten portion; used sometimes as 
a term of contempt for persons. 

a du l ti pe, n./r. itipe; a hole 
dug, or a place in any way arranged 
for a trap. 

a du ka ti, n. cultivated ground, 
a field or garden. 

a du ka ti ka, adv. toward the 
field. 

a du ka ti ka, adv. in the field, 
among the fields, 
a du ka ti ko a, adv. at the field, 
a du ke da pi, n. the male of 

any species. 

a de ki a de tsi, n fr. kiadetsi; 
a brave, skillful or enduring person, 
a good hunter or warrior, one intelli¬ 
gent or ingenious. 

a du ki a ka ma ke, fr. aka- 
make ; one sixth. 

a du ki da-de sa [-nesa], fr. 
kida and desa; a maiden. 

a du ki da-ma tu, n. a woman 
who is, or has been married. 

a du ki da mi he ke, n. fr. 
kidamiheke; one-third. 

a du ki da mi ke [-kinawi- 
ke], same as adukidamiheke. 

a du ki do pa lie ke, n./r. kido- 
paheke; one-lialf. 

a du ki do pa ke [-nopa], 
same as last word. 

a du ki du e tsa pi ke, n. one- 
ninth. 


a du ki du sa, n. fr. adu and 
kidusa; a place where anything is 
laid away or put in order. 

a du ki du sa ko a, adv. fr. 
adukidusa. 

a du ki ka ki, n. fr. kikaki; a 
seam. 

a du ki ki hu a ke, n. fr. kiki- 
liuake; a fifth part. 

a du ki sa pu a he ke, n. same 
as the next word. 

a du ki sa pu a ke, n. fr. kisa- 
puake; a seventh part, one seventh. 

a du ki to pa ke, n./r. kitopake, 
a fourth part. 

a du ma di he, n. fr. adu and 
madihe; prepared food, preparation 
of food, cooking. 

a du ma di he a ti, n. fr. adu- 
madihe and ati; a kitchen. 

a du mi ta pa, n./r. mitapa; 
falsehood, deceit. 

a du 6 ki pa di, n. fr. adu and 
okipadi; young trees, saplings. 

a du 6 ktsi, n./r. adu and oktsi; 
a shadow.—aduoktsimahewits,Iwill 
make a shadow, i. e., erect a screen 
to keep off the sunlight. 

a du pa ha du i, n. fr. palla¬ 
dia ; a blister, a chafed or blistered 
part. 

a du pa hi, n. a corner or angle, 
a du pa hi-da mi [-nawi], n. 
a triangle. 

a du pa hi-to pa, n. (topa,/owr) 
a quadrangle.—adupalii kihu, a pen¬ 
tagon.—adupalii-aliu, a polygon. 

a du pa tska, n. fr. adu and 
pat ska; a side, an even surface, a 
facet. The compounds of this word 
and of adupalii are often used synony¬ 
mously ; but the former commonly 
refer to flat surfaces and short solids, 
the latter to long prismoidal bodies. 


adu 


67 


ak 


a du pa tska da mi [-nawi], 

n. fr. adupatska and dami; a three- 
sided needle, a glover’s needle. 

a du pa tska ko a, adv. fr. adu 
patska; at, or on the side. 

a du pa tska to pa, n. (topa, 
four); any long, four-sided object, as 
a liewn log. 

a du pi, n .fr. adu and pi, to tattoo 
or paint; a tattooed mark on the 
body, tattooing. 

a du pi di a, n. fr. pidia; a 
ruffled edging. 

adupoa da mi [-wi], n. fr. 

adu and poadami; a bullet, bullets. 

a du po a da mi-ka di" sta, 
n. (kadista, small); shot. 

a du pu a, u. fr. adu and pua; a 
swelling. 

a du sa sa, n .fr. adu and sasa; 
a fork or branch, a bifurcation. 

a du si pe, n. fr. adu and sipe; 
a piece of broken ground, a succes¬ 
sion of steep hills and deep ravines. 

a du so ki, n. fr. adu and soki; 
the back of a knife, dull part of any 
cutting instrument. 

a du su ka, n. fr. adu and suka; 
a joint, a condyle. 

a du ta ka, n. prob. fr. same root 
as iiaka; a grandfather, a grand¬ 
uncle in the male line. 

a du tsi di a ma tu", n. a rattle¬ 
snake. 

a du tso hi n .fr. tsohi; a point, 
a tapering end or part, 
a du tsu a, n. a seed, 
a du u, n .fr. adu and u; a wound, 
more particularly a bullet or arrow 
wound. 

a du u e, n. fr. adu and ue; a 
fire-place. 

a du u e ha, adv. fr. aduuc; 
toward the fire, i. e., in the direction 


of the centre of the lodge, opposite 
to atutiha. 

a du u e ko a, adv. at the fire¬ 
place. 

a du u e-u" e tsa, n (uetsa, 
metal); a stove. 

a du wi ta pa. See adumitapa. 
a hi’', n. the H pomme-blanche,” or 
psoralen escidenta, a plant bearing 
an edible root, growing wild in 
Dakota. Recently the name has 
been applied to turnips introduced 
by the whites, and now cultivated 
by these Indians. 

a hi*' mi ka, n .fr. alii and mika; 
the “ female pomme-blanche ” or pso- 
ralea argophyUa. 

a hu, adj. adv. much, many.— 
abuts. 

a hit ke, v. t .fr. aim; to increase, 
to multiply,— increased, 
a ho a, v. t., to conceal, to hide, 
a ho ka, n. the kidneys, 
a hpi, adj. n. portional, not en¬ 
tire, a part. 

a hpi a ka ma [-wa], nuin. adj. 
fr. ahpi and akama; sixteen. 

a hpi da mi [-nawi], adj./r. 
ahpi and dami, thirteen. 

a hpi do pa [-nopa], adj. fr. 
ahpi and dopa ; twelve. 

a hpi do pa pi, adj .fr. ahpi and 
dopapi; eighteen. 

a hpi du e tsa pi, n. adj. fr. 
ahpi and duetsapi; nineteen. 

a hpi ki hu, adj. fr. ahpi and 
kihu; fifteen. 

a hpi sa pu a, adj./r. ahpi and 
sapua; seventeen. 

a hpi to pa, adj. fr. ahpi and 
topa; fourteen, 
a hu a, v. t. same as ahoa. 
ak, v. i., prep, with, upon, to be or 
have with. 


ak 


68 


aku 


ak, a prefix to verbs signifying 
on or with.— T[ 14G. 

a ka, prep., adv. above, exterior 
to, surrounding. 

a ka, n. prob. fr. Inst word; rind, 
peel; same as aduaka. 

a ka lipi, v. t. to cross over, to 
step over. 

a ka ka, si, v. t. to write in cha¬ 
racters, or in Indian symbols, to 
make a pictorial record, but not to 
paint for mere ornament — amaka. 
kasi, I write, adakakasi, you write, 
a ka ko di. See par. 237. 
a ka ma, num. adj. six. 
a ka ma a pi ti ka, num. adj. 
sixty. 

a ka ma he, v. t. 3d pers. fr. 
akama; to make or divide into six. 

a ka ma ke, v. t. to divide into 
six parts, divided into six. 

a ka pe, v. t. to court, to seek 
one of the opposite sex.— mia aka- 
pets, said of the man. 

a ka ski, v. t. to pull out, to hold 
between the fingers. 

a ka ta, adv. fr aka; up, up¬ 
wards. 

a ka ta, n. the palate, 
a ka" ta a du hi du, n .fr. aka- 
ta and aduhidu; the palate bones. 

a ka wa, num. adj. same as aka¬ 
ma. 

a ka wa a pi ti ka, same as 
akamaapitika. 

a ka za, n. dimin. of a; a ten¬ 
don. 

ak' de, v. t. comp, of ak and de; 
to take away with one, to carry 
something off.— makmadets, I carry 
away. 

ak' hu, v. t. comp, of ak and hu ; 
to bring, to come and take with.— 
makmahuts, I bring. 


a ki, v. i. and prefix to verbs; on or 
with; nearly synonymous with ‘ak’, 
from which it may be derived, or the 
latter may be a contraction of ‘ aki’. 

a ki hi, v. t. fr. aki and elii; to 
urinate on, to stain or soil in this 
way. 

a ki ka hi, v. i. to be with, to be 
taken back with. 

a ki ka he, v. t. to take back 
with, to capture and bring home, to 
take from and bring away. 

a ki tsa, v. t. to overshoot, to 
miss in throwing. 

a ko ka, adv. fr. ak and oka ; 
upon, on top of. 

a ksi e, v. t. to support, to hold 
in the hand, as a light. 

aksue, [or ak-su-e] v. t .fr. sue; 
to spit upon. 

ak' tsi se, v. t. to look through 
an aperture at something, to look in 
or out through a window or door, to 
glance through at. 

a ku, n. color, kind, description, 
akuto? what kind? 

a ku, a relative pronoun, prefixed 
to verbs forming nouns ; it denotes 
the subject; with transitive verbs the 
agent, with intransitive verbs the 
object of the action, with adjective 
verbs, it denotes something of the 
color, or kind referred to; it is pre¬ 
fixed also to nouns used as verbs. 

a ku a ka pe, n. fr. aku and 
akape; a beau, a suitor. 

a ku a ma o" ze, n. fr. ama- 
oze; a farmer. 

a ku ha tski, n. fr. aku and 
hatski; giants. 

a ku hi de, n. fr. aku and hide; 
a maker, a manufacturer of anything. 

a ku hi si, n.fr. aku and hisi; 
red cloth, “scarlet stroudiug.” 


* 


aku 

a ku ha, adv. apparently from 
oka and lia; yonder, off, in the di¬ 
rection of the more distant side. 

a ku hi, n. the human ear, the 
pinna, makulii, my ear. 

a ku" hi a du ho pi, n. (adu- 
liopi, a hole); the meatus extemus. 

a ku" hi a du ha ku pi, n. 
(aduhakupi, a groove); fossa of he¬ 
lix of auricle. 

a ku ho ta i se, n. fr. aku and 
hotaisS; something of a greyish 
color, an iron-grey horse. 

a ku i di tsi tsa ki. n .fr. iditsi- 
tsaki; scent, material for scenting. 

a ku i si a, n. fr. aku and isia ; 
a worthless or impecunious person, 
a person not respected. 

a ku ki kse, n .fr. aku and kikse; 
one who fixes, mends or arranges. 

a ku ki ta he, n. fr. aku and 
kitahe; a butcher. 

a ku ma di he, n. fr. aku and 
madihe; a cook. 

a ku ma di he a ti, n. (ati, a 
house ); a temporary screen or shed 
erected for cooking purposes, a 
kitchen. ^ 

a ku ma i ku tski, n. fr. aku 
and maikutski; one who copies, 
patterns after, follows an example, 
or carries out instructions. 

a ku ma i ske, n. fr. aku and 
maiske; one who commands, directs, 
or sets an example. 

a ku ma ki ku a, n. fr. kikua ; 
a soldier,one of the “ baud of soldiers ” 
of the Hidatsa, a white soldier. See 
masiakumakikua. 

a ku ma tse e tsi, n. fr. aku 
and matseetsi; men belonging to the 
class or order of chiefs, men of con¬ 
sequence in the tribe, 
a ku pit zi, n. fr. aku and puzi; 


69 ama 

anything striped or spotted, particu¬ 
larly printed fabrics, calico. See 
masiihipuzi. 

a ku si' pi sa, n. fr. aku and si- 
pisa; dark blue cloth, black stroud- 
ing. 

a ku to hi, n. fr. aku and tolii; 
glass beads used iu garnishing. 
Possibly the beads first introduced 
by the traders were blue, and hence 
the name. 

a ma [ama, abwa, awa], n. 
the earth, earth, clay, country, laud. 

a ma a da ha, n. fr. ama and 
adaha; lignite. 

a ma a da tsa, n. the high up¬ 
land, the open uninhabited prairie, 
the steppes. 

a ma a da tsa ko a, adv. fr. 
amaadatsa; on the uplands, away 
from the river valleys. 

a ma a du ha ku" pi, n .fr. ama 
and aduhakupi; a ravine, an old 
water-course. 

a ma a du si'pe, n .fr. ama and 
adusipe; “ bad-lauds.” 

a ma dak tsa ki, n .fr. ama and 
daktsaki; a deep gully. 

a ma de ta, n .fr. ama and deta; 
a bluff, a steep river bank, high steep 
hills bordering a valley. 

a ma de ta ko a, adv. fr. ama- 
deta; on or at the bluff. 

a ma de ta ku ha hi, n. (halii, 
sti'iped)-, a bluff of many-colored, 
stratified rocks. 

a ma de ta ku ma ku, n. fr. 

amadeta, aku and maku; a high 
bluff, a bluff forming the edge of a 
lofty plateau as distinguished from 
the banks of a river where it passes 
through its flood-plain. 

a ma de ta ku sf dis, n. See 
Local Names. 


ama 


70 


ama 


a ma de ta ma pa his, n. See 

Local Names. 

a ma di a, u. fr. ama; an ordi¬ 
nary low bill, a prairie knoll. 

a ma di a di da” zi, n. ? fr. 
amadia; a ringworm, 
a ma e, n. a lioe. 
a ma e a ku tsu" ka, n. (tsuka, 
flat); a spade. 

a ma ha tski, n. fr. ama and 
hatski; a long ridge, a “ divide.” 
a ma ho, n. the inside, the interior, 
a ma ho a de, v. i. fr. amaho 
and ade; to feel internal pain, to be 
griped. 

a ma ho ka, adv., v. i. within, 
inside, to be within.— ati amahoka 
amamakits, I am sitting in the house. 

a ma ho ka ke, v. t. fr. ama¬ 
hoka ; to put into, to place within. 

a ma ha kh pi, n. fr. ama and 
liakupi; furrowed land, a tract of 
land containing one or more ravines; 
often used synonymously with ama- 
aduhakupi. 

a ma ha mi [-wi], n. fr. ama 
and hami; a mountain chain, mount¬ 
ainous country. 

a ma ha mi [-wi], n. a tribe of 
Indians who formerly dwelt in a 
village of the same name on Knife 
river; they were closely allied to the 
Hidatsa, and are now consolidated 
with them. 

a ma ha mi ko a, adv. fr. ama- 
hami; atthemountains; said when re¬ 
ferring to th e Rocky mountain region. 

a ma ha ti, v. and n. fr. ama 
awdhati; to shine; light, light pro¬ 
ceeding from an original source, not 
reflected. 

a ma ha wi, alone and in its de¬ 
rivatives ‘ am ah ami ’ is often thus 
pronounced. 


a ma ho ta, n. fr. ama and hota ; 
salt. 

a ma Ic' pu, n .fr. ama and icpu; 
a pointed or conical butte or hill, the 
point of such a butte, a collection of 
such buttes. 

a ma ic pu sa sas [or -sase]. 

See list of local names. 

a ma i da hi se, n. fr. ama and 
idahise; a shovel. 

a mak', v. imperative of amaki; 
sit down ! be seated! 

a ma ka, n. prob. fr. ama and 
ka; a badger. The name may allude 
to the proximity of his body to the 
earth as he walks, or to his dwelling. 

a ma ka, adv. fr. ama and aka; 
overground, upon the land. 

a ma ka do hpa ka, n .fr amaka 
and dohpaka; Indians '; a name of 
special distinction, used when ‘do¬ 
hpaka’ would be ambiguous. 

a ma ka noh pa ka, n. same as 
amakadohpaka. 

a ma ki, v. i. prob. fr. ama and 
aki; to sit. 

a ma ki ke, v. t. to put sitting, to 
cause or oblige to sit. 
a ma ma ki ma ka da See 

Local Names. 

a ma ma ku, n. fr. ama and 
maku; high ground, a general name 
for a hill or ridge of any kind. 

a ma 6 ze, v. t. fr. ama and oze; 
to plant. 

a ma si*', n. an eagle trap, a trap 
in the ground. See note after list of 
Local Names. 

a ma si'a, n. fr. ama and isia; 
“ bad lands.” 

a ma si pe, u. same as amaadu- 
sipe. 

a ma si pi sa, n. (sipisa, black); 
a dark mineral pigment, obtained by 


am a 


71 


apa 


these Indians, from various places in 
the neighborhood of their village and 
used in symbolic writing, decorating 
robes, &c. Of late years the name 
has been also applied to black ink 
obtained from the whites. 

a ma si ta, n. (sita, is said to 
mean cold , but I have never heard it 
so used but in this word); the north, 
the land north of tlieHidatsa country. 

a ma si ta ko a, adv. fr. ama- 
sita; northward, at the north, north¬ 
ern;—used also as an adjective and 
' noun. 

a ma si ta" ko a-a ma ha ti, 

n. literally , northern lights; aurora 
borealis. See ‘ apahiadalia,’ which is 
the more common name. 

a ma si ta ko a-ma si, n. lit. 
white men of the north; the white 
inhabitants of Rupert Land. 

a ma so di sa, n. the mud-swal¬ 
low. 

a ma ta, adv. fr. ama; turned in 
the direction of the ground, facing- 
the earth. 

a ma te, 1 stpers. indicative of ite, 
to admire. 

a ma ti, n. the Missouri river. 
See Local Names. 

a ma ti 5 ', n. fr. ama and ati; an 
earth-covered lodge, a number of 
such lodges, hence a permanent vil¬ 
lage of earth-covered lodges. 

a ma ti a du sa sas. See Local 
Names. 

a ma ti da ta hi [-natahi], one 
of the old villages of the tribe when 
they dwelt on Knife river. 

a ma ti La, n. another of the 
Knife river villages. 

a ma ti ha mi, same as ama- 
hami; name of former tribe and 
village. 


a ma ti ka za, n. the Little Mis¬ 
souri river. See list of Local Names. 

& ma tsa ka" du i, v. i .fr. ama- 
tsaki; becoming stained with earth. 

& ma tsa ki, adj. fr. ama and 
tsaki; stained with earth. 

a ma tsa ki he, v. t. he stains 
with earth. 

a ma tsa ki ke, v. t. to stain 
with earth, to cause to be soiled with 
earth,—soiled with earth. 

a ma tsi di, n .fr. ama and tsidi; 
a yellow mineral pigment obtained 
by the Indians, ochre. 

a ma tsi di o du tsi, n. See 
Local Names. 

a ma tsu ka, n. fr. ama and 
tsuka; a flat meadow, a bottom land. 

a ma u ti, n. fr. ama and uti; 
the skirt or base of a hill, a foot-hill. 

a ma u ti ko a, adv. of place/r. 
amauti. 

a ma zi, n. beans, any leguminous 
plant. 

a ma zi-si pi sa, n. fr. amazi 
and sipisa; black beans. The name 
is also sometimes applied to roasted 
coffee. 

a mpa, n. the neck, 
a ntsi. See a’tsi. 
a pa, n. ears, particularly the ears 
of the lower animals. 

a pa, n. the nose of man and the 
lower animals, the beak of a bird. 

a" pa a du ho pi, n .fr. apa and 
aduhopi; nostrils. 

a" pa a du su ka, n .fr. apa and 
adusuka; the bridge of the nose. 

5, pa da ka, n. dimin. of apa; aim 
of nose. 

a pa di, v. i. to sprout and grow, 
to increase by growth. 

a pa di, n. the Canadian porcu¬ 
pine. The animal is common on the 


apa 


Upper Missouri and its quills are used 
for embroidering. This word is also 
used to designate the quills. 

a pa di hi’, n.fr. apadi and lii’; 
porcupine quills.—apadi is the more 
usual term. 

a pa di ke, v. t. Jr. apadi; to 
cause to grow,—grown. 

a pa he da pi, n. fr. apa and 
liedapi; the juncture of the nose 
with the forehead, 
a pa hi, n. the sky. 
a pa hi a da ha, n.fr. apafii and 
adalia; the aurora borealis. 

a pa hi a du i ho'' ta ki, n. 
(iliotaki, white); white clouds, cirrhus 
clouds. 

a pa hi a du si" pi sa, n. (sipi- 
sa, black); dark, heavy clouds. 

a pa hi ta tsi, n. (tatsi .thick); a 
sky completely overcast with clouds. 

a pa hi to hi, n. (tohi, blue); the 
blue sky. 

a pa ic' pu, n.fr. apa and icpu ; 
the point of the nose. 

a pa sa ki, n. fr. apa and saki, 
the hand; a pelican. The name 
alludes either to the shape of the 
bird’s bill or to the use which he 
makes of it. 

a pa sa ku pi, u. fr. apa and 
sakupi; a hooked or Roman nose. 

a pa tsi til ki, n. fr. apa and 
tsituki; a pug-nose, 
a pi, prep, with, to be with, 
a pic ti a, n. fr. apa and iclia; 
a mule. 

a pi ka, adv. fr. api; together, 
together with. 

a pi ke, v. t. fr. api; to place 
together. 

a pi sa, n. the liver, 
a pi tsa, n. a sand-hill crane, 
a pi tsa to hi, n. the blue heron. 


ata 

a pi tska, n. bristles on lips of 
felidte, &c. 

a po ka, n. a head-dress of any 
kind, a hat or bonnet. 

a po ksa, n. a pendant jewel, an 
ear-jewel. 

a pu ti, n. fr. apa and uti; the 
upper lip, the entire upper lip. (See 
ideta). These Indians seem to re¬ 
gard the upper lip as the “ root of the 
nose.” 

a pu ti a du ha ku" pi, n. fr. 

aputi and aduliakupi; the sulcus of 
the upper lip. 

a rl', n. a trail, same as adi. 
a ru, alone and in its compounds 
‘adu’ is often thus pronounced. 

a sa di, v. t. to steal, to take any¬ 
thing illegally or occultly —adi asadi, 
“ to steal the road,” to run away 
secretly, to abscond. 

a su, n. a string or cord, also a 
fishing-line, a snare, 
a su ka, n. testes, 
a" su ka-ma tu, n. a stallion.— 
asuka-desa, a gelding. 

a ta, n. day, daylight.—ata-ka- 
dista, sometimes said of early in the 
day.—atats, it is day. 

a ta de, n. almost day, near day¬ 
light. 

a ta di, v. i. to go out of doors, 
also to menstruate. 

a ta di ke, v. t. to put out of doors, 
or out of the house. 

a ta duk [-ruk], n. fr. ata and 
duk; to-morrow. 

a ta duk, adv. when to-morrow 
comes. 

a ta I se, adj. fr. ata and isS; 
bright as day. 

a ta ka, n. the eud or extremity,— 
perhaps, “ in the end.” 
a ta ka du, n. and adv./r. ataka; 


atu 


ata 73 


in, or through the end, the terminal 
portion. 

a ta ka du i, v. i. fr. ataki and 
adui; bleaching, gradually whiten¬ 
ing. 

a ta ka ka, adv. fr. ataka; end- 
wards, towards the end. 

a ta ka ko a, adv. at the end. 
a ta ki. adj. white, same as ilio- 
taki. 

a ta ki ke, v. t .fr. ataki; to cause 
to whiten,—whitened, bleached. 

a ta ruk, n. to-morrow, same as 
ataduk. 

a tas, n .fr. ati; one’s own house, 
a home. 

a ta zi, n. out of doors, outside, 
a ta zi ka, adv./r. atazi; toward 
the outside. 

a ta zi ko a, adv. at the outside, 
out of the houses. 

a te, n. a father, a father’s brothers 
and male cousins. 

a te, v. i. to appear, to come in 
sight. 

a te de, v. i to be almost in sight, 
nearly appearing. 

a te ke, v. t. fr. ate; to make 
appear, to show. 

a te ke ka, v. t. imper. o/ateheke; 
show it! let us see it! 

a te ke ke, v. t. to cause to ap¬ 
pear, to hold up to view, to exhibit. 

a te ka’ti, n. fr. at5 and ka’ti; a 
true or real father, not a father’s 
brother. 

a ti, n. a house of any kind, 
a ti du ti du, n. the roof of an 
earth-covered lodge. 

a ti ke, v. t. fr. ati; to make a 
camp. 

a ti 1 pki ti, n .fr. ati atid ipkiti; 
the mixture of white earth and water 
which they use in coating log cabins. 

10 


Lately this term has been applied to 
whitewash made of lime. 

a ti ke, v. t. fr. ati; to change 
into a house, to use for a house. 

a ti si, n. the hole in the top of 
the lodge to let out the smoke, (re¬ 
cently) a stove-pipe. 

a ti si a, n. prob. fr. ati and isi; 
heavy, dressed elk or buffalo skin, 
such as is used in making skin lodges. 

a ti tso ki, n. same as atitsuahe, 
but less used. 

a ti tsu a ke, n. fr. ati and tsua- 
lie; a skin lodge. The name alludes 
to its shape. 

a ti tsu ka, n. fr. ati and tsuka; 
the side of the fire, a seat in the lodge 
neither opposite nor next the door. 

a tsa, prep. adv. near by, close to, 
(also ats&). 

a 5 ' tsi, n. the mamma;, the udder 
of an animal. 

a 5 ' tsi bi di, n. same as a’tsimidi. 
a v tsi ki, v. comp, of a’tsi and hi; 
to suck. 

a’' tsi hi ke, v. t. to give to suck, 
to nurse, to suckle. 

a’' tsi ie pu, n .fr. a’tsi and icpu ; 
the nipple. 

a’' tsi mi di, n .fr. a’tsi and midi ; 
milk. 

a tska, adj. cross, fierce,—asa dog. 
a tska de, adj. surly, almost 
fierce. 

a tska du i, v. i. becoming fierce- 
a tska ke, v. t .fr. atska; to en¬ 
rage. 

a tska ksa, v. i. adj./r. atska and 
ksa; habitually cross. 

a tska ksa ke, v. t. to render 
habitually cross, to sour one’s temper, 
a tu, n. the head, 
a tu a de, v. i. comp, of atu and 
ade; to have headache. 


atu 


74 


da 


a tu i tsa ti, n./r. atu and itsati; 
hair-grease. 

a tu ka, n. the seat opposite the 
door of a lodge, “ at the head.” 

a tu ti, n. fr. ati and uti; “the 
bottom of the lodge.” In a skin 
lodge this signifies the space between 
the poles and the ground, near Avhere 
they meet; in an earth-covered lodge, 
the space between the short uprights, 
the outer wall and the ground. 

a tu ti Ha, adv. fr. atuti; in the 
direction of the bottom of the lodge, 
away from the tire. 

a tu ti ko a, adv. at or in the 
bottom of the lodge. 

a tu ti ko a-i"ptsa, n. fr. atu- 
tikoa and iptsa; the shorter uprights 
of an earth-covered lodge, the outer 
row of supporting posts. 

a tu ti ko a-i"ptsi, same as last 
word. 

a tu ti ko a-mi da", n. Svnon. 
atutikoaiptsa. 
a zi, n. a river; 
a zi, n. a horn. 

a zi, n. a spoon or ladle. The 
Hidatsa make tbeir spoons of horn; 
hence, perhaps, the name. 


a zi a du sa sa, n. fr. azi and 
adusasa; a branch or fork of a river. 

a zie ti a, n./r. azi and ictia; the 
big-horn or Rocky Mountain sheep, 
ovis montana. 

a zi de Hi, n./r. azi and delii; a 
spoon or ladle made from the horn 
of the ovis montana. 

a zi Ha mi, n./r. azi and hami; 
antlers, animals bearing antlers, m ales 
of the cervidce. 

a zi Ha wi, same as azihami. 
a zi ic' pu, n. fr. azi and icpu; 
the source or head waters of a river, 
a zi ic' pu ko a, adv,/r. aziicpu. 
a zi ic' pu sa sa. n. fr. aziicpu 
and sasa; the affluents which join ' 
a river near its source. 

a zi ka za, n. dimin. of azi; a 
creek or rivulet, 
a zi ka zi, n. same as azikaza. 
a zi si pi sa, n./r. azi and sipisa; 
a black spoon, one made of butfalo 
horn. 

a zi u e tsa, n. metal spoons, 
such as are obtained from the whites. 

a zi u ti, n. fr. azi and uti; the 
mouth of a river. 


b. 

b. Words, heard as beginning with the sound of b, may be found under m. 


C. 

C is not an initial sound. 

d. 

d, a common abbreviation of the da, adv. prefix to verbs, denotes 
pronouns da and di. departure or motion from; as in 

da [na, la, ra], pers. pron., damakoa, lgo away, from makoa, / 
simple, 2d pers.; thou, you, ye. go, 



da’ 


75 


daft 


da’ [na’j, probably a form of the 
last word , or of de, to go; suffixed to 
verbs it makes an imperative form;— 
go thou ! do thou do it! 

da da [nana], v. i. to shiver, to 
tremble. 

da di [na-] n. a party of Indians 
travelling with their effects, a moving 
camp. 

da dsa, n. the calf of the leg. 
da he, v. t. to work, to labor at 
anything, to make or form. 

da he ka 5 ' ti [laftekanti], v. i. 
tfrom dahe and ka’ti; to be tired, 
madalieka’ti, I am tired. 

da lie ka’' ti lie, v. t. 3d pers. 
to tire, to fatigue. 

da he ka 5 ' ti ke, v. t. to cause to 
tire,—fatigued. 

da he ku ti di ki, v. t. fr. diki, 
to strike —I know not the meaning 
of the rest of the word; to strike an 
enemy first, to “ count first coup." 

da ftu [naftu, laftu], v. i. fr. da 
and ku; to come away from.—dama- 
huts, I come away from, dadaliuts 
[nalahuts], you come away from. 

da ha de [la-] ,fr. hade; to shell 
with the teeth, as corn. 

da ha hi [na-J, n. the elongated, 
vertebral, spinous processes between 
an animal’s shoulders, a “liump-rib,” 
a buffalo-hump. 

dahahimaku, n./r.dahahi and 
rnaku; a high hump, a buffalo-hump. 

da ha mi [-wi], adj. fringed, 
having long ornamental ends. 

da ha pe si, adj. steep, perpen¬ 
dicular. 

da ha pi [la-J, v. t .fr. hapi; to 
peel off, to bark a tree, 
da ha pi he si, same as dafiapesi. 
da he se, v. t. fr. liese; to tear 
with the teeth. 


da ftd si, v., adj. torn with teeth, 
da he si ke, v. t. to cause to tear 
with teeth, torn by teeth. 

da hi [na-], n. a dim shadow or 
shade, hence also a soul or ghost; 
seldom used alone. See idalii and 
dokidalii. 

da hi hi, n. prob. fr. dalii; the 
reflection of an object as seen on a 
polished surface; perhaps a hypo¬ 
thetical word. See idaliihi. 
da hi pi, v. t. to flay, 
da hi se, v. t. to dash, or throw 
away, to dig or shovel, 
da ftki si [na-], n. a pillow, 
da hki si si, n. fr. dahkisi and 
isi; a pillow-case, 
da ho, n. the lungs, 
da ho ke [na-], ?fr. dalio; a 
saddle of any kind, dahoke-hidu, a 
bone saddle, or horn saddle, dalioke- 
mida, a wooden saddle. See mata- 
tsidahoke. 

da ho ki, v. t. fr. ftoki; 2d and 
3d pers.; to row a boat, malioki, I 
row. 

da hpa, v. t. to place the arms 
around, to enfold in the arms. 

da hpi [naftpi], n. a pelt of any 
kind, a buffalo robe. 

da hpi ke [nahpike], n. the 
annual religious ceremony of the 
Hidatsa. 

da hpi tsi [nahpitsi], n. fr. 
dahpi and tsi; a bear. 

da hpi tsi-a du a ma" kis, n. 
See Local Names. 

da hpi tsi-i tsic pu [na-], n. 
fr. dalipitsi and itsicpu; a bear’s 
claw. 

da hpi tsi-i tsi ti [na-], fr. 
dalipitsi and itsiti; a bear’s track. 

da hpi tsi-o da hpi [na-], fr. 
dalipitsi and odalipi; a bear-skin. 


dah 


76 


dak 


da hpi tso ki [na-], n. (tsoki, 
hard), raw-hide, “parfleche.” 

da htsi a, adj. same as daktsia, 
which is the more common pro¬ 
nunciation. 

da hu, v. i.fr. liu; to spill, over¬ 
set, topple. 

da liu e, v. t. same as dahu. 
da liu pi, v. t. prob. fr. hupi; to 
drink dry, to drain with the mouth; 
also, to absorb as a sponge. 3d pers. 

dak [nak], a prefix to verbs and 
verb roots, usually indicating that 
the action is performed by a sudden, 
forcible impulse. In the 1st and 2d 
persons the ‘d’ is sometimes dropped. 

dak' a [naka], same as dak, from 
which it may be derived, or the for¬ 
mer may be a contraction of daka. 
da ka, a diminutive suffix, 
da ka, n. the offspring or young 
of anything. See idaka. 

da ka, v. i. to remain, to continue 
in one condition unchanged, to be, 
to live. 

da ka a du mi di, n. fr. daka, 
offspring, adu and midi; liquor am- 
nii. That of buffalo, elk, etc., is 
boiled by these Indians, who drink 
it as soup. 

da ka du tska [-lu-], n. a twin, 
twins. They are very rare among 
these Indians. 

da ka he, v. t. to pull toward, to 
pluck, but not pluck out, to stretch 
or spread out. 

da ka hi se, v. t. to hold in the 
arms. 

da ka hi si, held in the arms, 
dak a ho hi, v. t. fr. daka and 
hohi; to break across with a blow. 

dak a ki ti [nak-], v. t .fr. d&ka 
and kiti; to shave or remove hair; 
to clear off by blows, as these Indians 


do in removing hair, with a flint or 
iron scraper, from a skin, preparatory 
to dressing it. 

dak a mi di [nakawidi], v. i. 

and t. fr. daka and midi ; to twist 
by sudden force; said if a saddle 
turns while a horse is running, etc. 

dak a mi di ke, v. to cause to 
turn,—turned by sudden force. 

dak a mi tsi [-witsi], v. t. fr. 
daka and mitsi; to cut fine by blows, 
to mince, to chop into small frag¬ 
ments. 

dak a pa ki, v. i. to blossom, 
dak a pa ki ke, v. t. to cause to 
blossom. 

da ka pe, v. t.fr. kape; to lacer¬ 
ate with the teeth. 

da ka pi, v. t. See kidakapi, 
which is the more common form. 

dak a pi hi, v. t. to float in air 
or on water, to flap. 

dak a pi hi he, v. t. to float, to 
allow to float. 3d pers. 

dak a pi hi ke, v. t. to cause to 
float, to make float,—floated. 

dak a pu si, v. i. to be puffed 
out, inflated. 

dak a pu si ke, v. t. to cause to 
increase in diameter, to puff out. 

da ka ptsi, v. i. fr. kaptsi; to 
be nicked, to have numerous small 
notches. 

da ka ptsi he, v. t. 3d pers. to 
nick, to cut fine notches, to keep a 
record or tally by cutting notches. 

dak' a ta, v. t. fr. daka and ta; 
to smash to pieces by throwing vio¬ 
lently, or by hitting a blow. 

dak a ta hi, v. i. to make a noise 
by stamping, pounding, etc. 

dak a ti, v. i. to be stretched out 
or shaken out forcibly, as in shaking 
blankets. 


dak 


77 


da’k 


dak a ti i, same as dakati. 
dak a ti he, v. t. 3d pers., to un¬ 
fold, unroll, shake out. 

dak a ti ke, v. to cause to unroll, 
unrolled, unfolded, shaken out. 

dak a to*' ti, v. t. fr. daka and 
to’'ti; to ruffle or shake with force 
suddenly and briefly applied. 

da ka tsa, adj., v. fr. v. i. daka, 
remaining unchanged, alive. 

dak a wi di, same as dakamidi. 
da ke, a form of daka; to con¬ 
tinue, etc. 

da’' ki [na’ki], n. a prisoner of 
war. The children of the enemy are 
sometimes taken captive; they are 
not enslaved or ill treated. 

da ki, v. i. to squeal as a child, 
da ki [naki], a band or clan in 
a tribe. In the Hidatsa daki we have 
apparently a modification of the to¬ 
tem system. 

da ki da mi [nakinawi], fr. 

daki and dami or idami, i. e. three 
bands (consolidated) or the third band; 
one of the Hidatsa clans. 

da kl ti, v. i. ?fr. kiti; to close 
up like a pocket-knife. 

da ki to pa [na-], lit. four bands, 
or the fourth band; the name of one 
of the Hidatsa clans or bands. 

da ko a [na-], x.fr. daarcdkoa; 
to go away from, to abscond.—dama 
koa, I go away. 

da ko e [la-], n. a man’s friend 
or comrade; a hypothetical w T ord. 
See idakoe and madakoe. 

dak sa ke, v. t. to produce a 
wound by throwing. 

dak sa ki, v. i. wounded by a 
missile. 

dak' si, v. t. to bundle, to wrap 
in skins or cloth. 

dak si pi [nak-], adv., v. after 


in point of time, later, subsequent 
to. 

dak ta a£, v. t./r.ktade; to nail 
with heavy blows, to drive a spike. 

dak tsa da ke, v. t. and i. to 
slide or cause to slide with sudden, 
forcible impulses, as in skating. 

dak tsa ki, v. t .fr. dak and tsa- 
ki; to chop, to cut with heavy blows 
as in chopping wood. 

dak tsa v ti, v. t. fr. dak and tsa- 
ti; to impale, to thrust into with force 
suddenly applied, as in sticking with 
a spear. 

dak tsf a, v. i., adj. heavy, 
weighty. 

dak tsi a du i, v. i. gradually 
increasing in -weight, 
dak tsf a ke, v. t. to make heavy, 
da ktsi di, n . fr. daka and tsidi; 
a name applied to light-colored buf¬ 
falo-calves. 

dak tsf ke, v., adj. to place in a 
row; to be in single file, aligned, as 
the posts of a palisade or the teeth 
of a comb. 

dak tsu a [nak-], n. a mink, 
dak tsu ti, v. t. to hit hard, to 
beat with a stick. 

dak tsu ti, v. t. to braid, 
dak u di, v. to produce a current 
of air by a sudden motion, as in fan¬ 
ning. 

dak u dsi, v. i. and t. to oscillate, 
to swing;—pronounced so much like 
dakudsi, 2d pers. of kudsi, that it is 
difficult to distinguish. 

dak u Mi [nak-], adj. light, not 
heavy. 

dak u Mi he, v. t. 3d pers. to 
make light. 

dak u Mi ke, v. t. to make light, 
reduced in weight, 
da’ ku : pe [na-], n. abed-curtain. 


dam 


78 


dat 


da mi [nawi], nura. adj. three. 
It is more commonly pronounced 
* nawi’ both alone and in its deriva¬ 
tives. 

da mi a pi ti ka [na-], num. 
adj. thirty. 

da mi de [na-], adj., v. almost 
three, two and a large part of a 
third. 

da mi he ke [na-], v. t. to make 
into three, to divide into three; pass, 
divided into three parts. 

da mi ke, v. t. same as damiheke. 
da mi tsa ko a, adv. in three 
places or directions. 

da ml tsi, v. t.fr. mitsi; to chew 
fine. 

da mo ki [-wo-], v. i. to sink 
down, to ebb. kidamoki is the more 
common form. 

da mu [nawu], adj., etc., deep; 
said of water. 

da mu ke [nawu-]. v. t. to 

deepen, become deep. 

da na, same as dada.—midanats, 
I shiver. 

da pe, v. t. fr. da and pe; to eat 
by tearing, as a dog eats. 

da psu ti, v. t. fr. psu ; to shove 
out of place, to jog the arm. 

da sa, v. t. to lacerate with the 
teeth. 

da si [nasi], n. a name, a proper 
name; pronounced also dazi. 

da si e [la-], v. t. to take olf with 
the teeth, as in eating corn from a 
cob. 

da si pi [la-], v. t. fr. sipi; to 
untie with the teeth. 

da sku, v. t. fr. sku; to extract 
with the teeth. 

da ste, v. t. to munch, to chew 
fine; also to pound fine, 
da’ ta [na-], n. the heart. This 


word is also used figuratively, as in 
English ; and various emotions and 
feelings are attributed to conditions 
of the heart, as shown in words 
which follow. 

da’ ta de sa [na’tanesa], v. i., 

adj. fr. da’ta and desa, “heartless”; 
giddy, foolish, inconsiderate. 

da’ ta de sa ke, v. t. fr. da’ta- 
desa; to cause to be foolish or in¬ 
considerate. 

da’ ta de se, same as da’tadesa. 
da’ ta lie pa du i, v. i .fr. da’ta- 
liepi; becoming indolent. 

da' ta lie pi, v. i. fr. da’ta and 
Repi; to be lazy, indolent. 

da’ ta lie pi ke, v. t. to cause to 
be lazy. 

da’ ta i si a, v. i. fr. da’ta and 
isia, bad; to be angry, morose, dis¬ 
agreeable, unhappy or sorry. 

da’ ta i si a du i, v. i. becoming 
angry, etc. 

da’ ta i si a ke, v. t. to cause to 
be morose, angry, etc.,—angered. 

da ta ki, v, i. to be hurt, to be in 
pain.—midataki, I am hurt. 

da ta pi, v. t.fr. tapi; to hold or 
press between the teeth. 

da ta ti, v. t. to squeeze with the 
teeth. 

da’ ta tsa ki, v. i. fr. da’ta and 
tsaki, good; to be happy, pleasant, 
agreeable. 

da’ ta tsa ki ke, v. t. to make or 
cause to be happy. 

da’ ta tso ki, v. t. fr. da’ta and 
tsoki, hard; firm, resolute, self deny¬ 
ing. 

da’ ta tso ki ke, v. t. to make 
resolute, etc. 

da’ ti, brother in law; a hypo¬ 
thetical word. See ida’ti. 
da ti pi, n. a ravine. 


/ 


dat 


79 


did 


da t6’ ti, y. t. fr. to’ti; to shake 
to and fro in the mouth, as a cat wor¬ 
ries a mouse. 

da tsa [la-], v. t. fr. tsa; to bite, 
datsa’ ti [la-],v. t .fr. tsati; to 
stick the teeth into, to hold in the 
teeth for the purpose of cutting, as 
these Indians do with meat. 

da tsi [la-], v. i .prob.fr. datsa; 
dinged,indented. 

da tsi pi, v. t. to loosen with the 
mouth, to lick off with the tongue. 

da tska pi [la-], v. t .fr. tskapi; 
to pinch with the teeth; to nibble or 
bite, but not to bite off. 

da tska ti [la-], v. t .fr. tskati; 
to pass or press through a small open¬ 
ing, to squirt or leak. 

da tskl pi, y. t. to pare off, to peel, 
da tskl ti [la-], v. t. fr. tskiti; 
to clip, to dock. 

da tso pe, v. t. to draw in with 
the lips, to smack. See kidatsope. 

da tsu ki, v. i. to draw in or suck 
with the lips; but not to nurse. 

da wi, uum. adj. same as dami; 
more commonly pronounced nawi. 

da wl tsi, v. t. same as damitsi, 
and more common, 
da wo ki. See damoki. 
da wu, v. i. same as daruu; but 
more commonly pronounced nawu. 

da zi [nazi], n. a proper name; 
same as dasi.—dazi taka, or nazi taka, 
what is his name, manazi, my name, 
dadazi, or nanazi, your name. 

de, v. i. to go, to depart; pass, 
gone.—dets, he is gone, departed. 

de, a suffix to verbs and adjectives, 
signifying incompleteness, a degree 
less than the positive; almost, nearly. 

de Hi, v., adj. clear, transparent; 
white, when referring to the tail of a 
horse, and some other things. 


de pa, n. certain deformities arti¬ 
ficially produced. 

de sa [nesa], v. i., adv. no, there 
is not, there is none, etc. 

d^ sa ke, v. t. to cause to be not, 
to cause to cease or disappear; pass, 
disappeared, extinct, cured, (as a dis¬ 
ease). kidesake is the more common 
form. 

de se, same as desa. 
de ta, n. a boundary, edge or 
border. 

de ta ko a, adv. fr. deta; at the 
edge or border. 

de zi [nezi], n. the tongue, 
de zi a zis, n. See Local Names, 
di, v. t. to shoot, to shoot at, 
whether you kill or not, also to hunt. 
See kidi. 

di, a suffix to adjectives, increas¬ 
ing their force; as in padopidi, and 
kaustadi. 

di [ni], pron. thou, thee, thy. 
die' ki [nic-], pron. comp, thy¬ 
self. 

di da k6 e [nllakoe], your 
friend. See dakoe and idakoe. 

di da’ ti, u. your brother-in-law. 
See ida’ti. 

dl de,) v. i. to travel, to march, 
dl di, f to walk; also said of the 
motion of a snake, of swimming, 
etc. 

dl di, n. a travelling party, a party 
moving or marching, a step a walk. 
Sec matsedidi and paduididi. 

di dl ki, your leg. See diki and 
idiki. 

di di si [ni-], your son. See 
disi and idisi. 

dl do [ni-], p. pron. 2d pers. 
plur.; ye 

dl do ki [ni-], pron, fr. dido; 
yourselves. 


\ 




dm 


80 


dop 


di ha [ni-], v. t. and auxil. 2d 
pers. imper.; do thou do it; about 
the same as da’, but more emphatic ; 
added to verbs it gives one form of 
the imperative. 

di ha, ? aux. verb, suffixed to form 
the second person, future, indicative 
of conjugated verbs. 

di ho, your body. See ho and 
iho. 

dik, v. t. imperativeof diki; strike, 
di ki, v. t. to strike, to whip, to 
“ count coup." 

di ki, a hypothetical word ; leg, 
lower extremity. 

di pi, v. to bathe, to be bathing, 
to bathe one’s self. 

di pi ke, v. t. to cause to bathe, 
to clean by bathing, to bathe another 
person. 

di sa mi [nisawi], your aunt; 
fr. hypothetical word sami. 

di si, n. a son; probably a hypo¬ 
thetical word. See idisi, didisi and 
madisi. 

di si, v. i. to hasten, to hurry, to 
be fast. 

di si di si, an imperative form of 
sidisi; be thou in haste, hurry up! 
hurry thyself. 

di si ke, v. t. to cause to hurry, 
—hurried. 

di ta [ni-], pers. pron. 2d. pers. 
possessive, denotes transferable pos¬ 
session. 

di ta du [nitaru], your mother’s 
brother. See itadu. 

di ta ma e [nitawae]. n .fr. dita 
and mae; your own, your property. 

dita me tsa [nitawetsa], your 
brother. See itametsa. 

di tsa ki, v., pron. you alone, you 
unaided, or by yourself, 
di tsi [nitsi], v. t. to massacre. 


di tu hi [ni-], n. your dress or 
shirt. See ituhi. 

do do pa [loropa], n. the cheek, 
doh [noh], a prefix limiting a 
noun to the human species; also pro¬ 
nounced nok and dolt. 

doh pa ka [noh-], n. living hu¬ 
man beings; formerly applied only 
to Indians, but now often used to in¬ 
clude all races. See amakadohpaka. 
dok, same as doh. 
dok i da ha ti [nok-], n. fr. 
dokidahi and ati; the village of the 
dead, the hereafter of the Hidatsa. 

dok i da hi, n .fr. dok aredidahi; 
a human shade, a ghost. 

dok i da" hi ta i ko zi, n. lit. 
ghost's whistle; the equisetum hyemale. 

dok i da" hi ta ma tsu, n. fr. 
dokidahi, ita and matsu, i. e., ghost's 
cherry; the Virginia creeper, the fruit 
of the Virginia creeper or ampelopsis. 

dok i da" hi ta ma tsu a, n. 
the Virginia creeper, the entire 
plant. 

dok i da hi ta pa his, n. See 

Local Names. 

dok pa ka, n. same as dohpaka. 
dok te, n .fr. dok and te; a corpse, 
dok te o du sa [nokteorusa], 
fr. dokte and odusa; a place of de¬ 
posit for the dead, a scaffold, a grave, 
a graveyard. 

do pa [nopa], num. adj. two. 
In compounds this is sometimes pro¬ 
nounced nupa and dupa. 

do pa he, v. t .fr. dopa; to make 
double, to form in two parts. 

do pa he ke, v. t. to form into 
two parts, to divide in two, divided 
in two. 

do pa ke, same as dopaheke. 
do pa pi [no-], num. adj. fr. 
dopa and pi; eight. 


dop 


81 


duk 


do pa pi ti ka [no-], mini. adj. 
fr. dopa and pitika; twenty. 

d6 pa tsa ko a, in two places or 
directions. 

do ta [lota], n., adv. near to, the 
near side, neighborhood or prox¬ 
imity. 

do ta du [-ru], adv., n.fr. dota: 
the near side, at or in the near side. 
See itadotadn. 

do ta ka [lo-], adv. fr. dota; in 
this direction, denoting motion to¬ 
ward the speaker. 

do ta ko a, adv./r. dota; in the 
neighborhood of the speaker, at a 
place nearer to the speaker than some 
object named; also, inferior to. 
do ti [lo-], n. the throat, 
do tic ti a, n.fr. doti and ictia; 
bronchocele,—a disorder not uncom¬ 
mon in the village at Fort Berth- 
old. 

du, a hypothetical word. See 
idu. 

du [ru], a prefix to verb roots, 
denoting general causation, that the 
action is done in some w r ay not 
specified. Same as Dakota 1 yu.’ 

du [ru], prep, in, during, at that 
time or place. Suffixed to nouns it 
forms adverbs of time and place. 
Suffixed to pronouns it forms words 
which may be considered as pro¬ 
nouns or adverbs, 
du e tsa [lu-], num. adj. one. 
du e tsa ke, v. t. to cause to be 
one,—united. 

du e tsa pi [lu-], num. adj. fr. 
duetsa and pi; nine. 

du 6 tsa pi ke, v. t .fr. duetsapi; 
to divide into nine parts, 
du e tsa ta, adj. only one. 
du e tsa ti, v. i., adj. one here and 
there, to be a scattered few. 

11 


du ha, v. imper. and 2d pers. in¬ 
die. of dulie; lift.—didulia, lift thy¬ 
self, i. e., arise (from sitting), 
du he, v. t. to lift, to raise up. 
du hi, v. lifted, raised, aroused, 
du hi ke, v. t. to cause to arise, 
to assist in rising or raising. 

du ha, v. t. to spread, as bed¬ 
ding.—kiduha is the more common 
form. 

du ha de, v. t. to collect by drag¬ 
ging, to rake. 

du ha de, v. t. to shell, as corn, 
du he' mi, v. i. said of the settling 
down of a river, the abating of a 
flood. 

du he se, v. t. fr. hese; to tear 
in any w T ay, to tear such articles as 
cloth or paper, 
du he wi, same as duliemi. 
du ho hi, v. t .fr. hohi; to break 
across by any means, to break by 
bending, as in breaking a stick. 

du ho hi ke, v. t. to cause to be 
broken,— broken. 

du ho ki, v. t .fr. hoki; to sepa¬ 
rate by dragging, as in combing. 

du hpi, v. t. to take down some¬ 
thing that is hanging on a nail or 
peg. 

duk [ruk], an adverb of future 
time; when — will. It is also used 
to denote uncertainty or condition 
with regard to future events. It is 
suffixed. 

du ka pi,v. t. fr. kapi; to lacerate 
by any means, to wound by tear¬ 
ing. 

du ki di, v. t. fr. kidi; to pull a 
skin back and forth across a rope, 
as is done in dressing hides. 

du kx ti, v. t. fr. kiti; to clear off 
by plucking, to pluck clean, 
du ku ti, v. t. to pluck, 


dum 


82 


dut 


du ma Hi ta, v. i., adv. back and 
forth, going from side to side, chang¬ 
ing direction rapidly. 

du ma Hi ta ti di e, to run back 
and forth. 

du ma ta [ru-, nu-], n. middle, 
the middle of anything. 

du ma ta du [-ru], adv., n. in 
or through the middle, the middle 
part of anything. 

du ma ta Ha, adv toward the 
middle. 

du ma ta ko a, adv. at the 
middle. 

du ma ta ta, adv. facing the 
middle, directed toward the middle. 

du ma ti tski, v. fr, dumata and 
itski; tied in the middle, cut or 
strangled in the middle. 

du mi di, v. t.fr. midi; to twist 
or twill in any way. 

du mi Ha [-wi-], v., adv. to turn 
or point out of a straight line, in an 
oblique direction; said of a white 
man’s track — toes outward, of the 
track of a man lost in a storm, etc. 

du mu dsi [duwudsi], v. t.fr. 
mudsi; to roll up; nearly the same 
as pamudsi. 

du pi, v. t. to break off a por¬ 
tion. 

du pu pi, adj. capable of stretch¬ 
ing and recoiling, elastic. 

du se [ru- or lu-], v. t. to lay 
down, to release, to deposit.— dusa 
and dusa-diha are imperative forms. 

du si pi, v. t. to untie, to open 
like a sack by pulling the edges 
apart. 

du ske [ru-], v. t. to open, as a 
door or the lid of a box.— duska, 
imperative, duski, opened. 

du sku, v. t. to place an evil 
charm on, to bewitch. 


du su ki [ru-], v. t.fr. suki; to 
erase, to clean by rubbing; to wash 
as the face, but not as clothing. 

du ta, v. i. fr. ta; to crack, to go 
to pieces in any way. 
du ta [nuta, luta], n. a rib, ribs, 
du ta he, v. t.fr. duta; to cause 
to burst, or fly to pieces. 

du ta pi [ru], v. t. fr tapi; to 
squeeze, to hold and press, as in 
shaking hands, to squeeze in any 
way. 

du ta ti, fr. tati; to poke or 
punch, to press with the finger-tip. 

du ti [nuti], v. t. to chew, to 
eat, to partake of solid food.— duti 
is the form of the 2d and 3d per¬ 
sons ; muti, of the 1st person. See 
1 193. 

du ti, v. t. to bind, to confine. In 
this word the initial d (or r) is re¬ 
tained throughout its conjugation (1 st 
var. r 192), which distinguishes it 
from duti, to eat; but in the 3d per¬ 
son and in the infinitive, these two 
words are homonymous. 

du ti ksa, v. t. to eat constantly, 
habitually. 

du to’ ti, v. t.fr. to'ti; to shake 
as in casting pepper, to dredge or 
sprinkle. 

du tsa, simple imperative of du- 
tsi; take it, gel it. 

du tsa da, v. t. fr. tsada; to slide 
or slip in any way. 

du tsa ki, v. t. fr. tsaki; to dis¬ 
sever without cutting or burning, to 
pull apart. 

du tsa ki de, v., adj. almost dis¬ 
severed, torn so as to be held only 
by a thread. 

du tsa’ ti, v. t.fr. tsa’ti; to stick, 
thrust through, impale, hold in read¬ 
iness for cutting by impaling. 


dut 


83 


ets 




dll tse, v. t. to take, obtain, lift, 
du tsi, taken, procured, 
du tsi pi, v. t. to untie, 
du tsi si, v. i. to spring back, as 
something bent and released.— ki- 
dutsisi is the more common form. 

du tsi ti, v. t. to tear asunder, to 
tear down, to raze a building. 

du tska, v. or adj. twin. See 
dakadutska. 

du tska pi, v. i. fr. tsk^pi; to 
pinch with an instrument. 

du tska ti, v. t. fr. tskati; to 
squeeze, force or pass through, by 
any means. 

du tskl pi, v. t. to milk a cow. 
This word seems to be from same 
root as datskipi; but the connection 
is not obvious. 

du tskl si, v. t. to wash; said of 
washing clothing. 


du tskl ti, v. t. fr. tskiti; to en¬ 
circle the body, neck, limbs, or any 
object,with something which presses 
closely, to tie a string tightly around, 
to strangle, to kill by hanging, to 
tie a sack in the middle, etc. 

du tsku pi, v. t. fr. tskupi; to 
bend, to double by pressure or other¬ 
wise, to bend a stick for setting a 
spring-trap. 

du tsu ki, v. t. to knead the ab¬ 
domen (kneading the abdomen is 
a common remedy for numerous 
complaints with this people), to en¬ 
girdle. 

du tu’ ti, v. t. same as duto’ti. 
du wa Hi ta, v. i. same as duma- 
liita. 

du wl di, v. t. same as dumidi. 


e 

e, adv. yes. 

e, v. t. to keep, to retain, 
e de de, v. to bear, to lay. 
e di, n. the abdomen, 
e di, v. t. to defecate, 
e die' ti, v. t. fr. edi, icith the 
suffix ti; denoting desire or readiness. 

e die ti a, v. i. fr. edi and ictia; 
to be pregnant. 

e di de, comp. v. fr. edi and de. 

§ du i, adj. same as adui; pungent, 
bitter. 

e Hi, v. to urinate, 
e Hie' ti, v. i. fr. ehi and ti; de¬ 
noting desire or readiness. 


6 ke, v. t. to know, to understand, 
to recognize. 

e ke ta’, v. t. negative of eke; to 
know not.— emaketiits, is the true 
equivalent of “ I don't know," but 
madahisets, I am ignorant , is more 
commonly used. 

e lu i, same as edui and adui; this 
pronunciation is quite common. 

e pe, v. t. to grind or triturate; 
same as p6. 

6 ri, n. same as edi. 

e tsa, n. adj. all, the aggregate of 
a number of individuals; not ordin¬ 
arily applied to the whole of one 
thing. See hakaheta. 

3 tsa de, adj. almost all. 


A 


ha 


84 


hat 


h. 

ha, v. and suffix to verbs, 2d pers. 
of be; you do, you make. 

ha he te, v. t. to divorce.—liahe- 
ta, 2d pers. 

ha hd ti, divorced, 
ha hpi, v. i. to sneeze, 
ha hpi'c ti, v. i. fr. kalipi; to 
have a desire to sneeze, to be ready 
or about to sneeze. 

ha hpi ke, v. t. to cause to sneeze, 
to produce sneezing. 

ha ka’ ta [hakanta], 2d pers. 
and imper. of haka’ti; wait! halt! 

ha ka’ ti, v. i. to stop, cease, leave 
off, halt. 

ha ka’ ti he, v. t. to stop or arrest, 
ha ka’ ti ke, v. t. to cause to 
stop,— stopped, haka’ti and its de¬ 
rivatives are often used with h as the 
first letter. See Raka’ti. 

ha ka tsi, v. t. to butcher, to cut 
up meat. 

ha ke, v. t. to gather and hold up 
with the hands, as the edge of a robe 
or skirt is held in wading. 

ha ko ka, adv. above, overhead, 
but not in contact with; nearly the 
same as akoka. 

ha mi [hawi], v. i. to sleep, 
ha mic' ti, v. i .fr. hand and ti; 
to be sleepy. 

ha mi de, v. i. almost asleep, 
dozing. 

ha ml ksa, v. i. to sleep habitu¬ 
ally and excessively. 

ha o, interj., adv. a word used to 
denote approbation, gratification, 
agreement, assent or greeting. It 
is common to many Indian lan¬ 
guages. It is usually written “ how ” 
by travelers, and is often pronounced 


by Indians the same as the English 
word hoic. It is difficult to deter¬ 
mine the best mode of spelling. Mr. 
Riggs in his Dakota Dictionary 
writes it “ ho,” but the Hidatsa rarely 
pronounce it thus. 

ha pa, adj. cold, chilly; refers to 
the sensation as experienced by 
living animals. 

ha pa ke, v. to make cold,— 
changed from warm to cold, chilled. 

ha’ pe sa, v. i., adj. dark, devoid 
of light. 

ha’ pe sa de, adj., n. almost 
dark, twilight. 

ha’ pe sa du i, v. i. darkening, 
ha’ pe sa ke, v. t. to darken,— 
darkened. 

ha si si, v. i. to feel a stinging or 
smarting sensation. 

ha si si he, v. t. to sting, to smart, 
ha si si ke, v. t. to cause to 
smart,— rendered sharply painful. 

ha tsa, v. t. fr. tsa; to clean or 
separate by scraping, 
ha tsa ke ki, v. i. to hiccough, 
ha tsa ke kic ti, v. i .fr. hatsa- 
keki; to have a desire to hiccough, 
to be about to hiccough, to be hic¬ 
coughing and likely to continue. 

ha tsi te, v. t. to cook by roast¬ 
ing or baking. 

ha tska du i, v. i. fr. hatska; 
lengthening gradually, 
ha tski, adj. long, 
ha tski de, almost long, nearly 
long enough. 

ha tski ke, v. t. to make long,— 
lengthened. 

ha tski ksa, v., adj. continuously 
or excessively long. 


haw 


85 


hid 


ha wi, y. i. same as liami. 
he, v. t. to make, to prepare, 
he, an auxiliary verb or suffix to 
verbs, forming transitive, from in¬ 
transitive verbs ; 3d pers.; signifies 
to make or cause. See par. 158. 
he da pi, n. the waist, 
he duts, same as lieide, and ap¬ 
parently a contraction. 

he i de, v. i. or sentence, fr. ide; 
“ so he says,” “ that is what he says;” 
said when quoting or repeating, and 
ordinarily used with the terminal ts, 
thus—lieidets. 

hi, v. t. to draw into the mouth 
as in smoking or drinking; an ir¬ 
regular verb. See par. 207. 

hi, v. to touch, to come in contact 
with. 

hi’ [or i], n. a sharp point, the 
point of an instrument; commonly 
suffixed. 

hi, n. a common name for dermal 
appendages, hair, feathers, bristles, 
etc.; commonly used as a suffix, or 
terminal part of a compound noun, 
hi, p. pron., 3d pers., singular, 
hi da, v., adj. ?from lhdi; new, 
recently made. 

hi da ka tsa, v. i. fr. daka; it 
lives, it continues. 

hi da mi [-wi], v. i., imperf., 3d 
pers., same as liami; he sleeps. 

hi da mi de, v. i. fr. hidami; he 
dozes. 

hi da tsa, n. said to mean “ wil¬ 
lows;" the name of one of the old 
villages of this tribe on the Knife 
River, and the present name of the 
entire tribe.—Maximilian (Lloyd’s 
Trans.), “ Elasa.” De Smet, “ Idat- 
za.” Boiler, “ Hee-rae-an sell.” 

hi di, v. t. to make, to form, to 
create. 


hi di’, interjection, let me alone! 
there now ! Used mostly by children 
when being teased. 

hi di, dem. pron., this; is used 
for person, place and time.—liidi- 
mape, this day, to-day. 

hi di ka, adj./r. liidi and ka; in 
this compass, this amount, so much, 
liidika or hidikats is said when ex¬ 
hibiting a quantity, or giving an idea 
of quantity by signs. 

hi di ko a, adv./r. hidi aradkoa; 
at this place, here. 

hi di mi, adj./r. hidi; this many, 
so many. It is used in much the 
same way as liidika, but refers to 
number instead of quantity. It 
answers the question * tuami ? ’ how 
many? 

hi di se, adv. fr. hidi and ise; 
thus, in this manner. 

hi di ta, adv./r. liidi; in this way 
or direction, this part. 

hi di wi or hidiwits, common 
modes of pronouncing hidimi. hidi¬ 
wits is the terminal form, 
hi do, pers. pron., 3d pers., plural, 
hi do, dem. pron. that, that person 
or place. 

hi do, adv. in that place, there, 
hi do ka, adv. fr. liido; in that 
place, by that way, therein. 

hi do ki, comp. pers. pron., 3d 
person, plur.,/r. hido; themselves, 
hi du, n. a mother, 
hi du, n. bone. 

hi du” a du pu pit hi, n. carti¬ 
lage. 

hi du i mak i a, n .fr. liiduatti? 
imakia; bones used in gaming. The 
name has been recently applied to 
dominoes. 

hi du ka, adv. same as hidoka; 
also pronounced hiduka. 


hid 


86 


huk 


hi du si di, n. the Assinneboine 
Indians. 

hi ke, v. t.fr. hi, to drink; to cause 
to drink, as in watering a horse. 

hi sa dsi, v. i., adj./r. lilsi; of a 
dull or doubtful red color, red but 
not scarlet, reddish. 

hi sa dsi ke, v. t. to make of a 
reddish color, to dye reddish. 

hi sa du i, v. i. reddening, becom¬ 
ing red. 

hi si, adj. red, bright red, scarlet, 
hlsi-ddhi-hisi, a light transparent red. 
hlsi-amahu-hota, pink. 

hi si de, v. i., adj./r. hisi; almost 
red; said of an iron or stone that is 
being heated, 
hi si he, v. t. to redden, 
hi si ke, v. t. to dye red, to make 
red. 

hi si ke, reddened, dyed red. 
hi si sa du i, v. i.fr. hisise; as¬ 
suming a reddish tinge. 

hi si se, adj.,v. i.fr. hisiantilse; 
having a reddish tinge; said of north¬ 
ern lights, the morning sky, etc.;— 
also lhsisi. 

hi si si ke, v. t. to cause to assume 
a reddish tinge. 

hi su a,n. mint, the Mentha Cana¬ 
densis. 

hi ta, adj. fast, fleet; said of a 
good runner; used also adverbially. 

hi ta du i, v. i. becoming fleet, 
increasing in speed. 

hi ta ha, adv. fleetly, rapidly; a 
more proper adverbial form than 
liita. 

hi ta ke, v. t. to make fleet, to 
accelerate motion. 

ho, the word hao is sometimes 
thus pronounced. 

ho i ke [or howike], v. to hum 
a child to sleep, to drone a lullaby. 


ho pa, adv. slowly, tediously, 
wearily. # 

ho pa, v. i., adj. to be mysterious, 
sacred, to have curative powers, to 
possess a charm, incomprehensible, 
spiritual. Same as Dakota, wakan; 
but signifies also the power of cur¬ 
ing diseases. 

ho pa di, n. fr. hops!; mystery, 
medicine, incomprehensible power 
or influence, etc. 

ho’ pa du i, v. i. fr. lio’pi and 
adui; becoming more and more per¬ 
forated, in different places, as a target 
at which marksmen are shooting. 

ho pa ke, v. t. fr. hopa; to make 
slow, to cause to be slow*. 

ho pa se, v. t. to scare greatly, to 
terrify.—hopaslts, terrified. 

ho pa ti, n .prob.fr. liupa; corn 
in the ear, roasting ears. 

ho pa ti si, n .fr. liopati and Isi; 
corn husks. 

ho’ pi [orhopi], v. i., adj. bored, 
perforated, excavated. 

ho’ pi de adj. almost perforated, 
bored nearly through. 

ho’ pi ke, v. t. to perforate,— 
bored through, supplied with an ex¬ 
cavation or opening. 

hu, v. i. to come.—hu’, imperative, 
hu, n. a mother. This word is 
said to be of Amahami origin, 
hu a, v. i. to cough, 
hu a ke, v. t. to cause to cough, 
hu a ksa, v. i. to cough habitually 
or continuously, as with a bad cold. 

hu a ti, v. i. to have a desire to 
cough, to be about to cough. 

hu duk, adv. fr. hu and duk; 
when it comes to pass, at a future 
time specified. 

hu ka he ! inter, hallo! etc. 
hu ki, n. gloves or mittens. 


hup 


87 


ham 


hu pa, n. soup. hu pa a ku i ku tski, n.fr. aku 

hu pa, n. moccasins. See itapa. and ikutski; a “measuring-worm.” 
hu pa, n. a stem or handle, a corn hu te, n. a screech owl. 
cob, a pipe-stem, etc. hu tsi, n. wind. 


ha, prep, toward, in the direction 
of; suffixed to nouns it forms adverbs 
which qualify verbs denoting mo¬ 
tion. 

ha, adj. coarse, rough, scaly, etc.; 
used only as a factor of compound 
words. 

ha bu a, same as hamua. 
ha da ha du i, v. i. growing lean, 
ha da hi, adj. lean, 
ha da hi ke, v. t. to cause to be 
lean, to starve,—starved, reduced to 
a condition of leanness. 

ha da hi ksa, adj., v. habitually 
lean, emaciated. 

ha da hi ksa ke, v. t. to cause 
to be emaciated. 

ha de, verb root; shell, as corn, 
ha de, n. rain. 

ha de, v. to rain.—liadets, it rains, 
ha di e, v. to rain; same as hade, 
ha ha, v. i. fr. ha; very rough, 
prickly, echinate. 

ha ha du i, v. i. becoming very 
rough. 

ha ha dsi, v. i. roughish, having 
the appearance of being rough. 

ha hi, v., adj. striped, marked 
with parallel bands or lines. 

ha hi he, v. t., 3d pers. to stripe, 
to mark with parallel bands. 

ha hi ke, v. t. to stripe, to cause 
to be striped. 

ha hua, v. i., adj. to be set closely 
together, thickly studded, 
ha hu a ke, v. t. to cause to set 


closely together, to compel a large 
number of persons or things to oc¬ 
cupy a small surface, to plant closely, 
to pitch camp with the lodges close 
together. 

ha hu a ksa, adj. continuously 
or constantly close, or thickly set. 

ha ka, v. i. to be rocking, oscillat¬ 
ing, shaken or agitated. 

ha ka, v. i. to itch, to be afflicted 
with itching sores, as in small-pox. 

ha ka du i, v. i. becoming itchy 
or more itchy. 

ha ka he, v. t .fr. haka; to rock, 
shake or agitate. 

ha ka he ta, v. i., adj. whole, 
entire, the entire of one thing, 
haka he tade, adj. almost entire, 
ha ka he ta ke, v. t. to make 
whole or entire,—completed. 

ha ka ke, v. t. fr. liaka; to make 
itchy, to produce an itchy sensation 
or an itching sore. 

ha ka’ ta, same as haka’ta. In 
the, derivatives of this word also, h 
is often substituted for the initial h. 

ha ku pi, v. i., adj. hollowed 
longitudinally, having a crease or 
furrow. 

ha ku pi he, v. t. to make a crease 
or furrow. 

ha ku pi ke, v. t. to furrow, to 
mark with creases or grooves,— 
grooved. 

ha ma dsi [-wa-], v. i. having 
a diverging appearance. 


Mm 


88 


hid 


ha ma du i [-wa-], v. i.fr. Ra¬ 
mi; becoming progressively more 
branched, forked or diverging. 

ha mi [-wi], v. i., adj. to be 
forked, scattering or diverging. 

ha mi ke, v. t.fr. Rami; to cause 
to diverge or scatter, as in tossing 
the hair. 

ha mu a [-bu-], y.i.fr. mua; 
to make a rough noise, to rattle. 

ha jpa du i, v. i. fr. Rapi and 
adui; becoming thinner, wearing 
thin. 

ha pa ta du i, v. i. fr. Rapati; 
becoming satiated. 

ha pa ti, v. i. to have a feeling of 
satiety, to have hunger or thirst fully 
satisfied, to be satisfied or satiated in 
any respect. 

ha pa ti de, almost satisfied, 
ha pa ti he, v. t. to satisfy, 
ha pa ti ke, v. t. to satisfy, to 
cause to be satisfied, to supply with 
food sufficient for satisfaction,— 
satisfied. 

ha pa ti ksa, v. i., adj. habitually 
satiated, gorged, satisfied to disgust, 
ha pe or \ verbal root; denude, 
ha pi, J remove surface, peel. 

ha pi, v. i. adj. thin, as paper or 
finely dressed skin. 

ha pi. v. i. to lie down.—Rap, 
imperative. 

ha pi, v. i to be lost, 
ha pi he, v. t. to lose, he loses or 
lost, they lose. See par. 199. 
ha pi he ke, v. t. to cause to lose, 
ha pi he ksa, v. to lose frequently 
or excessively, to be careless of things, 
to be in the habit of losing. 

ha pi ke, v. t.fr. hapi; to make 
thin, to wear thin, to cause to be 
thin. 

ha pi ke, made thin, worn thin. 


ha pi ke, v. t.fr. hapi; to cause 
to be lost, to lose. 

ha pi ksa, v. i. excessively thin, 
constantly thin. 

ha ta ta ka 1 adv. rapidly, in 
ha ta ta ka ha, J frequent and ra¬ 
pid succession. 

ha ta ta ka du i, v. i. fr. hata- 
taki; becominggradually accelerated 
in motion. 

ha ta ta ki, v. i., adj. to be rapid, 
to move rapidly. 

ha ta ta ki ke, v. t. to make 
rapid, to accelerate motion. 

ha ti, v. root; to brighten or light¬ 
en ; hence amaliati and oRati. 
ha wi, name as Rami, 
he, adj. probably a contraction of 
fiie; old. 

he mi [-wi], v. i., adj. lone¬ 
some. 

he mi ke [-wi-], v. t. to make 
lonesome. 

he mi ksa, v. i. continually lone¬ 
some, melancholy. 

he pa du i, v. i.fr. Rcpi; becom¬ 
ing more shallow. 

he pi. v. i., adj. shallow, as water, 
he pi de, v. i. almost shallow, 
he pi ke, v. t. to make shallow, 
to bail out or drain out. 

he pi ke, made shallow, drained 
or evaporated to shallowness. 

he pi ksa, v. i. very shallow, 
continually shallow, 
he pi ksa ke, v. t. fr. liepiksa. 
he se, v. root, tear through, sepa¬ 
rate. 

he wi, a common pronunciation 
of Remi, either when used alone or 
in its derivatives. 

hi di a, v. i. to experience an 
itching sensation, to feel other ab¬ 
normal or peculiar sensations. 




Hi di a ke, v. t. to make itchy or 
sensitive. 

M di a ksa, v. i. persistently or 
habitually itchy, or sensitive. 

hi e, aclj. old, advanced in age, 
decrepit as if old; said of organized 
beings. 

hi e ke, v. t. to cause to be old or 
decrepit. 

hi e ksa, adj. v. superannuated. 

hi pa du i, v. i. fr. hi'pi; becom¬ 
ing wrinkled, as a person advancing 
in age. 

hi pe, v. root; skin, flay. 

ho, hypothetical word; the body, 
the trunk, the entire body. See ilio, 
diho and malio. 

ho hi, verb, root; break across, 
break by bending. 

ho ho i, v. i. to experience the 
peculiar weak or painful feeling in 
the eyes resulting from deferred 
sleep.— mista hohoits, my eyes are 
sleepy. 

ho ka, n. a skunk, mephitis. 

ho ka di ti, v. t. to close up by 
tying. 

ho ki, verbal root, denotes the 
pulling of a hard instrument through 


something that yields; as in pulling 
a comb through the hair, an oar 
through water. 

ho pa se, v. t. same as hopase. 
liopase is the more common pronun¬ 
ciation. 

ho pa si, v. scared, startled, ter¬ 
rified. 

ho pa si ke, v. t. to cause to be 
scared. 

ho ta, adj. gray, whitish gray. 

ho ti sa, ) adj .fr. liota and isS; 
hd ti se, i" grayish, iron gray; 
said in describing horses. 

hu, verb, root; upset, spill, throw 
down. 

hu a ha, n. ? hypothetical; the 
knees. See iliualia. 

hu e, v. t. and i. to upset, to top¬ 
ple over as a stick set upright. 

hu e de, v. i. fr. liue and de; to 
be almost falling, to stumble, 
hu hu ij same as hohoi. 
hu pi, v. root; drain dry, drink, 
absorb. See dahupi. 

hu ti, v. root, or ? modified fr. 
hu; to be in a condition to fall, 
placed insecurely. 


i. 


i, point, edge, tooth; same as hi.’ 
i, n. hair of animals; proh.fr. hi. 
i’, n. the mouth. 

i, pers. pron. incorporated, 3d. 
pers., masc., fern, and neut., sing, and 
plur., objective and possessive. In 
the objective it may denote the com¬ 
bined agent and object of a reflexive 
verb. In the possessive it usually 
denotes non-transferable possession, 

U 


i, a prefix forming, with verbs, 
nouns of the material or instrument. 
Prefixed to cardinal numbers it forms 
ordinals. 

i a ha ha, v. t. to encircle or sur¬ 
round, surrounding it.—alialia is per¬ 
haps the simple word. 

i a ka, n. a man’s elder brother.— 
miaka, my elder brother, diaka, your 
elder brother. 


ida 


lap 90 

i a pa ti, n. a stopple of any kind, 
a cork. 

ic ka, n. a star. 

ic ka da mi [-nawi], n. fr. 

icka and darni; the Belt of Orion. 

ic ka de hi, n./r. icka and delii; 
Sirius. 

ic ka ha hti a, n .fr. icka and fta- 
hua; the Pleiades. 

ic ka ic ti a, n .fr. icka and ictia; 
Yenus and Jupiter, 

ic ka sa pu a, n./r. icka and sa- 
pua; Ursa Major. 

l'c ke, n. bands, societies or secret 
orders among the Hidatsa; each 
having its own songs, dances and 
ceremonies, which are to a certain 
extent esoteric. 

l'c ki, comp. pers. pron. himself, 
herself, itself, themselves, 
ic pa, n. the wing of a bird, 
l'c pa ta ki, n./r. iepa, and taki; 
a species of hawk, 
ic pe, n. a magpie, 
ic pe, n. the tail of a bird, 
l'c pu, n. point, top, extremity, 
small end; same as Dakota inkpa or 
intpa. For examples, see amaicpu, 
aziicpu, midaicpu and sakiicpu. 
ic ta ta ki, n. the kill-deer, 
ic ti a, adj. great, large, 
ic ti a du i, v. i. fr. ictia; in¬ 
creasing. 

ic ti a he, v. t. and i. to increase, 
ic ti a ke, v. t. to cause to en¬ 
large or increase, to change from 
small to large, 
ic ti a ke, enlarged, 
l da, v. i. to yawn, 
i da hi, n./r. dalii; a shade, its or 
his shade, shadow, or ghost. 

i da hi hi, n. fr. daliihi; a re¬ 
flection ; his, her, or its reflection.— 
madaliihi, my reflection, didahilii, 
your reflection. 


i da hi se, n./r. i and daliise; a 
shovel; same as amaidahise. 

i da hpi, v. t. to make an incised 
wound. 

i da ka, n. fr. daka; his or her 
offspring, their offspring. 

i da ka ki ti, n. fr. dakakiti; a 
robe-scraper. The term has been 
recently applied to razors. 

i da ki sa, n. adj. left, left hand, 
left side. 

i da ki sa ko a, adv. at the left, 
to the left. 

l da ko a ka de, n. the parting 
in the centre of hair of head. 

i da ko e [-la-], fr. dakoe; his 
friend, his comrade. 

i da ku dsi, n. fr. dakudsi; a 
swing. See maidakudsi and maka- 
distaidakudsi. 

i da mi L-nawi], ord. num, fr. 
cl ami; third. 

i da mi de [-nawi-], v. adj. 
almost third. 

i da mi du [inawiru], adv. 
thirdly, in the third order or place. 

i da mi ke, v. t. to make third, 
to place in the order of third,—made 
third. 

x da pa, n., adj. right, right side, 
right hand. 

i da pa ha, adv. toward the right, 
i da pa ko a, adv. at the right, 
l da pu di, adj. wild, unmanage¬ 
able, as a wild horse, 
i da spa, n. shoulder, shoulders, 
i da spa ki pe, comp. v. to carry 
on the shoulders. 

i da’ ti, n. a brother-in-law, his 
or their brother-in-law.— dida’ti, 
your brother-in-law. mada’ti my 
brother-in-law. 

l da tska ti, n./r. i and datskati • 
a syringe — maidatskati is the more 
common form. 


ida 


91 


idu 


i da wi. See idami and its deri¬ 
vatives. 

i de, v. t. to say, to speak, 
i de ksa, v. t. to talk excessively, 
to say too much, to be garrulous or 
too communicative. 

i d^ ta, n./r. i, mouthy and deta; 
the lips, more properly the mucous 
surface of the lips.—ideta-aku-akoka, 
upper lip. ideta-aku-miktakoa, lower 
lip. See aputi. 
i di, n. blood. 

I di, n. penis, 
i di a Hi, v. i. to sigh, 
i di e [or idiets], v. t. 3d pers. 
he thinks, believes or supposes.— 
dadiets, or nadiets, you think, ma- 
diets, or badiets, I think. 

l di hu, v. comp. fr. idi and hu; 
to bleed. 

i di i ps§, ki, n. fr. ipsaki; a 
breech-cloth. 

i di ka lia, n. ?fr. idiki ; popliteal 
space. 

i di ke di ksa, n. fr. idiki; a 
garter, or string for securing the 
.’egging. 

i di ki, n. the leg, the entire lower 
extremity.—madiki, my leg. 

i di ki u ti, n .fr. idiki and uti; 
head of femur. 

i di ki u ti o ki, n. fr. idikiuti 
and oki; acetabulum. 

x di ko a—matu", said of a wo¬ 
man’s jealousy. 

i di pa du i, v. i. fr. idipi and 
adui; fattening. 

i di pi, v. adj. flit, fleshy, 
l di pi ke, v. t. to make fat,— 
fattened. 

l di pi ksa, adj. obese, 
i di si, n. fr. disi, his or her son, 
their son. 

i di tsi, adj., v. i. to have a scent 
or smell, agreeable or disagreeable. 


i di tsi i si a, v. i. fr. iditsi and 
isia; to smell disagreeably, to 
stink. 

i di tsi i si a ke, v. t. to cause 
to smell badly,—changed from an 
agreeable to a disagreeable odor. 
The intensive form is more com¬ 
monly used. 

i di tsi ke, v. t. to supply with 
an odor, to cause to smell. 

i di tsi tsa ki, v. i .fr. iditsi and 
tsaki; smelling sweetly, sweet- 
scented. 

i di tsi tsa ki ke, v. t. to cause to 
smell sweetly, to put scent upon, to 
remove a disagreeable odor,— sweet¬ 
ly scented. See kiiditsitsakike, which 
is the more common form. 

i do pa [-nopa], ord. num. fr. 
dopa ; second. 

i do pa du [inoparu], adv. 
secondly, in the second place. 

i do pa du ke, v. t. to put in the 
second place or order. 

i do pa ke, v. t. fr. idopa; to 
place second, to make second. 

i du, n. a woman’s elder sister, 
her or their elder sister. See madu 
and didu. 

i du hi, v. reflex,/r. dulii; to lift 
one’s self up, to stand up, to arise 
from sitting (but not from lying).— 
diduha! lift thyself, i. «., arise! 

i du ka, n. meat of any kind, 
particularly dried meat, 
i du ksl ti, n. fresh meat, flesh, 
i du ksi ti i mi di ti, n. frying- 
pan. See imiditi. 

i du pu pi, n. fr. dupupi; elastic 
band, or web. 

i du ti, n. fr. dnti, to bind; any 
thing used to bind, especially a bridle, 
or a raw-hide or rope tied around a 
horse’s jaw as a bridle. See uetsa 
iduti. 


idu 


92 


Ika 


i dutsi,n./r. dutsi; an instrument 
for taking up or lifting, as a fork. 

i ha, v. i., adj. to differ, to be dif¬ 
ferent, other, of another kind. 

i ha di, v. t. to set out food, to 
put a feast before a guest; lately ap¬ 
plied to setting a table. 

i ha ke, v. t.fr. ilia; to cause to 
be different, to change, to alter,— 
changed. 

i ha’ ta ha, v. take care, get out 
of the way, make room. 

i he, int. there now!, what do you 
think of that? 

i hi sa dsi ke, ri.fr. liisadsike; 
material to dye reddish. 

i hi si ke, xx.fr. lrisike; red dye¬ 
stuff. 

l ha, n. ? fr. lia rough, etc.; dust, 
solid dirt, the dirt on a floor or dish 
but not soils on clothing. 

i ha tsa ki, adj. fr. ilia; to be 
covered with dirt, dirty. 

i ha tsa ki ke, v. t. to cover 
with dirt, to throw dirt on. 
i hi, n. the forehead, 
l hi, n. braided hair, woven fab¬ 
ric. See masiilii. 

i hi, n. the omentum , the crop of 
a fowl. This word and the one im¬ 
mediately preceding are perhaps but 
different applications of one term. 

l ho, n. fr. hypoth. word ho; a 
body, his or her body, their bodies.— 
maho, my body, diho, your body. 

i ho a de, v. i. comp./r. iho and 
ade; to be sick, to have general dis¬ 
ease.— mahoadcts, I am sick, 
l ho ka, n. a fox. 
l ho ka da ka, xx.fr. ihoka, and 
daka; a fox-cub. 

l ho ka ic ke, n. fr. ihoka, and 
icke; the Fox Band, a secret degree 
or order among the men of this tribe. 


i ho ka l ti pe, xx.fr. ihoka and 
itipe ; a little fall-trap such as boys 
make for catching foxes. 

i" ho ka mi a ic ke, xx.fr. iho¬ 
ka, mia and icke; the Fox-woman 
Band, a secret degree or order a- 
mong the females; its members are 
usually from fifteen to twenty years 
old. 

l ho ka ta ki, n. artemesia ludo- 
viciana or small “ sage” of the north¬ 
ern plains. 

i ho ka la ki — a ku si pi sa, 

n. lit. “ black sage;” artemesia biennis, 
l ho ki, n. fr. hoki; an oar. 
i ho ta ka du i, v.i .fr. ihotaki; 
bleaching, becoming white. 

i ho ta ka dsi, v. i. adj. whitish, 
having a white appearance. 

i ho ta ki, adj. v. wdiite, to be 
white. 

i ho ta ki de, adj. almost white, 
i ho ta ki he, v. i. and t. to 
whiten, to bleach. 

i ho ta ki ke, v. t. to cause to be 
white, to bleach, to wash white, to 
change from dark to white. 

i hu a ha, xx.fr. huafia; the knee 
or knees, his or her knee or knees.— 
mahualia, my knee, dihuafia, your 
knee. 

l i ti pe, n. fr. i’, mouth , and iti¬ 
pe ; a lid, the lid of a pot or kettle. 

i l psa ki, xx.fr. ipsaki; a screen, 
a covering, 
l ka, n. the chin, 
l ka’, n. mother, my mother, a 
mother’s sisters.— ikas is the com¬ 
mon form of address. 

i ka, n. fr. ka; his, her, or their 
daughter.— maka, my daughter.— 
nika, your daughter. 

l ka, v. t. to see, he or she sees.— 
amaka, I see. adaka, you see. 



ika 


93 


iku 


i ka Hi, v. t. reflex, to lean against. 

1 ka ka, v. t. red. of ika; look! 
behold! 

l'kaki, n. fr. kaki; a wheel, a 
rolling vehicle. 

ika ti pe, n./r. katipe; a button. 
See maikatipe, which is more com¬ 
monly useu. 

l ka tsu ti, v. reflex, to scarify 
one’s self, to cut the flesh in mourn¬ 
ing. Scarifying the flesh is a com¬ 
mon method of showing sorrow for 
the dead. 

l ki, n. a whip. 

l’ ki, n. beard. 

l ki da ka pu si, n. fr. kidaka- 
pusi; something used to inflate, or 
fill out. See madahapi—ikidaka- 
pusi. 

l ki da ku di, n. fr. kidakudi; a 
fan. maikidakudi is the more com¬ 
mon form. 

i ki da tso pe, n. fr .i’, mouth , 
and kidatsope; a kiss. 

i ki da tso pe, v. t., comp, to 
kiss the mouth, to kiss —irnaki- 
datsope, I kiss, idakidatsope, you 
kiss. 

i ki du ta ta, n. an open space 
in a solid covering, the fontanels 
of an infant head. This word and 
the word midiikidutata (which see) 
are apparently from a verb “kidu- 
tata,” which, however, I have never 
heard except in these words. 

i ki kl ski, n .fr. kikiski; an in¬ 
strument for measuring or determin¬ 
ing any quality. 

l ki pa mi di [ikipawidi], 

v. reflex, fr. kipamidi; to turn one’s 
self around, to look behind. 

l ki pa ta ki, n. fr. kipataki; a 
bolt or bar for a door; accent also 
on penult. 


i ki pa to’ ti v. reflex, fr. kipa- 
to’ti; to shake one’s self; said of a 
bird shaking its plumage ; of au ani¬ 
mal drying itself by shaking; also 
lkipato’ti. 

l ki pi, n. a pipe, 
l ki pi hu pa, n. a pipe-stem, 
i ki pki ti, n./r. kipkiti; a sad¬ 
iron. 

i ki si, n. a nest, a bird’s nest, 
i ki tsa ti ke, n. fr. kitsatike, 
polish, varnish, etc. 

i ko ki, v. t. to hang up on a peg 
or nail. 

i ko’ pa, n,/r. ko’ pa; her friend 
or comrade.—mako’ pa, my friend, 
l ko zi, n./r. kozi; a whistle, 
l’ ko zi, v. i. fr i’ and kozi; to 
whistle with the mouth. 

I ksi a, v. i. stuck or stranded, as 
a vessel. 

i ksti ki, v. to dash or splash, to 
dash on. 

i ktsa ti, v. t. ? fr. kitsati; to be¬ 
daub, to apply any soft substance, as 
mud or molasses. 

i ku, n. a grandmother, a grand¬ 
mother’s sisters. 

i ku pa, v. t. to accompany, to 
go with. 

i ku pa, adv. with, along with, 
i ku’ pa, v. t. to hate, he hates.— 
amaku’pa.I hate, adaku’payou hate. 

i ku’ pa dsi, v. t .fr. ikii’pa and 
adsi; to dislike very much. 

i ku ti, n. the wrist, his or her 
wrist. 

i ku ti a du su ka, n. fr. ikuti 
and adustika; the wrist, the wrist- 
joint. 

i ku tski. n. fr. kutski; a mea¬ 
suring stick, a pattern. See mai- 
kutski, which is more commonly 
used. 


12 * 


l'ma 


94 


isa 


i ma hpi [iwahpi], v. i. and 
reflex, to set; said of heavenly 
bodies. 

i ma hpi de, v. adv. almost set¬ 
ting, near the time of setting. 

1 ma lipi du [iwahpiru], adv. 
at the time of setting. 

f ma lipi duk [iwahpiruk,] 
adv. of future time; when it will 
set, 

1 ma lipi se du, adv. of past 
time; when it did set, at last time of 
setting. 

l mak i [iwaki], n. ? fr. maki; 
the chest, the sternal region. 

l mak i e ke, n .fr. i and maki; 
gaming materials, cards. 

l mak I du, a contraction of ima- 
kihidu, and more commonly used 
than the latter. 

l mak i hi" du, n. fr. imaki and 
hidu; the breastbone, the sternum. 

i mak l ka ti pe, n. fr. imaki, 
the chest , and ikatipe, or fr. i, maki 
and katipe; buttons which join a 
garment in front. 

l mak si di, n. lit. tawny breast; 
the western meadow-lark, 
l ma si, n. price, value, 
l mi a [iwia], v. i. to weep, to cry 
and weep. 

l mi a ke, v. t. to cause to cry. 
i mi di pi ke, n. fr. midipi; a 
sponge. 

l mi di ti, n .fr. miditi; a frying- 
pan. 

i 6 pe, n. fr ope; a receptacle, a 
box. 

i 6 ki, n. fr. oki; a receptacle 
which closely surrounds or encircles, 
as a candlestick, a socket. 

i 6 ptsa ti, Ti.fr. optsati; nearly 
synonymous with ioki. See saki 
optsati. 


l pa ka de, n .fr. i and pgkade ; 
a fork. 

l pa sa ki, n .fr. i and pasaki; a 
belt; same as maipasaki. 

l pa ta ki, v. i. fr. pataki; to 
come in contact, to lean against. 

l pa tsa’ ti, n. fr. patsa’ti; a 
skewer or fork. 

l pho ki, n. a species of eagle. 
i pi, v. t. to cohabit, 
i pi ta, n. behind, the rear, the 
back part of anything. 

i pi' ta du, adv./r. ipita; in the 
rear, in the back part, after, follow¬ 
ing. 

i pi ta ha, adv. toward the rear, 
backward. 

i pi ta ko a, adv. at the rear, be¬ 
hind. 

i pki ti, v. t. to smooth out, to 
spread smoothly, to coat or cover 
smoothly, as in spreading butter or 
mortar. 

l psa ki, v. t. to conceal, screen, 
hide from view. 

I ptsa, n. an upright, a support¬ 
ing post or pillar. 

l ptse, v. t. to garnish, to embroi¬ 
der with beads. 

i sa, adv. suf. to verbs, etc., alike, 
resembling, nearly resembling, 
l sa, adv. thus, in this manner, 
l sa, conj. and, also, 
i sa ki, n. fr. saki; his or her 
hand. See saki.— masaki, my hand, 
disaki, your hand. 

i sa ki a du tsa mi he. See 
sakiadutsamilie. 
i sa ki l'c pu. See sakiicpu. 
i sa mi [isawi,] n. an aunt, his 
or her aunt, a father’s, but not a mo¬ 
ther’s sisters.— masami, or masawis, 
my aunt, disami, or nisawis, your 
aunt. 


isa 


95 


ita 


i sa mi ke, v. i. said of young 
sprouts growing from a stump. 

l sa tsa, adv. gratuitously, with¬ 
out reward. 

I se, same as isa, alike, resembling, 
l si, n. a vessel, box, sack, cover, 
or receptacle of any kind, 
i si a, v. adj. bad. 
i si a du i, v. i.fr. isia, and adui, 
deteriorating. 

i si a ke, v. t. to make bad, to 
spoil, damage, ruin, 
i si a ke, damaged, ruined, 
i si ta, n. the back, his or her 
back.— masita, my back, disita, 
your back. 

i si ki si, n. a brother-in-law, a 
woman’s husband’s brother, his or 
her brother-in-law.— misikisi, my 
brother-in law. disikisi, your bro¬ 
ther-in-law. 

i si pi he, n. fr. i’, mouth , and 
sipilie; Mouth Blackeuers, an order 
or degree among the Hidatsa mem 
i si pi sa ke,n./r. sipisake;dye¬ 
stuff for coloring black. 

i ske', v. t. to command or di¬ 
rect.— amaske, I direct. 

i spa hi, n. ? fr. palii; the elbow, 
his or her elbow\ mispalii, my 
elbow, dispalii, your elbow, 
i sta, or I sta, n. an eye, eyes, 
i sta da hpi, n. fr. ista and da- 
hpi; the eyelids. 

i sta du i ho ta ki, n. fr. ista, 
adu and ihotaki; the white of the 
eye. 

i sta du si pi sa, n .fr. ista, adu 
and sipisa; the pupil. 

i sta du ta, v., adj. prob. fr. ista 
and duti, to bind ; squint-eyed, 
i sta hu hi, v. i. to wink, 
l sta mi di [-bidi], n. fr. ista 
and midi; tears. 


i sta 6 ze, n .fr. ista and oze; an 
eye-water. 

i sta pe di, n .fr. ista and pedi; 
purulent or mucous matter adhering 
to the eyelids, 
i sta pi, n. eyelashes, 
l su, n. quills, primary feathers of 
wings of large birds, particularly of 
eagles’ wings. 

i su a ti si a, n .fr. isu and atisia; 
a bat. 

i su si sa, n. a species of king¬ 
bird, the tyrannus vociferans. 
i su ti, n. the lap. 
i su ti psa ki, u. fr. isuti and 
ipsaki; an apron, 

i ta, n. fr. i and ta; an arrow, 
lit., an instrument of death. See 
maita 

l ta or i ta, comp. pers. pron., 
3d pers., sing, and plur., possessive, 
and used for all genders; denotes 
principally acquired or transferable 
possession, ita (or its equivalents in 
the first and second person,—mata 
and dita), is prefixed to nouns, form¬ 
ing compounds which often differ so 
much from the original nouns in 
sense or sound that they are to be 
regarded as distinct words. A few 
examples follow. 

i ta da mi a [itarawia], n .fr. 
mia; a wife, a betrothed wife, a 
wife’s sister. 

l ta de hpa, n. the navel, 
i ta do hpa ka, n. fr. ita, and 
dohpaka; one’s own people, rela¬ 
tions, kindred. 

i ta do ta du [-lotaru], n., adv. 
fr. ita, and dotadu; this side of it, a 
place nearer than some given point; 
used also in comparison of adjectives 
to denote a less degree, or inferiority. 
Bee par. 229. 


ita 


96 


ita 


i ta do ta ko a, adv. fr. dota- 
koa ; “ at this side of it,” at a point 
nearer than some given point whose 
name is the antecedent of ita. 

i ta du [-ru], u. a mother’s bro¬ 
ther, his or her mother’s brother, 
uncles in the female line.— matadu 
or matarus, my uncle, ditadu, or ni- 
taru, your uncle. 

l ta du lia n. fr. miduha; one’s 
own gun or bow.— mataduha, my 
own gun. ditadulia, your own gun. 

i ta du lia ke, n. fr. midubake ; 
one’s own pop-gun. 

i ta du lia pi, n. fr. adubapi; 
one’s own bed.— mataduhapi, my 
own bed. 

l ta dsi, n. leggings, his or her 
leggings.— matadsi, my leggings, 
ditadsi, your leggings. 

i ta dsi—6 da ka pi M, n. fr. 
itadsi and odakapilii; the flap or 
fringe worn on the outer seam of the 
l(ifnrin° r 

i ta ha tski, n .fr. ita and hat- 
ski, lit. Jong Arrows; the Dakota 
Indians. 

i ta hi’, n .fr. ita and hi’; an arrow 
point. 

1 ta hu, n. a mouse. 

i ta hu ic ti a, n. fr. itahu and 
ictia; a rat. 

i ta l su, n. fr. ita and isu; the 
quills at the base of an arrow, arrow 
directors. 

i ta ka, n. an aged man, a vene¬ 
rable person. 

i ta ka he, or itakahie, n. a 
very old man. 

i ta ka te tas, proper noun,/r. 
itaka, te and ta, lit. Old Man Immor¬ 
tal; one of the Hidatsa names for 
the Deity. 


l ta ki, n. fr. i, hair , and taki, 
white; the jackass rabbit, or lepus 
campestris, which turns white in 
winter. 

I ta ki da ka he, n .fr. kidakahe; 
a span, the outstretch of the hand, 
the measure of a span. See sakiila- 
kidakahe. 

i ta ki sa, n. a sister, a man’s 
younger sister.—matakisa, my sister, 
nitakisa, your sister. 

i ta ksi pi sa, n. fr. itaki and 
sipisa ; the small rabbit or cony, the 
“ wood-rabbit.” 

i ta ku, n. a woman’s younger 
sister, her younger sister.—mataku, 
my sister, ditaku, your sister. 

i ta ku pe, n. an owl, particularly 
the great horned owl. 

i ta ma, n .fr. ita and ama; one’s 
own country, the proper hunting- 
ground of any tribe. 

I ta ma e, n .fr. ita and mae; one’s 
own property, his own property.— 
matamae, my own. ditamae, your 
own. See par. 120. 

i ta ma ta, n .fr. ite, ama and ta ; 
face downward, with the face to the 
ground. 

l ta ma si, n. a servant; used 
when speaking of white men. 
i ta ma su ka, n. his dog. 
ita me tsa [-wetsa], n. ? fr. 
matse; a brother, brethren (in the 
widest sense); this is also the only 
term for a woman’s elder brother.— 
matametsa, my brother. 

i ta mi a [-wia], n .fr. ita and 
mia; a man’s elder sister.— matamia, 
my sister, ditamia, your sister. 

l ta 6 ka du, adv. fr. ita and 
okadu; the other side of it, on the 
other side of it, in a place further off 1 


ita 


97 


its 


than some object mentioned. This 
word and the next following are 
commonly used in comparison of 
qualities to denote superiority,—the 
antecedent of ita being the inferior. 
See par. 120. 

I ta 6 ka ko a, adv. fr. ita and 
okakoa; at the other side of it, be¬ 
yond some object mentioned. 

I ta 6 ki ko a, a rare pronuncia¬ 
tion of the word immediately pre¬ 
ceding. 

i ta pa, n. fr. ita and hupa; moc- 
casons, his or her moccasons.— ma- 
tapa, my moccasons. 

l ta si, n .fr. ita and masi; his or 
her own robe or blanket.—inatasi, 
my robe. 

i ta si i ptsi, n. fr. itasi and i- 
ptsi ( See masiiptsi); the garnishing of 
his or her robe. 

i ta su, n. contraction ofitaisu. 
i ta su ka, n. fr. ita and itsua- 
suka or suka; one’s own horse.— 
matasuka, my horse. 

i ta su pu zi, n. fr. itasu and 
puzi, lit. Spotted Arrow-quills; the 
Cheyenne Indians. 

i ta tsu, n. fr. ita and tsu; the 
half of anything. 

i ta tsu he, v. t. fr. itatsu; to 
divide into its halves; also used as 
a noun or adjective, signifying half 
or halved. 

l ta we tsa, n. same as itametsa. 
l ta wi a, n. same as itarnia. 
i te, v. t. to admire, to be fond of. 
amatets, I admire, adatets, you ad¬ 
mire. 

i te, or ite n. the face, 
i te a ka ta, adv. same as itakata. 
i te a ma ta, adv. same as itamata. 
l te ha, adv. fr. ite; toward the 
pace or front, forward. 


i te i si a, v. i.,adj./r. iteawfisia; 
to be ill-favored, ugly. 

i te ko a, ad v.fr. ite; at or to the 
front or face, in front. 

i te ko a hi, adv. of time fr. ite- 
koa; soon, presently, at a future 
time not very distant. 

i te ko a hi duk, adv. of time 
fr. itekoahi; soon, in a little while; 
when, or if, a future time not very 
distant arrives. 

i te ma tse e" tsis, n. See 

Local Names. 

i te ta, adv. and n. on the face,— 
the cheek. 

l te ta a du ho pi, n. a dimple, 
i te tsa ki, v. i., adj. fr. ite and 
tsaki; possessed of a handsome face, 
pretty. 

i te u i, n .fr. ite and ui; vermilion 
or other pigment used in painting 
the face. 

l ti pe, n .fr. i and tipe; some 
thing which closes or covers, as a 
lid, a fall-trap, etc. See maitipe. 

i to di, v. i. ? reflexive; to be 
ashamed of, to feel shame. 

i to di ke, v. t. to cause to be 
ashamed, to shame. 

i to hi ke, n .fr. tohike; dye-stuff 
for coloring blue. 

i to hi sike, n .fr. tohisike; ma¬ 
terial for dyeing bluish or green, 
i to pa, ord. num./r. topa; fourth, 
i to pa du, adv. fr. itopa; 
fourthly, in the fourth place or 
order. 

i to pa du ke, v. t. fr. itopadu; 
to put in the fourth place or 
order. 

i tsa ki, v. comp., often used as 
pronoun,/?’, i and tsaki; he, she or 
it alone, he by himself, unaided.— 
mitsaki, I alone, ditsaki, you alone. 


its 


98 


itu 


i tsa ti, n, fr. i and tsati; oil or 
other material used to render a Bur- 
face smooth. 

i tsa’ ti, u. the Isanti or Santee 
Dakotas. This word is simply the 
Hidatsa pronunciation of the Dakota 
word. 

i tsa u 2i e, v. t.fr. uzie; to meet 
another person face to face, to meet 
in coming from opposite directions. 

i tse, v. ? reflex, to waken up, to 
arouse one’s self. 

i tsi. See itsii. 

l tsi, v. i. to be awake. 

l tsi, n the human foot, theclaws 
of a fowl, the hind paws of a quad¬ 
ruped.— matsi, my foot, ditsi, your 
foot, itsi, his foot. See tsi. 

I tsi a du tsa mi he [-wihe], 
n. the toes. 

I tsie pu, n. fr, itsi and icpu; 
the toe-nails. 

i tsi di ke, n. fr. i and tsidike ; 
yellow dye-stuff, a lichen found by 
the Indians on dead pine-trees in the 
mountains. The name has been re¬ 
cently applied to turmeric and other 
yellow dyes obtained from the 
whites. 

l tsi he, v. t. fr. itsi; to arouse 
another person. 

i tsi' i, v. i. and adj. to be strong, 
physically strong; said of organized 
beings. 

i tsi i ke, v. t. to strengthen,— 
strengthened. 

l tsi ka, adv. and adj. first, fore¬ 
most. 

l tsi ka ko a, adv. fr. itsika; 
formerly, in the beginning, very long 
ago; used in reference to very re¬ 
mote past time. 

i tsi ka ma hi dis, n .fr. itsika, 
ma and lildi; one of the Ilidatsa 


names for their Deity, or object of 
greatest veneration. 

i tsi si pi sa, n. fr. itsi and si- 
pisa ; the Blackfoot Indians. 

I tsi ti, n .fr. itsi; a foot-print, a 
track; his, her or its foot-print. 

i tsi tsa du i, v. i. fr. itsitsi; 
becoming very bright. 

i tsi tsi, v. i., adj. very bright, 
gleaming, resplendent. 

i tsi tsi ke, v. t. to cause to 
brighten, made bright. 

l tski, v. i. to be large enough 
for a purpose, to contain, to accom¬ 
modate ; said if it is desired to cut a 
pair of moccasins out of a piece of 
buckskin, and on laying on the pat¬ 
tern, the piece is found to be large 
enough, etc.—itskitats, It is not large 
enough; 

i tski ti, n. fr. i and tskiti; an 
instrument for shearing off, or cut¬ 
ting close, as a scissors. See maits- 
kiti. 

i tsu a su ka, n. fr. suka; a 
horse. The meaning of the first 
three syllables is not now known. 
Some of the tribe think that the 
word was originally itsfmasuka, 
the ‘ strong dog’ or ‘ strong beast of 
burden.’ 

i tsu ka, n, a man’s or woman’s 
younger brother.—matsuka, my bro¬ 
ther. ditsuka, or nitsuka, your bro¬ 
ther. 

i tsu a su ka. See itsuasuka, 
which is sometimes pronounced 
thus. 

i tu di, v. i., adj. containing pus, 
purulent, suppurating. 

i tu Bi, n. a dress, coat or shirt, 
one’s own dress.— matuhi, my coat, 
dituhi, your coat, 
i tu ka, same as itekoa. 


itu 


99 


kak 


i tu pa, n. any wild feline, par- i tu pa pu zi, n. fr. itupa and 
ticularly the Canada lynx. puzi; tlie red lynx, lynx rvfus. 

i tu pa ic ti a, u. fr. itupa and \ wa ki, same as imaki. 
ictia; the puma. 


ka, prep, at, in ; suffixed to nouns 
it forms adverbs of place. 

ka, hypothetical word for daugh¬ 
ter. See ika. 

ka, an adjective, or qualifying 
suffix, denoting quantity. — tuaka, 
how much ? liidika (or hidikats), this 
much, so much. 

ka, 2 d pers. of ke, an auxiliary 
suffix; to make, to cause, 
ka’ v. i. to laugh, 
ka da, v. i. to flee from, to run 
away. 

ka da ka, v. t. prob. fr. ki and 
adalia; to kindle. 

ka da mi [-wi], v. t. to remem¬ 
ber; to recollect. 

ka da mi ke, v. t. to cause to 
remember, to remind. 

ka da tsi, v. i. to be willing, 
ka da tsi ke, v. t. to cause to be 
willing, to persuade or induce, 
ka de [kare], v. to vomit, 
ka de ti, v. i. to have a desire to 
vomit, to feel nausea. 

ka de ksa, to vomit excessively, 
or continuously. 

ka di, v. t. to ask for a gift, to beg. 
ka die ka [-ric-], n, lightning, 
ka di ksa, v. t. fr. kadi; to beg 
excessively, habitually, shamelessly. 

ka di sta [-ri-], adj. small— 
refers to size, not quantity or number. 

ka di sta du i, v. i. fr. kadista; 
decreasing gradually in size. 

ka di sta de, adj. almost small, 
almost small enough. 


ka di sta di, adj. very small, 
ka di sta ke, v. t. to cause to be 
small,—decreased, diminished. 

ka di sta ksa, adj. constantly 
small. 

ka di tska [-ri-], adj. to glisten, 
to shine brightly by reflected light. 

ka di tska pa [-ri-], v. i. to 
stick, to adhere as a glued or pasted 
surface. 

ka di tska pa he, v. t. to stick, 
to place in contact with an adhesive 
surface. 

ka di tska pa ke, v. t. to cause 
to adhere, to apply an adhesive sub¬ 
stance. 

ka dse, v. i. and t. to blow with 
the mouth, to blow away. 

ka du, n. a season of the year, a 
period of time marked by natural 
phenomena. 

ka du du, adv. during the sea¬ 
son. 

ka e, v. t. to scratch with the 
nails. 

ka he, v. t. synon. dakahe. 
ka he, v. t. to set free, to liberate, 
ka’ ke, v. t .fr. ka’; to cause to 
laugh.— ka’ike, it makes him laugh, 
ka ke’ ki, v. i. to make a loud 
rattling or stamping noise, 
ka ki, v. i. to roll, as a wheel, 
ka ki hi, adj. round, circular, 
ka ki hi de, adj. almost circu¬ 
lar, irregularly circular. 

ka ki hi ke, v. t. to make circu¬ 
lar, to cause to be circular. 




kak 


100 


ke 


ka ksa, n. any large tuber, as the 
potato, wild artichoke, etc. 

ka’ ksa, v. \.fr. ka’; to laugh ex¬ 
cessively. 

ka ku i, n. a squash, 
ka mi [-wi], same as komi, 
which is more common. 

ka mic ka, adj. tough, hard and 
elastic. 

ka mic ki su, adj. fr. kamicka 
and isu ; the name of a water-fowl, 
which sheds its quills on lakes. The 
quills are collected by the Indians 
on the leeward shores, split, dyed 
and used in embroidery, like porcu¬ 
pine quills. The name applies to 
both bird and quills, 
ka mi he, same as komihe. 
ka pe, or kapi, v. root; scratch, 
lacerate. See adakapi, dukapi, etc. 
ka ptsi, v. root; nick, notch, 
ka ra, same as kada. 
ka ra tsi, same as kadatsi. 
ka rl' sta. See kadista and its 
derivatives. 

ka ta ke, v. t. to turn inside out, 
to roll up the sleeves. 

ka’ ti, adj. and adv. true, real, 
truly, really, exceedingly, 
ka ti a, adj. to be extended, as 
the arms in yawning, as the hands 
outspread. 

ka ti he, v. t. to extend, to stretch 
out. 

ka ti ka, v. t. to change, or pour, 
from one vessel to another. 

ka tsi, v. to make a buffalo-sur¬ 
round. 

ka tsi. v.i., adj. to be extinguished, 
as a light or a fire; to be cooled by 
being blown on with the mouth, or 
by being taken from the fire and set 
aside to cool. 


ka tsi he, v. i. 3d pers. to cool by 
blowing, etc., to extinguish a light or 
a fire.—katsimats, I extinguish, ka- 
tsidats, you extinguish. 

ka tsu ka, adj. to be swollen and 
hardened, as a diseased joint, or a 
cicatrix on a tree. 

ka u sta, adj. small in quantity 
or number. 

ka u sta—ah" pi, n., adj./r. ka- 
usta and ahpi; a small part or por¬ 
tion, fractional. 

ka u sta de, adj. almost too few. 
ka ti sta di, adj. very few, a very 
small quantity. 

ka ii sta du i, v. i. decreasing in 
number or quantity. 

ka ii sta ke, v. t. to cause to de¬ 
crease in number or quantity,—re¬ 
duced in numbers. 

ka wic ka, adj. same as kamic¬ 
ka, and a more common pronuncia¬ 
tion than the latter. 

ka wic ki su, n. same as kamic- 
kisu. 

ka za, a diminutive of limited 
use applied to about twenty words 
of the language, 
ka zi, same as kaza. 
ke, v. t. to give away, to present, 
ke, v. t. to scratch, as in relieving 
an itchy sensation; synon. with kae, 
of which it may be a contraction. 

ke, a suffix to verbs, adjectives, 
etc., or a verb auxiliary; to make, 
to cause, to change condition, to use 
for, Where ke is suffixed, ki is 
commonly prefixed. In the sense 
of “ to use for,” it is added to nouns, 
and the words thus formed may be 
used as nouns; as, makadistake, a 
doll, from makadista, a child; midu- 
liake. a pop-gun from midufia, a gun. 


ki 


101 


kia 


ki, v. t. to bear on the back, to 
carry a heavy load. 

ki, an intensifying prefix to verbs 
denoting that the action is done 
forcibly, com pletely, frequently, 
under circumstances of difficulty, 
etc. ki often merely strengthens 
without altering the meaning — the 
intensified word requiring no sepa¬ 
rate definition; but in other cases it 
totally changes the significance. 

ki, an iuteijection, used when 
something false or absurd is heard. 

ki a a ti, v. t. fr. aati; to hit 
severely with a missile. 

ki a da du i, v. i. fr. adadui; 
becoming rapidly and exceedingly 
painful. 

ki a da ha, v. L fr. adaha; to be 
burned up, consumed by fire. 

ki a da ha ke, v. t. to cause to 
be consumed by fire, to burn up, to 
reduce to ashes. 

ki a da lia pe, v. t .fr. adahape; 
to kick severely. 

ki a da lie lie, v. t .fr. adaliehe; 
to hold securely. 

ki a da lie se, v. t .fr. adahese; 
to tear to pieces with the foot. 

ki a da ho lii, intensive form of 
adahohi. 

ki a da lipi ke, synon. with 
adahpike. 

ki a da hu e, v. t .fr. adahu; to 
overthrow completely, or by kicking 
violently. 

ki a da ka pe, v. t .fr. adakape; 
to scratch vigorously with the paws; 
said when an animal tears up the 
ground by scratching. 

ki a da ki de, v. t .fr. adakide; 
to push completely away with the 
foot. 


ki a da ki ti, v. i. fr. adakiti; 
said of a wide stretch of country, 
that has been thoroughly cleared by 
fire. 

ki a da mi di, v. t. intensive of 
adamidi. 

ki a da pa pa du i, v. i.fr. ada- 
papi; becoming rapidly and exten¬ 
sively scorched. 

ki a da pa pi, intensive of ada- 
papi. 

ki a da pa pi ke, v. t. to cause to 
be extensively scorched or chapped. 

ki a da pe, v. t. fr. adape; to 
kick angrily or repeatedly. 

ki a da su ki, v. t .fr. adasuki; 
to completely erase with the foot. 

ki a da ta pi, v. i.fr. adatapi; 
to squeeze severely under foot. 

ki a da te, v. i. intensive form of 
ad ate. 

ki a da te he, v. i.fr. adat^he; 
to kill a number by trampling, to 
kill a brood of young birds by acci¬ 
dentally stepping on them, to trample 
a number of insects to death. 

ki a da t6’ ti, v. t. fr. adato’ti; 
to shake vigorously or entirely with 
the foot. 

ki a da tsa ki, v. i.fr. adatsaki; 
to divide a thick body rapidly by 
fire. 

ki a da tska pi, v. i. intensive 
form of adatskapi. 

ki a da tsku a du i, v. i. fr. 
adatskuadui; becoming wet through¬ 
out. 

ki a da tsku i, v. i.fr. adatskui; 
entirely wet, etc. 

ki a da tsku i ke, v. t. to moisten 
thoroughly or rapidly. 

ki a de, v. fr. ade ; to pain ex¬ 
ceedingly. 


13 


kia 


102 


kia 


ki a de a du i, v. i. becoming 
very sultry. 

ki a de he, v. t. to be very angry, 
to become suddenly very angry. 

ki a de ke, v. t. to make exceed¬ 
ingly painful, etc. 

ki a de tsi, adj. to be possessed 
of admirable qualities, to be brave, 
skillful, intelligent, ingenious, endur¬ 
ing, etc., to be skilled in any particu¬ 
lar art or calling. 

kf a de tsi ke, v. t. to cause to 
be brave, enduring or skillful, to in¬ 
struct thoroughly in any art. 

kf a di a sa dsi ke, v. t./r. adi- 
asadsike; to impoverish greatly, to 
render destitute. 

ki a di i ta du i, v. t./r. adiiti; 
becoming ravenously hungry. 

ki a di 1 ti, v. intensive of adiiti. 
ki a di 1 ti ke, v. t. to starve, to 
deprive of food. 

ki a du a du i, v. i./r. aduadui; 
becoming entirely or excessive bitter. 

ki a du i, v i./r. adui; entirely 
bitter. 

ki a du i ke, v. t. to render com¬ 
pletely or exceedingly bitter or pun¬ 
gent. 

ki a hu ke, v. t. fr. ahuke; to 
multiply rapidly, to increase largely 
and rapidly, to increase every one of 
a number of objects. 

ki a ho e, v. t./r. ahoe; to con¬ 
ceal carefully or completely, to con¬ 
ceal all. 

ki a ka hpi, v. t./r. akahpi; to 
step completely over a wide space, 
to cross a chasm successfully but 
with difficulty. 

ki a ka ma he, v. t. intensive 
form of akamahe, 

ki a ka ma he ke, v. t. to di¬ 
vide completely into six equal parts. 


ki a ka ma ke, divided into six 
equal parts. 

ki a ka pe, v. t. fr. akape; to 
court assiduously. 

ki ak' de, v. t./r. akde; to seize 
and bear off, to carry to a dis¬ 
tance, to carry the entire of anything 
away. 

ki ak' hu, v. t./r. akhu; to bring 
with difficulty, or front a distance, 
to bring all. 

ki a ki ka he, v. t./r. akikahe; 
said when something is captured and 
brought from a distance; as when a 
war-party brings home a prize in 
haste and danger, but in triumph. 

ki a ki tsa, v. t. fr. akitsa; to 
miss widely, to miss at every trial. 

ki ak' si e, v. t./r. aksie; to hold 
firmly. 

ki ak' su e, v. t. fr. aksue; to 
spit on repeatedly. 

ki ak' tsi se, v. t./r. aktsisS ; to 
look long or scrutinizingly through 
a door or window. 

ki a ma ho ka, v. i./r. antahoka; 
to be far within, deep underground. 

ki a ma ho ka ke, v. t. to place 
far within, to put all in. 

ki a maki, v. i. to remain sitting 
long or steadily. 

ki a ma ki ke, v. t./r. amakike. 
ki a ma tsa ki, v. i. intens.form 
of amatsaki. 

ki a ma tsa ki ke, v. t. to soil 
entirely with earth, to soil all of a 
number of objects with earth. 

ki a pa di, v. i. fr. apadi; to 
grow vigorously. 

ki a pa di ke, v. t. to cause to 
grow vigorously, to cause all to grow. 

ki a pi ke, v. t. fr. apike; to 
place together closely or continu¬ 
ously. 


kia 


103 


kid 


ki a ta di, v. i. fr. atadi; to go 
out and remain out; said,too, when 
a number of individuals go out from 
a house. 

ki a ta di ke, v. t. to cause to go 
out, etc. 

ki a ta ki ke, v. t. fr. atakike, 
to render completely white. 

ki a ta zi ko a, v. i. intensive of 
atazikoa. 

ki a te, v. i. fr. ate; to come into 
full view T , to come suddenly into full 
view. 

ki a te he, v. t. to present imme¬ 
diately to full view. 

ki a te he ke, v. t. to cause to 
appear entirely, to exhibit all of a 
number of objects. 

ki a tska, intensive form of 
htsk&. 

ki a tska du i, v. i .fr. atskadui; 
becoming rapidly very fierce. 

ki a tska ke, v. t. to persistently 
aggravate to fierceness, 
ki da, n. a husband, 
ki da he, v. t. fr. kida and he; 
to marry; said of the woman, if the 
marriage is informal or against pa¬ 
rental consent. 

ki da he, v. same as kiduhe, 
which is more common. 

ki da he ka’ ti ke, v. t. intensive 
form of daheka’tike. 

ki da ha pe si, v. i. fr. daliapesi; 
to rise perpendicularly to a great 
height, to extend perpendicularly to 
a great length. 

ki da ha pe si ke, v. t. to cause 
to be perpendicular to a great height 
or length. 

ki da ha pi, v. t .fr. dahapi; to 
peel entirely, to strip a tree bare. 

ki da he si, v. i.fr. daliesi; torn 
to shreds with teeth. 


ki da he si ke, v. t. to cause to 
be torn to shreds with teeth. 

ki da hi se, v. t. prob.fr. ki and 
adaliise; to forget.— makid&hisets, 
I forget, dakidahisets, you forget, 
kidahisets, it is forgotten. 

ki da hi pi, v. i. intensive form 
of daliipi. 

ki da hpa, v. t. fr. dahpa; to 
embrace, to hug. 

ki da hu e, v. t. fr. daliue; to 
spill or overset completely and for¬ 
cibly. 

ki da hu pi, v. t .fr. dahupi; to 
drink or absorb a large amount com¬ 
pletely and rapidly. 

ki da ka he, v. t .fr. dakahe; to 
stretch completely out. 

ki da ka hi si, v. i.fr. dakahisi; 
to carry in the arms, to hold long in 
the arms. 

ki dak a ho hi, v. t. fr. daka- 
holii; to break completely across 
with a blow, to break something 
large, or to break a number of objects 
across with a blow. 

ki dak a ki'ti, v. t .fr. dakakiti; 
to scrape the hair entirely away. 

ki dak a mi di, v. t. fr. daka- 
midi; to turn completely by force, 
to twill tightly by sudden force. 

ki dak a mi di ke, v. t to cause 
to turn completely by sudden force. 

ki dak a mi tsi, v. t. fr. daka- 
mitsi; to mince completely, to chop 
fine all that is given to be chopped. 

ki dak a pa ki, v. i.fr. dakapa- 
ki; to bloom fully, to expand nu¬ 
merous blossoms. 

ki da ka pe, v. t. intensive form 
of dakape. 

ki da ka pi, v. t. to pick out, to 
cull, to separate; to pick grain from 
chaff, stones from coffee, etc. 


kid 


104 


kid 


ki da ka pi hi, v.fr. dakapilii; 
to float well or continuously. 

ki da ka pi hi ke, v. t. to cause 
to float continuously, to cause all to 
float. 

ki da ka ptsi, v. \.fr. dakaptsi; 
covered with nicks or tallies. 

ki da ka pu si, v. i. fr. daka- 
pusi; greatly inflated, permanently 
inflated. 

ki da ka pu si ke, v. i. to inflate 
extensively or permanently. 

ki dak' a ta, v. t .fr. dakata; to 
smash completely, to smash and re¬ 
smash. 

ki dak a ta hi, v. i. intensive 
form of dakatahi. 

ki da-ka’ ti, n .fr. kida and ka’ti; 
a first husband. 

ki dak a to’ ti, v. t. fr. daka- 
to’ti; to shake repeatedly or con- 
tinously with force suddenly applied. 

ki dak a wi di, same as kidaka- 
midi. 

ki dak a wi tsi, same as kida- 
kamitsi. 

ki da ki ti, v. i. fr. dakiti and 
nearly synonymous with it, but more 
commonly used. 

ki dak sa ki, v. t. fr. daksaki; 
to wound repeatedly or severely by 
throwing missiles. 

ki dak' si, v. t. to bundle se¬ 
curely or completely. 

ki dak si pi, v. i. inlens, form of 
daksipi. 

ki dak si pi ke, v. t. to cause to 
be much later. 

ki dak ta de, v. t. fr. daktade; 
to drive hard, to nail securely or 
completely. 

ki dak tsa da ke, v. t. synon. 
with daktsadake. 


ki dak tsa ki, v. t .fr. daktsaki; 
to chop all up, to chop into nume¬ 
rous pieces. 

ki dak tsa ti, v. t. fr. daktsati; 
to impale securely or frequently. 

ki dak tsi a, v. i. a form of dak- 
tsia. 

ki dak tsi a du i, v. i. increas¬ 
ing rapidly and greatly in weight. 

ki dak tsi a ke, v. t. intens.form 
of daktsiake. 

ki dak tsi ke, v./r. daktsike; to 
continue, remain, or follow one 
another, in single file; said of the 
motion of a flock of wild-geese, or 
of a band of antelope running away 
after their leader. 

ki dak tsu ti, v. t. fr. daktsuli; 
to braid completely. 

ki dak u di, v. t .fr. dakudi; to 
fan; a form more commonly em¬ 
ployed than dakudi. 

ki dak ti dsi, v. t. fr. dakudsi; 
to swing vigorously or continuously. 

ki dak u dsi ke, v. t. to cause 
to oscillate continuously. 

ki dak u hti, intens. form of 
dakuliti. 

ki dak u hti ke, v. t. to decrease 
greatly or rapidly in weight. 

ki da mi he ke [kinawi- 
heke,] v. t .fr. damilieke; to divide 
completely into three equal parts,— 
divided equally in three. 

ki da mi ke, same as kidami- 
heke. 

ki da mi tsi, v. t. intens. form of 
damitsi. 

ki da mo ki, v. i. to ebb away, 
to sink down, to fall as a river. 

ki da mu ke [kinawuke,]/?-. 
damuke; to deepen greatly, rapidly, 
or throughout. 




kid 


105 


kid 


ki da pe, v. t. fr. dape; to de¬ 
vour by tearing, to tear meat with 
the teeth and devour it. 

ki da psu ti, v. t. intern, form of 
dapsuti. 

ki da sa, v. t .fr. dasa; to cut ex¬ 
tensively or severely with the teeth. 

ki da si pi, v. t. fr, dasipi; to 
untie completely with the teeth. 

ki da sku, v. t .fr. dasku; to take 
out with the teeth something diffi¬ 
cult to extract. 

ki da ste, v. t. fr. daste; to com¬ 
minute completely. 

ki da’ ta d.6 sa, v. i. fr. da’ta- 
desa; to be completely inconsider¬ 
ate, etc. 

ki da’ ta de sa ke, v. t. to cause 
to be inconsiderate, etc. 

ki da’ ta lid pi, v. i .fr. da’tahepi; 
to be thoroughly lazy, or always lazy. 

ki da’ ta lie pi ke, v. t. to cause 
to be lazy. 

ki da’ ta i si a, v. i .fr. da’taisia; 
to be miserable or despondent, to be 
continually unhappy, sorry or ill- 
tempered ; said too of a number ot 
individuals who are unhappy. 

ki da’ ta i si a du i, v. i. be¬ 
coming very unhappy, miserable, etc. 

ki da’ ta i si a ke, v. t. to make 
constantly unhappy, etc. 

ki da ta pi, v. t. intern, form of 
datapi. 

ki da’ ta tsa ki, v. i. fr. da’ta- 
tsaki; to be very happy, constantly 
happy. 

ki da’ ta tsa ki ki, v. t. to ren¬ 
der very happy, to make all happy. 

ki da’ ta tso ki, v. i. intens.form 
of da’tatsoki. 

ki da’ ta tso ki ke, v. t. to ren¬ 
der very resolute, to inspire all with 
resolution. 


ki da t6’ ti, v. t. fr. dato’ti; to 
shake vigorously in the mouth, to 
worry to death by shaking in the 
mouth. 

ki da tsa, v. t .fr. 'datsa; to bite 
severely or repeatedly. 

ki da tsa ti, v. t .fr. datsati, and 
nearly or quite synonymous. 

ki da tsl pi, v. t. fr. datsipi; to 
lick repeatedly and continuously, to 
lick all over. 

ki da tska pi, v. t. intensive of 
datskapi. 

ki da tska ti, v. t. fr. datskati; 
to leak through a large orifice, to 
leak rapidly or entirely away. 

ki da tso pe, fr. datsope; to 
kiss.— makidatsope, I kiss, dakida- 
tsope, you kiss. See ikidatsope. 

ki da tsu ki, v. t. intens.form of 
datsuki. 

ki da wo ki, same as kidamoki. 
ki de, v. root; push, transfix, im¬ 
pale. 

ki d£, v. i. ? fr. de; to fly. 
ki de ak de, v. t. comp, of kide 
and akde; to fly off with, to bear off 
flying — as an eagle with its prey, 
ki de e, v. i. same as kide; to fly. 
ki de sa, v. i. intens. form of 
desa. 

ki de sa dsi, v. t fr. kidgsi and 
adsi; to like very much ; to love, but 
not dearly. 

ki de sa ke [kinesake,] v. t. 

fr. desake; to destroy, exterminate, 
banish, annul, abrogate, to cure a 
disease completely, etc. 

ki de si, v. t. to love; said of the 
affection existing between parent 
and child, husband and wife, 
ki de ta, v. t. to fancy, to admire, 
ki de ta dsi, v. t. to admire, but 
not. greatly. 


kid 


106 


kid 


ki di, v. t. ffr. di; to search for 
any person or thing, to go for game, 
to pursue, to seek, kikidi is more 
commonly used. 

ki di e, v. to mount a horse, to 
ride on horseback, 
ki di 6, v. i. to be greatly terrified, 
ki di ki, v. t. fr. diki; to strike 
repeatedly. 

ki di si, v. i. fr. disi; to dance, 
ki do pa he ke, v. t, fr. dopa- 
lieke; to divide completely into two 
equal parts,—divided equally in two. 

ki do pa ke, v. t. synon. kido- 
paheke. 

ki du e tsa pi ke, v. t. fr. due- 
tsapike; to divide into nine equal 
parts. 

ki du ha, imperat. of kiduhe; 
arise; said if the person is recum¬ 
bent, not sitting. See dulia and duhe. 

ki du he, v. t. to arise from a re¬ 
cumbent posture, to lift out of. 
ki du hi, v. i. arisen, standing, 
ki du hi ke, v. t. to cause or assist 
to arise from a recumbent posture. 

ki du ha, v. t. to spread out on 
the ground, to spread to dry, to 
spread bedding. 

ki du ha de, v. t. to rake, to clean 
thoroughly by raking. 

ki du ha de, v. t. intensive form 
of duhade. 

ki du he mi, v. i. to settle down 
— as a river, to dry up, to become 
shallow. 

ki du he se, v. t. fr. duhese; to 
tear to pieces. 

ki du hd wi, same as kiduhemi. 
ki du ho hi, \.fr. duhohi; to 
break, or be broken completely 
across. 

ki du lio hi ke, v. t. to cause to 
be completely broken. 


ki du ho ki, v. t. to comb out, 
to comb completely or thoroughly. 

ki du hpi, v. t. to take down 
something that is hanging high. 

ki du ka pi, v. t .fr. dukapi; to 
lacerate extensively or severely. 

ki du ki ti, v. t. intens. of du- 
kiti. 

ki du ku ti, v. t. pluck out ex¬ 
tensively. 

ki du ma hi ta, v. i. fr. duma- 
liita; to ride or move repeatedly and 
rapidly back and forth. 

ki du ma hi ta-ti di e, v. to 
run or ride back and forth, as is done 
when one man alone makes a war- 
signal. 

ki du mi di, v. t .fr. dumidi; to 
twill thoroughly. 

ki du mi ha [-wiha], intens. 
form of dumiha. 

ki du sa, v. t .fr. dusa; to place 
in security, to store or put away with 
care. 

ki du si pi, v. t. fr. dusipi; to 
open widely or completely. 

ki du ski, v. t .fr. duski; to open 
a door or lid widely. 

ki du su ki, v. t. fr. dusuki; to 
wash entirely or thoroughly by rub¬ 
bing. 

ki du ta, v.fr. duta; to burst vio¬ 
lently, to fly to pieces. 

ki du ta pi, v. t. fr. dutapi; to 
squeeze long and hard, 
ki du ta ti, v. t. intens. of dutati. 
ki du ti, v. t. fr. duti; to eat up, 
to devour, to eat all; said also if you 
speak of eating an animal still living, 
conveying the idea that you will both 
kill and eat. 

ki du to’ ti, v. t. fr. duto’ti; to 
cover by sprinkling, to exhaust by 
dredging or sprinkling. 


kid 


107 


kih 


ki du tsa da, v. fr. dutsada; to 
slide for or rapidly. 

ki du tsa ki, v. t .fr. dutsaki; to 
dissever completely and repeatedly. 

ki du tsa ti, fr. dutsati; to im¬ 
pale securely. 

ki du tse, v. t. fr. dutse ; to take 
off under difficulties, to take and 
hold securely. 

ki du tsi pi v. t. fr. dutsipi; to 
completely untie anything secured 
by hard and numerous knots. 

ki du tsi si, v. t. fr. dutsisi; to 
spring back, to regain suddenly and 
completely the original position 
when released from a bending pres¬ 
sure. 

ki du tsi ti, v. t. fr. dutsiti; to 
raze to the ground, to completely 
destroy a building. 

ki du tska pi, v. t .fr. dutskapi; 
to pinch severely or repeatedly. 

ki du tski si, v. t. fr. dutskisi; 
to wash thoroughly, to wash clean, 
to wash all that is given to be 
washed. 

ki du tski ti, v. t. intern, form 
of dutskiti. 

ki du tsku pi, v. t. fr. dutskupi; 
to bend in several places, to fold re¬ 
peatedly. 

ki du tsu ki, v. t .fr. dutsuki; to 
knead the abdomen long and vigor¬ 
ously. 

ki du wa hi ta, v. i. same as ki- 
dumahita. 

ki du wi di, v. t. same as kidu- 
midi. 

ki e, v. t. to fear, 
ki ha he ta, v. t. intens. o/haheta. 
ki ha hpi, v. i. fr. hahpi; to 
sneeze repeatedly. 

ki ha hpi ke, v. t. to cause to 
sneeze hard or repeatedly. 


ki ha ka’ ti ke, v. t. fr. liaka’- 
tike; to completely and suddenly 
arrest progress. 

ki ha ka tsi, v. t .fr. hakatsi; to 
butcher completely, to cut up all the 
meat killed. 

ki ha pa ke, v. t .fr. liapake; to 
render very cold, or cold through¬ 
out,— chilled, frozen. 

ki ha’ pe sa du i, v. i. intens. 
form oi ha’pesadui. 

ki ha’ pe se, v. i. fr. ha’pese; 
completely dark. 

ki ha’ pe se ke, v. t. to com¬ 
pletely exclude light. 

ki ha si si, v. i. fr. hasisi; to 
smart severely. 

ki ha si si ke, v. t. to cause to 
smart extensively or severely. 

ki ha tsi te, v. t. intens. form of 
liatsite. 

ki ha tska du i, v. i .fr. hatska- 
dui; increasing rapidly in length. 

ki ha tski ke, v. t. to lengthen 
rapidly and greatly,— greatly length¬ 
ened. 

ki hi ke, v. fr. hike; entirely 
drunk up. 

ki hi sa dsi, v. i .fr. hisadsi; to 
be completely reddish. 

ki hi sa dsi ke, v. t. to dye 
throughout of a dull red color. 

ki hi si ke, v. t fr. hisike; to dye 
red, to dye the entire of anything red. 

ki hi si sa du i, v. t. intens. of 
hisisadui. 

ki hi si si ke, v. t. to cause to 
assume a reddish hue rapidly or 
throughout. 

ki hi ta du i, v. i. fr. liitadui; 
rapidly increasing in speed. 

ki hi ta ke, v. t. fr. Intake; to 
accelerate motion greatly, to increase 
the speed of a number of objects. 



kih 


108 


ki ho’ pa du i, v. i. intern, form 
of ko’padui; more commonly used 
than the simple form. 

ki ho pa se, v. t.fr. liopase; to 
horrify, to horrify all. 

ki ho’ pi ke, v. t. fr. ho’pike; to 
riddle, to perforate in many places. 

ki hu, v. t. comp, of ki and hu; to 
come with a load, to come bearing 
on the back. 

ki hu a, y. i. fr. hua; to cough 
repeatedly or severely. 

ki hu a ke, v. t. to cause to cough 
repeatedly. 

kf ha, n. the paunch, the stomach 
or stomachs of an animal. 

ki ha a du pi da hpa, n. fr. 
kiha, adu and pidahpa; the rumen, 
or first stomach of a ruminant. 

ki ha da hi ke, v. t. fr. Rada- 
hike; to starve completely, to make 
very lean, to make a number lean. 

ki ha da hi ksa ke, v. t. inten¬ 
sive foim of hadahiksake. 

ki ha ha du i, v. i .fr. Rahadui; 
becoming completely rough. 

ki ha hi, v. i .fr. halii; to be en¬ 
tirely or completely striped. 

ki ha hi ke, v. t. to cover -with 
parallel bands,— completely striped. 

ki ha hu a ke, v. t. intensive of 
hahuake. 

ki ha ka du i, v. t. used the same 
as is hakadui, but more commonly; 
said of a healing sore, etc. 

ki ha ka he ta, v. i. intensive 
form of Rakaheta. 

ki ha ka ke, v. t.fr. Mkake; to 
render a large surface itchy. 

ki ha ku pa du i, v. i. becom¬ 
ing extensively furrowed. 

ki ha ku pi, v. i .fr. hakupi; ex¬ 
tensively furrowed, furrowed over 
the entire surface. 


kih 

ki ha ku pi ke, v. t. to mark the 
entire surface with furrows,— com¬ 
pletely furrowed. 

ki ha ma dsi ke, v. t. fr. Ra- 
madsi; to cause to appear much 
branched, to depict as very branch¬ 
ing. 

ki ha mi ke, v. t. fr. liamike; 
to make entirely diverging or scat¬ 
tering. 

ki ha pa dui, v. i .fr. Rapadui; 
wearing thin throughout, or in nu¬ 
merous places. 

ki ha pa ti, v. i. intens. of liapati. 
ki ha pa ti he, v. i. to eat to 
complete satiety. 

ki ha pa ti ksa, v. i. synon. 
with liapatiksa. 

ki ha pa ti ksa ke, v. t. to gorge, 
to glut, to feed a number of persons 
to excess. 

ki ha pi he, v. t, fr. Rapihe; to 
lose hopelessly, to lose all. 

ki ha pi ke, v. t. fr. liapike; to 
scrape or wear thin throughout. 

ki ha' pi ke, v. t. hopelessly lost, 
all lost. 

ki ha' pi ksa. See Rapiksa. 
ki ha pi ksa, synon. withRapiksa. 
ki ha pi ksa ke v. t. to scrape, 
wear or rub to thinness, the entire 
of a skin or other such article. 

ki ha ta ta ki,/r. Ratataki, and 
nearly or quite synonymous. 

ki ha ta ta ki ke, intens. form 
of Ratatakike. 

ki ha tsa, n .fr. kilia and ilsa, lit. 
They Refused the Paunch ; the Crow 
Indians. Lewis and Clark spell 
this “ kee-heet-sas,” and translate it 
Paunch Indians. — The Crows and 
Hidatsa were at one time but dif¬ 
ferent bands of one tribe; they sepa¬ 
rated probably more than a century 


kin 


109 


kii 


ago. The story accounting for the 
separation is this: During a season 
of scarcity, while portions of both 
bands were encamped together, a 
stray buffalo came into camp ; it was 
killed by some of the Hidatsa, who 
offered the paunch to the Crows. 
The latter, considering the offer illi¬ 
beral, refused it, and a misunder¬ 
standing ensued which resulted in 
separation. From this circumstance 
too, the name originated. I believe 
this story to have some foundation 
in truth, and think it may refer to 
the Hidatsa mode of butchering, 
ki ha wi ke, same as kihamikc. 
ki he mi ke, v. t. intens. of he- 
mike, but more commonly used. 

ki he mi ksa ke, v. i.fr. hemi- 
ksa; to cause to be constantly very 
lonesome or melancholy, to make a 
number lonesome. 

ki he pi, v. i. fr. hepi; entirely 
shallow. 

ki he pi ke, v. t. to make entirely 
shallow, to leave no deep part,— 
dried or drained to shallowness. 

ki he wi ke, same as kihe- 
mike. 

ki hi di a du i, v. i. fr. ftidia; 
becoming rapidly or extensively 
itchy or sensitive. 

ki hi di a ke, v. t. to cause to 
be entirely or extensively sensitive 
or itchy. 

ki hi di a ksa, v. i. denoting 
itching, constant or excessive, over 
the entire surface, or afflicting a 
number. 

ki hi di a ksa ke, v. t. to cause 
constant extensive itching, etc. 
ki hi e ke, v. t. intens. of liieke. 
ki hi pi, v. i. fr. liipi; entirely 
wrinkled. 


ki hi pi ke, v. t. to make entirely 
wrinkled. 

ki ho ka di ti, intensive (and 
common) form of hokaditi. 

ki ho pa se, v. t. fr. hopise; to 
occasion general terror. 

ki ho pa si ke, v. t. to cause ge¬ 
neral or continued alarm. 

ki ho ta ka dsi ke, v. t. fr. 
ihotakadsi; to change to a whitish 
color. 

ki ho ta ka du i, v. i .fr. iliota- 
kadui; whitening throughout. 

ki ho ta ki ke, v. t. fr. ihota- 
kike; to bleach uniformly through¬ 
out, to paint entirely white,— whit¬ 
ened, bleached, 
ki hu, num. adj. five, 
ki hu a he, v. t. to make five, 
made into five. 

ki hu a he ke, v. t. to divide 
into five parts,— divided into five 
parts. 

ki hu a ke, v. t. syn. with kiftu- 
aheke. 

ki ic ti a, v. i.fr. ictia; {intensive 
form). 

ki ic ti a du i, v. i. increasing 
rapidly, greatly. 

ki ic ti a ke, v. t. to cause to be 
enlarged greatly or throughout, to 
increase several objects. 

ki i da mi ke [-nawi-], v. i.fr. 
idamike, and of similar meaning. 

ki i di a hi, v. i. fr. idialii; to 
sigh repeatedly. 

ki i di pa du i, v. i .fr. idipadui, 
and used synonymously. 

ki i di pi, v. i. intensive form of 
idipi. 

ki i di pi ke, v. i.fr. idipike; to 
fatten rapidly, to fatten a number. 

ki i di pi ksa ke, v. t. to make 
obese. 


14 


kii 


110 


kii 


ki i di tsi i si a ke, v. t. See 

iditsiisiake. 

ki i di tsi ke, v. t. intern, of idi- 
tsike; nearly or quite similar in 
meaning to the simple form. 

ki i di tsi tsa ki ke, v. t. See 
iditsitsakike. 

ki i do pa du ke, v. t. fr. idopa- 
duke; to change to the second order 
or position, to change from some 
other position and place second. 

ki i do pa ke, v. t to make se¬ 
cond, to change to second. 

ki i ha ke, v, t. fr. ihake; to 
make entirely different, to change 
all attributes. 

ki i ha tsa ki, v. i. fr. ihatsaki; 
stained extensively with dirt. 

ki i ha tsa ki ke, v. t. to stain 
completely or extensively with dirt. 

ki i ho a de, v. i. fr. ilioade; to 
be severely sick; said too, of a num¬ 
ber suffering from an epidemic. 

ki i ho a de ke, v. t. to make 
sick,— sickened. 

ki i ko ki, v. t .fr. ikoki; to hang 
up high or securely. 

ki i ku pa, v. t. fr. ikupa; to 
accompany closely or continually. 

ki i ku’ pa, v. t. intensive form 
of iku’pa. 

ki i ku’ pa dsi, v. t. interns, of 
iku’padsi. 

ki i ku’ pa dsi ke, v. t. to cause 
to dislike. 

ki i ku’ pa ke, v. t, to cause to 
hate. 

ki l ma hpi, v. i .fr. imalipi; set 
completely. 

ki 1 mi a, v. i. fr. imia; to cry 
long or frequently, to mourn by cry¬ 
ing. 

ki l mi a ke, v. t. to cause to cry 
long, etc. 


ki l psa ki, v. t. fr. ipsaki; to 
conceal or screen completely, 
ki i si a, v. i. intens. form <?/isia. 
ki i si a du i, v. i. deteriorating 
greatly. 

ki i si a du i ke, v. t. to cause 
a rapid progressive deterioration. 

ki i si a ke, v. t. to make bad, 
to change from good to bad,—greatly 
damaged, all damaged, the entire lot 
damaged. 

ki i to di ke, inlens, of itodike. 

ki i to pa du ke, ) v. t.to place 
ki i to pa ke, j fourth, to 
cause to be fourth. 

ki i tsi i ke, v. t. fr. itsiike; to 
strengthen completely. 

ki l tsi ka ke, v. t. fr. itsika; to 
cause to be first, placed first. 

ki i tsi tsi, v. i. intens. of itsitsi; 
gleaming continuously. 

ki i tsi tsi ke, v. t. to cause to 
gleam. 

ki i tski ke, v. t. fr. itski; to 
make large enough. 

ki i tu di, v. i. fr. itudi; suppu¬ 
rating extensively ; said of large or 
numerous abscesses. 

ki i tu di ke, v. t. to cause ex¬ 
tensive suppuration. 

ki ka da mi, v. t .fr. kadami; to 
remember after having long forgot¬ 
ten, to remember completely. 

ki ka da tsi ke, v. t. fr. kada- 
tsi; to cause to be willing. 

ki ka de, v. t. intens , tf/'kade; to 
vomit all up. 

ki ka de ke, v. t. to cause to 
vomit. 

ki ka di, v. t. fr. kadi; to beg 
repeatedly, to importune, to beg all 
away. 

ki ka di sta, v. i. intensive of ka- 
diSta. 


kik 


111 


kim 


ki ka di sta du i, v. i. dwindling 
rapidly. 

ki ka di sta ke, v. t. synon. 
with kadistake, and more commonly 
used. 

ki ka di tska, v. i. fr. kaditska; 
to glisten continuously or over an 
extensive surface. 

ki ka di tska ke, v. t. to cause 
to glisten,— made to glisten. 

ki ka di tska pa, v. i.fr. kadi- 
tskapa; to adhere firmly over a large 
surface. 

ki ka di'tska pa ke, v. t. to 

cause to adhere, etc. 
ki ka dse, intensive of kadse. 
ki ka ke’ ki, v. i. fr. kake’ki; 
to make a continuous rattling noise. 

ki ka ki, v. t. to sew, to join by 
sewing. 

ki ka ki ha du i, v. i.fr. kakihi; 
assuming a circular form. 

ki ka ki hi ke, v. t. to cause to 
be entirely or permanently circular. 

ki ka ta ki, v. t. to turn com¬ 
pletely inside out. 
ki ka ti he, v. t. intens. of katihe. 
ki ka ti ke, v. t. fr. katike; to 
pour all from one vessel to another, 
to empty one vessel into another or 
others. 

ki ka tsi, v. i. fr. katsi; com¬ 
pletely cooled ; said too, of a number 
of objects which have been cooled or 
extinguished. 

ki ka tsi ke, v. t. to cool com¬ 
pletely, to cool a number. 

ki ka tsu ka, v. i. intens. of ka* 
tsuka. 

ki ka tsu ka ke, v. t. to cause 
to be swelled and hardened. 

ki ka u sta du i, v. i. fr. kau- 
stadui; decreasing greatly and rap¬ 
idly in number or quantity. 


ki ka u sta ke, nearly syony- 
mous with kaustake, but more com¬ 
monly used. 

ki kd, v. t .fr. ke; to scratch back 
and forth, to scratch repeatedly or 
severely. 

ki ki di, v. t. kidi; to hunt, to 
seek and pursue. 

ki ki hit a he ke, v. i.fr. kiliua- 
lieke; to divide completely into five 
equal parts,— divided into five. 

ki ki hu a ke, v. t. to cause to 
be divided into five parts,— divided 
by five. 

ki ki ski, v. t. to determine 
quantity or quality in any way, to 
taste, measure or gauge with a view 
to determining quality or quantity, 
to sound a person’s feelings or opin¬ 
ions. 

ki ko mi [wi], synon. withkomi. 
ki ko mi he, v. t. fr. komilie; to 
complete or finish perfectly, to finish 
all. 

ki ko mi ke, V. t. to cause to be 
concluded, terminated or exhaust¬ 
ed,— concluded, finished, etc. 
ki k6 wi he, same as kikomiho. 
ki ko wi ke, same as kikomike. 
ki ksa, imperative of kikse. 
ki kse, v. t. to arrange, to repair, 
to mend, to “ fix.’’ 

ki ku, v. i.fr. ku; to give back, 
to .restore. 

ki ku a, v. t. to listen, to hear, to 
pay attention to. 

ki ku ha, v. t. to send for a per¬ 
son, to invite. 

ki ma a zi, v. i .fr. maazi; to be 
full to overflowing, to be all full— 
if a number of vessels are referred 
to. 

ki ma a zi ke, v. t. to cause to 
be filled. 


kim 


112 


kip 


ki ma di he, v. t.fr. madihe; to 
cook all the food on hand, to com¬ 
plete the cooking. 

ki ma du ha pa ke, v. t.fr. ma- 
duliapake; to set beastl} r drunk, to 
set all drunk. 

ki ma du hta du i, v. i. fr. ma- 
dulitadui; becoming very foolish. 

ki ma du hta ke, v. t. to make 
quite foolish. 

ki mak i ma ka da ha ti di e", 

v. i. synonymous with makimakada- 
hatidie, but more commonly used. 

ki mak se sa du i, v. i. used in 
nearly or quite the same sense as 
maksesadui. 

ki mak se se ke, v. t. fr. mak- 
seseke; to cause two things to re¬ 
semble each other in every respect, 
to cause several things to resemble 
one another. 

ki mak si a ka, v. i. fr. mak- 
siaka; to be of the same size in all 
dimensions. 

ki mak si a ka ke, v. t. to cause 
two or more things to be of the same 
size in all their dimensions. 

ki ma ku ke, v. t. intensive of 
makuke, and more commonly used. 

ki me [-we], v. t. to tell, to relate, 
to disclose a secret. 

ki mi a ti ke, v. t. synon. with 
miatike. 

ki mi de di, v. t.fr. midedi; to 
come in and sit down, to pay a long 
visit, to visit frequently. 

ki mi di ke, v. t.fr. midike; to 
liquefy completely. 

ki mi du e, v. i. fr. midue; to 
boil vigorously. . 

ki mi du e ke, v. t. syn. with 
midueke. 

ki 6 da pi, v. t.fr. odapi; to find 
all, to make a complete discovery. 


ki 6 hi, v. t. intensive of ohi. 
ki 6 hi ke, v. t. to cause to be 
attached, to treat with kindness and 
foster attachment. 

ki 6 ha ta du i, v. i. fr. oliata- 
dui; becoming white throughout. 

ki 6 ha ti, v. i. fr. ohati; to be 
entirely white or pale. 

ki 6 ha ti ke, v. t. to render en¬ 
tirely pale. 

ki 6 ka ta, v. t.fr. okata; to put 
all on, to dress completely. 

ki 6 ki, v. t. fr. old; to hold 
firmly, to hold all. 

ki 6 ti, v. t.fr. oti; to be cooked 
or ripened throughout, all ripened. 

ki 6 ti ke, v. t. to cause to be 
entirely ripened. 

ki 6 tsha mi [-wi], v. i. inten¬ 
sive of otsliami. 

ki 6 ze, v. t.fr. oze; to plant all 
the seed or all of a field, to finish 
planting. 

ki pa, v. t.fr. pa; to powder or 
grind completely. 

ki pa do pa du i, v. i. fr. pado- 
padui; becoming rapidly low in 
stature. 

ki pa do pi ke, v. t. to shorten 
in stature. 

ki pa du i ke, v. t.fr. paduike: 
to diminish in length,— shortened. 

ki pa hi, v. i. fr. pahi; to sing 
loudly or continuously, to singa song. 

ki pa ha du i, v. i .fr. pahadui; 
becoming extensively chafed. 

ki pa htu e, v. t. to scratch or 
rub with the finger-tips or knuckles, 
to rub the hair loose with the fingers, 
to rub the eyes in sleepiness. 

ki pa hu e, v. t. fr. paliue; to 
spill all out, to empty. 

ki pa ka de, v. t.fr. pakade; to 
impale in numerous places. 


kip 


113 


kis 


ki pa ka pi, v. \.fr. pakapi; to 
be torn extensively or severely. 

ki pa ki di, v. t. fr. pakidi; to 
push hard, to shove completely away. 

ki pa ki si, v. t. fr. pakisi; to 
rub back and forth as in scouring, 
or as in drying with a towel, to dry 
by rubbing. 

ki pa ml tsi [-wi-], v. t. fr. 
pamitsi; to cut all up finely. 

ki pa mu dsi [-wu-], v. t .fr. pa- 
mudsi; to roll up completely, to 
make an entire piece into a roll. 

ki pa sa ki, v. t. fr. pasaki; to 
engirdle completely, to put on a belt 
outside of the robe and all the cloth¬ 
ing. 

ki pa sku, v. t. fr. pasku; to 
shove completely through. 

ki pa ta ki, v. t. fr. pataki; to 
shut as a door or a box-lid, to close 
up as a book, etc.— mide kipatak, 
shut the door. 

ki pa te, v. t. fr. pate; to turn 
completely over. 

ki pa ti, v. i. fr. pati; to fall from 
a great height. 

ki pa ti he, v. t. to throw down 
from a great height. 

ki pa ti ke, v. t. to cause to fall 
from a great height; to shoot a bird 
sitting in a tree-top, and thereby cause 
it to fall to the ground. 

ki pa to’ ti, v. t. fr. pato’ti; to 
shake repeatedly or vigorously. 

ki pa tsa ti, v. t. fr. patsati; to 
puncture repeatedly. 

ki pa tsku pi, v. t .fr. patskupi; 
to fold several times, to fold into a 
small bundle. 

ki pa tsku pi ke, v. t. to cause 
to fold up. 

ki pe, v. t .fr. pe; to swallow all, 
to devour completely. 


ki pe', v. t. fr. pe; to triturate 
finely; same as kipa. 

ki phu ti, v. t. fr. phuti; to 
squeeze completely out, to protrude 
by squeezing or pressing, to eject 
metallic cartridges. 

ki pi, v. t .fr. pi; to deck or tat¬ 
too the body extensively. 

ki pi di a ke, v. t. fr. pidia ; to 
flute orrulfle, toornament with ruffles, 
ki pkl di, v. t. intens. of pakidi. 
ki pkl' ti, v. t .fr. pkiti; to iron 
clothes, to smooth completely out. 

ki po a du i, v. t .fr. poadui; to 
make completely globular. 

ki po pi, v. i. worn out, as old 
clothing. 

kipsuki, v. i./r. psuki; to belch, 
to belch repeatedly; much less used 
than the simple form. 

ki psu ti, v. t. psuti; to dislocate, 
to put out of joint. 

ki ptsu ti, v. t. fr. ptsuti; to 
thrust forward.— desi [nesi] kiptsuti, 
to stick out the tongue. 

ki pu a du i, v. i. fr. puadui; 
becoming rapidly or extensively 
swollen. 

ki pu a ke, v. t. fr. puake; to 
cause to be greatly or extensively 
swollen. 

ki pu dsi, v. t .fr. pudsi; to mark, 
sew, or wrap, extensively or com¬ 
pletely. 

ki pu dsi ke, v. t. to cause to be 
finely marked or wrapped. 

ki pu hi, v. i. intensive of pulii; 
to foam. 

ki pu hi ke, v. t. to cause to foam 
greatly, to cover with foam. 

ki pu zi ke, v. t. /r.puzike; to 
cover with spots or figures. 

ki sa pu a he ke, v. t. fr. sapua- 
heke; to divide into seven equal parts. 


kis 


114 


kit 


ki sa pu ake, divided into seven 
parts. 

ki sa su ki ke, v. t. to cause to 
be completely dull,— dulled through¬ 
out. 

ki si di ke, v. t. fr. sidike; to ren¬ 
der tawny, to smoke a skin until it 
assumes a tawny hue. 
ki si di si, v. i. intens. of sidisi. 
ki si di si ke, v. t. to cause to 
hasten. 

ki si ki a ke, v. t. fr. sikia; to 
cause to curl or tangle,— tangled, 
ki si ki he, v. t. intensive of sikihe. 
ki si pi sa dsi ke, v. t. to dye 
blackish. 

ki si pi sa du i, v. i. darkening 
throughout. 

ki si pi sa ke, v. t. fr. sipisake, 
to dye black uniformly throughout. 

ki ski, v. t. syn. with kikiski, but 
rarely used. 

ki so ki ke, v. t. fr. soki; to 
widen, to make broad or blunt. 

ki su a du i, v. i. fr. sua; de¬ 
creasing in speed. 

ki su a ke, v. t. to cause to be 
slow, to change from a rapid to a 
slow motion. 

ki ta, intensive of ta; killed, 
ki ta di, v. t. fr. tadi; to cross 
completely, as when a large party 
with all its effects crosses a stream. 

ki ta he, v. t. fr. talie; to mur¬ 
der, to slaughter. 

ki ta mu e, v. t. fr. tamue; to 
ring long and loudly. 

ki ta mu hi ke, v. t .fr. tamufti; 
to cause to be minute, to change from 
coarse to fine. 

ki ta tsa du i, v. i .fr. tatsadui; 
thickening throughout. 

ki ta tsi ke, v. t. to make thick 
in every part, to thicken all. 


ki te, Vi i .fr. te; to be all dead; 
said if a number of individuals are 
referred to. 

ki te, v. root; clear off, make 
smooth, (shave, pluck, etc.), 
ki ti, v. root; same as kite, 
ki ti di e, v. i. fr. tidie; to run 
far or long, to run away. 

ki ti di e ke, v. t. to cause to run 
far. 

ki ti pi a tsa ki, v. i. fr. tipia- 
tsaki; completely soiled with mud. 

ki ti pi a tsa ki ke, v. t. to soil 
completely with mud. 

ki ti sa ke, v. t. fr. tisa; to cause 
to be distant, to remove far away. 

ki ti tsa du i, v. i. fr. titsadui; 
thickening rapidly or along the entire 
length. 

ki ti tsi ke, v. i. fr. titsike; to 
thicken throughout. 

ki to ha dsa du i, v. i .fr. toha* 
dsadui; becoming bluish throughout. 

ki to ha dsi ke, v. t .fr. tohadsi- 
ke; to dye or color bluish throughout . 

ki to ha du i, v. i. assuming a 
pure blue color throughout. 

ki to hi ke, v. t. fr. tohike; to 
dye or color all a pure blue. 

ki to hi si ke, v. t. intensive of 
tohisike. 

ki to pa he, v. t. fr. topahe; to 
divide into four completely. 

ki to pa he ke, v. t. fr. topa- 
heke ; to divide completely into four 
equal parts.— divided into four equal 
parts. 

ki to pa ke, v. t. syn. with kito- 
paheke. 

ki tsa da ke, v. t. intens. of tsa- 
dake. 

ki tsa da tsa ki ke, v. t. fr. 
tsadatsakike; to soil all over with 
grease. 


kit 


115 


k6h 


ki tsa ka dsi ke, v. t./r. tsaka- 
dsi; to improve all moderately. 

ki tsa k: ke, v. t./r. tsakike; to 
completely cure, improve or mend,— 
mended, restored, perfected. 

ki tsa me a te, v. i./r. tsameate; 
to perspire freely, or from the whole 
surface. 

ki tsa me he, v. t./r. tsamehe; 
to heat thoroughly. 

ki tsa me ke, heated throughout, 
changed from very cold to very hot. 

ki tsa mu tsa du i, v. i. straight¬ 
ening along the entire length. 

ki tsa mu tsi ke, v. t./r. tsamu- 
tsike; to straighten completely. 

ki tsa ti ke, v. t. /r. tsati; to 
render smooth and glossy, to oil, 
polish, or varnish. 

ki tsa tsu ki ke, v. t./r. tsatsu- 
kike; to render completely hard by 
drying, baking, or otherwise, 
ki tsi da dsi ke, v. t. /r. tsidadsi; 
to dye of a color allied to yellow. 

ki tsi da du i, v. i. becoming 
yellow throughout. 

kitsi dx e ke, v. t./r. tsidie; to 
cause to be cold,— reduced in tem¬ 
perature. 

ki tsi di ke, y. t. fr. tsidike; 
dyed all yellow. 

ki tsi ko a, v. i. fr. tsikoa; thor¬ 
oughly sweet. 

ki tsi ko a du i, v. i. becomiug 
sweet throughout. 

ki tsi ko a ke, v. t. to make en¬ 
tirely or thoroughly sweet. 

ki tsi pi, v. i. fr. tsipi; to sink 
entirely, to be lost completely in the 
water. 

ki tsi pi ke, v. t. fr. tsipike; to 
cause to sink totally. 

ki tsi pi ti, v. i. intensive form of 
tsipiti. 


ki tsi pi ti ke, v, t. to place the 
whole in a condition to sink, to upset 
all on the water. 

ki tso ka du i, v. i./r. tsokadui; 
becoming entirely hard, 
ki tso ki, v. i. intensive of tsoki. 
ki tso ki ke, v. t. to make en¬ 
tirely or permanently hard. 

ki tsu tsu ki, v. i./r. tsutsulii; 
to make a continuous rattling or 
stamping noise. 

ki tsu tsu ti, v. i./r. tsutsuti; to 
be entirely smooth, uniformly soft. 

ki tsu tsu ti ke, v. t. to make 
entirely or uniformly smooth. 

ki u a, v. t. fr. ua; to envy con¬ 
tinually or maliciously, 
ki u a he, v. t. intensive of ualie. 
ki u a hpi, v. t. fr. ualipi; to 
smash to pieces by shooting. 

ki u a ti, v. t. fr. uati; to ridicule 
continuously or severely. 

ki u dsa du i, v. i. fr. udsadui ; 
becoming uniformly dry. 

ki u dsi, v. i./r. udsi; to be dried 
completely. 

ki u dsi ke, v. t. to dry com¬ 
pletely. 

ki u zi a, v. t. intensive of uzia. 

ki we, v. t. to tell; same as 
kime, 

koa, prep, at,in; suffixed to nouns 
to form adverbs. 

ko e, v. i. to leave, depart, go 
from.— makoemits, I will leave — a 
common equivalent for good bye. 
ko ha ti, n. corn, maize, 
ko ha ti a, n. a corn-stalk, the 
stalk or the entire plant. 

ko ha ti i si, n. fr. koliati and 
isi; a bag for containing corn. Caches 
are sometimes called kokatiisi. 

ko ha ti-ma ki di" si, n. the 

corn-dance. 


koh 


116 


1 


ko ha ti pi, n. coarse corn- 
meal, such as is made in a wooden 
mortar. 

ko ha ti ta pa, n. (tapa soft); 
flour. 

ko ka, v. t. to cease to act, to stop, 
to discontinue; commonly used im¬ 
peratively.— kokats, it is done. 

ko mi, v. i. to be finished, ex¬ 
hausted, expended or completed. 

ko mi he, v. t. to finish, to ex¬ 
haust, to complete. 

ko wi, a common pronunciation 
of komi. 

ko'wi he, same as komihe. 
ko zi, v. i. to make a whistling 
sound. 

ksa, an adverbial suffix, denoting 
that an action or quality is constant, 
habitual, or excessive. See 161 
and 227. 

kta de, v. t. to secure or join with 
nails or rivets. 

ku, v. t. to give, to present, 
ku, demonst. pronoun, referring 
to something pointed out, obvious or 
previously described ; that, that one. 
Most of the following words begin¬ 
ning with ‘ku’ are more or less di¬ 
rectly derived from this pronoun. 

ku a, adv. in that way or place, 
just so. 

ku a du, ad y.fr. ku and adu; in 
that very place, right there, 
ku a ru, same as kuadu. 


ku i sa, adj., ad y.fr. ku and isa ; 
like that, just like that. 

ku i sa dsi, adj., adv. fr. kuisa 
and adsi; much like that, resembling 
that closely. 

ku i sa dsi ke, v. t. to cause to 
resemble, imperfectly, something pre¬ 
viously mentioned or pointed out. 

ku i sa ke, v. t. fr. kuisa; to cause 
to resemble something previously 
demonstrated or defined. 

ku phe da, adv. opposite or fac¬ 
ing something previously named or 
pointed out. 

ku pi, v. i., adj. to smell like, to 
have the same odor as something 
previously mentioned and compared. 

ku ta, adv./?’. ku and ta; thereat, 
therein. 

ku ta pa, interrog. pron. or sen¬ 
tence,/?'. ku and tapa; what is that, 
what is the nature of the thing named 
or pointed out. 

ku ti, adj. dirty, seedy, shabby ; 
said of old clothes, etc. 

kuts, v. here, take it. This word 
is perhaps a form of the verb ku, 
and may mean “ it is given to you; ” 
hut is used when commanding a 
person to accept something offered. 

ku tsa ki, pron. (?) fr. ku and 
tsaki; that one alone, that by itself. 

ku tski, v. i. to be like, to accord; 
to be measured, regulated or shaped 
according to a standard or pattern. 


1 . 

1. Words heard to begin with the sound of 1, may be found under d. 
See 6, 20 and 22. 


m 


117 


maa 


m. 

m, a common contracted form of 
the simple personal pronouns of the 
first person. See pars. 104 and 111. 

ma, pers. pron., 1st pers. sing, and 
plur., simple, incorporated, nomina¬ 
tive and possessive; I, we, my, our. 
See pars. 58, 80 and from 104 to 107. 
inch 

ma, a prefix to verbs of all classes 
forming nouns, a prefix to nouns 
slightly limiting their meanings; to 
be carefully distinguished, from the 
pronoun ‘ ma’ which is often used as 
the first syllable of a word. See 
pars. 53 to 56 inch 
ma’, n. snow. 

ma a, n. fr. a; the entire plant, 
the body or chief portion of a plant 
or tree as distinguished from any of 
its parts. 

ma a da Ha, n .fr. adaRa; coffee 
in the grain, parched coffee; but not 
the infusion or decoction. See midi- 
sipisa. 

ma a da Hpi, n. fr. adaRpi; a 
single part or portion. 

ma a da l du ti, synon. with ada- 
iduti. 

ma a da i ki du Ho ki, n. fr. 
ada and ikiduhoki; a comb. 

ma a de, n. fr. ade; a warm sea¬ 
son, a sultry time. 

ma a du a da pa pi, n .fr. ada- 
papi; a scorched or sunburnt spot. 

ma a du Hi da", n .fr. aduhida; 
anything new or recently made, an 
unworn garment. 

maa du Ho’ pi, same as aduhopi. 
ma a du Ha ku pi. n .fr. aduRa- 
kupi; a crease or groove in anything. 

15 


ma a du Ha pi, n. fr. aduRapi; 
a bed, any one’s bed; commonly 
applied to a permanent bed with 
bedstead. 

ma a du He pi, n, fr. aduhepi; 
a shallow spot. 

ma a du i da ki sa, n .fr. adui- 
dakisa ; a left-handed person. 

maadui di tsi,u.//\ aduiditsi; 
a particular odor. 

ma a du i di tsi i si" a. See 
aduiditsiisia. 

ma a du i di tsi tsa" ki. See 
aduidilsitsaki. 

ma a du i si a, n .fr. aduisia; 
a worthless person, an inferior 
thing. 

ma a du i ti pe, n. a fall-trap, 
ma a du ki a de tsi, fr. adukf- 
adetsi; a brave man. 

ma a du ki du sa, n .fr. aduki- 
dusa; a place where anything may 
be stored; or where only certain 
things are stored, which it is not nec¬ 
essary to specify. 

ma a du 6 ki pa di, n. fr. oki- 
padi; a scion, a sapling 
ma a Hi du Ha, n. large beads — 
such as are used in necklaces, a neck¬ 
lace of such beads. 

ma a ka ka si, n .fr. akakasi; a 
writing, an inscription. 

ma a ku ki kse, n .fr. akukikse; 
one who arranges or mends some¬ 
thing understood or not specified. 

ma a ku ma di He, n. fr. aku- 
madihe; a cook, one who cooks any¬ 
thing. 

ma a pi, n. a necklace, 
ma a po ksa, n. a house-fly. 


maa 


118 


mae 


ma a pu zi, n. fr. puzi; a meat¬ 
fly- 

ma a sa di, n. fr. asadi; a stolen 
article, a theft. 

ma a tsi, n. lit. yellow tree; 
pine. 

ma a zi, v. i. to be full, 
ma a zi he, v. t. to fill full, 
ma a zi ke, v. t. to cause to be 
full,— filled. 

ma bu a, same as mamua. 
ma da [-ra], n. winter, a year, 
ma da da ka, n. fr. rnada and 
daka; snow-bird, Lapland bunting. 

ma da du [-ru], adv. fr. mada; 
during the winter. 

ma da duk [-ruk], adv. fr. 
mada; next winter, during next 
winter. 

ma da ha pi, u. bread, 
ma da ha pi ho’ pi, n .fr. ho’pi; 
light bread. 

ma da ha pi-i ki da ka pu si, 

n. saleratus or other leavening ma¬ 
terial. 

madahapitso"ki,n./r. tsoki; 
hard-bread, crackers. 

ma da ka pi hi, n. fr. dhkapilii; 
a flag, a banner. 

ma da ki, v. to paint, to draw, to 
ornament with drawings. 

ma da ko e [malakoe, bala- 
koe, barakoe], n. fr. dakoe or 
idakoe; my friend, my comrade, 
ma da se du, n., adv. fr. mada 
nd sedu; last winter, during last 
w inter. 

ma da ski he [-la-], n. unripe 
corn prepared for keeping. 

ma da’ ti, n. my brother-in-law. 
See ida’ti. 

ma di, adj. cooked, 
ma di di, n. meat dried in broad 
thin layers. 


ma di e [badiets], v. 1. 1 think, 
I suppose, I believe. See idie. 

ma di he, v. t. to cook, to prepare 
food. 

ma di si, n. fr. disi; a dance; 
syn. with makidisi. 

ma di si, u. my son. See idisi. 
ma do ha, n. gypsum. These 
Indians burn gypsum and use it as 
a pigment. 

ma do ka, n. an elk. 
ma do ka o da" hpi, n. an elk- 
skin. 

ma do ti ka de, n. a swelling 
on a plant caused by an insect lay¬ 
ing its egg. 

ma du ha pa, adj. crazy,insane, 
drunk. 

ma du ha pa dsi, adj. appearing 
as if drunk, acting crazily. 

ma du ha pa du i, v. i. becom¬ 
ing drunk. 

ma du ha pa ke, v. t. to cause 
to be crazy, to set drunk, 
ma du hi, n. ice. 
ma du hta, n. a foolish or silly 
person, a fool, a harlot, 
ma du hta, adj. foolish, silly, 
ma du hta du i, n. becoming 
foolish. 

ma du hta ke, v. t. to cause to 
be foolish. 

ma du ska pa, n. Grindelia 
squarrhosa. 

ma du ska pi, n. urethritis, 
ma du ti [maruti], n. fr. duti; 
food, particularly solid food. 

ma du" ti a du ki du sa, n. a 
place for storing food. 

ma du ti ki di ti, v. i. to be 
surfeited, to be sick from eating. 

mae, n . fr. e; private property, 
anything retained in possession. See 
itamae. 


mae 


119 


mai 


ma e pa ka, n. fr. maepe and 
aka; the club or pestle used with the 
wooden mortar for grinding corn, 
meat, etc.; more commonly pro¬ 
nounced mfcpaka. 

ma e pe, n. fr. §pe; a wooden 
mortar used by these Indians for 
pounding corn, dried meat and other 
articles of food. 

ma 6 tsi [baetsi], n. a knife, 
ma 6 tsi-a du ki da ki ti, 
n. a pocket-knife. 

maetsiazis,n. SeeLoealNames, 
ma e tsi ha" tski, n. lit. Long 
Knives; synon. with maetsiictia, 
which is the more common expres¬ 
sion. 

ma 6 tsi ic ti" a, n. lit. Big 
Knives; the inhabitants of the United 
States. This word is probably trans¬ 
lated. from the language of some tribe 
further east. 

ma 6 tsi i si, n. fr. mactsi and 
isi; a knife-case. 

ma ha. n. a swamp, 
ma ha ka ki ski, n. meat cut in 
long strips and dried. 

ma he, v. t. See maihe. 
ma hi si, n. fr. liisi; the bull- 
berry or buffalo-berry. 

ma hi si a, n. the bull-berry tree, 
Shepherdia argentea . 

ma ho pa, n. same as mahupa, 
■which is more common. 

ma ho pa, fr. hopa; medicine, 
a charm, a spell. 

ma ho pa mi a, n. same as ma- 
hopamiis. 

ma ho pa mi a i ta ma" tsu, 

n. (matsu, cherry); the fruit of the 
Virginia creeper. See dokidaliita- 
matsu. 

ma ho pa mi a i ta ma" tsu a, 

n. the Virginia creeper. 


ma ho pa mi is [-wiis], n. a 

fabulous old woman (some think 
there are more than one), who dwells 
in the w’oods and delights in doing 
evil. She is supposed to strangle 
such children as, through parental 
ignorance or carelessness, are smoth¬ 
ered in bed. 

ma hu pa, n. the stem or handle 
of anything, a corn-cob. 

ma ha ha, n. fr. hah a; Cynoglos- 
sum Morrisouii. 

ma ha ka, n. fr. haka; small¬ 
pox, 

ma ho. n. fr. ho or iho; my body, 
ma ho ki, v. t. I row. See da- 
hoki. 

ma hu a ha, n. fr. ihuaha; my 
knee. 

ma hu hi sa, n. tree-willow, 

Salix Ivcida. 

ma i a ka ka si, n. fr. akakasi; 
a pen or pencil. 

ma i a pa ti, n. same as iapati. 
ma ie ti a, n. fr. ictia; a boy or 
girl nearly, or quite full grown; said 
in contradistinction to makadista. 

ma i dak tsa da ke, n. fr. dak- 
tsadake; skates. 

ma i dak u dsi, n. fr. dakudsi; 
a swing, a swinging cradle. 

ma i di ke di ksa, n. straps or 
bands for supporting the leggings, 
garters. 

ma i di tsi, n .fr. iditsi; material 
for scenting. 

ma l du tsa da n. fr. dutsada; 
a sled. 

ma i du tsi, n. synon. w T ith idutsi; 
a fork of any description. 

ma i du tska pi, n. fr. dutskapi; 
a pincers, a clothes-pin. In the lat¬ 
ter sense maituhi-idutskapi is pre¬ 
ferable. 


mai 


120 


mai 


ma i du tsku pi, n. See mua- 
idutskupi. 

ma i ha n. fr. ilia; an enemy, an 
inimical tribe. 

ma i ha di n .fr, ihadi; food set 
out, a meal, a feast. 

mai ha hpi, n. fr. liahpi; an 
errliine, a plant obtained by these 
Indians on the prairies, powdered 
and used as snuff in cases of catarrh; 
name recently applied to snuff. 

ma i ha mi a, n. fr. maiha and 
mia; a member of the Enemy-woman 
Band. 

ma i ha mi a ic ke, n. the 
Enemy-woman Band, one of the or¬ 
ders or degrees among the Hidatsa 
women. 

ma i he, v. t. to try, to en¬ 
deavor,— mailie, he tries, madahe, 
you try. mamahe [wawahets], I try. 
Possibly malie is the true radical 
form, but it is never heard. See note 
p. 40 and 1" 196. 

ma i hu [ba—, wa-], to trade, 
to buy. See 196. 

ma 1' ha ka, n. fr. haka — allud¬ 
ing to effects upon the skin; poison 
vines, Rhus toxicodendron and Rhus 
radicans. 

ma i ka di tska pa, n. fr. kadi- 
tskapa; adhesive material, paste, 
mucilage. 

ma l ka ti pe, n. fr. ikatipe; a 
button of any kind. 

ma l ki da ku di, n. fr. kida- 
kudi; a fan. The Hidatsa commonly 
make fans from wings of birds. 

ma l ki da ku dsi, n. fr. kida- 
kudsi; same as maidakudsi. 

ma l ki di ki. See makidiki, 
which is more commonly used. 

ma l ki du ha di, u. fr. kahi¬ 
li ad i ; a rake. 


ma i ki du ho ki, n. synon. with 
maadaikidulioki. 

ma i ki ka, n. fr. ika; glass, 
a window. 

ma l ki ka ki, n. fr. kikaki; 
thread. 

ma l ki ki ski, n. fr. kikiski; a 
weight, a measuring vessel, 
ma i ki ku, n. a spring-trap, 
ma l ki pa ki si, n. fr. kipakisi; 
a cloth for wiping or rubbing, a 
towel 

ma i ki pa saki, n. fr. kipasaki; 
a belt worn outside of all the cloth¬ 
ing, around the robe or blanket. 

ma l ki pki ti, n. fr. kipkiti; a 
sad-iron. 

ma l ki tsa ti ke, n. fr. kitsa- 
tike; any material used in polishing. 

ma l ki tso ki, n. fr. kitsoki: 
material used to render anything 
hard, as starch. 

ma l kta de, n. a nail, peg or 
spike, anything driven in for the 
purpose of securing. 

ma i ku tski, n. fr. ikutski; any¬ 
thing copied or taken from some 
model, or used as a model; a pattern 
for a garment, a model of an instru¬ 
ment or utensil; sometimes applied 
to a measuring tape or stick. 

ma i ku tski ksa, n. fr. kutski; 
an imitator, one who frequently 
imitates the manners of others for 
the amusement of spectators. 

ma l ma da ki, n. fr. madaki; 
a pencil, brush, or prepared stick 
used in painting pictures. 

mai mak 1 e ke, n. playing- 
cards. 

ma l mi di ti. See iduksitiimi- 
diti. 

ma l pa ka de, n. fr. ipakade ; 
a fork, a table-fork. 


mai 


121 


mak 


ma l pa sa ki, n. fr. ipasaki; the 
belt worn around the waist, outside 
of the dress or shirt; the girdle. 

ma l pa tsa ti, n. syn. with ipa- 
tsati. 

ma 1 ptsa, n. ?fr. iptsa; an axe. 
ma i ptsa da ka, n. dimin. of 
maiptsa; a hatchet. 

ma l si, n. fr. isi; a covering, 
corn husks. 

ma i ske, n. fr. iske; one com¬ 
manded, one obeying, 
ma i spa du mi di, u. a snail, 
ma I su, n. ?fr. isu; the war- 
eagle. 

ma l su i ki” sis, n. See Local 
Names. 

ma i su ti psa ki, n. fr. isuti 
and ipsaki; an apron, 
ma i ta, n. an arrow, syn. ita. 
ma i ta hi, n. See itahi. 
ma i ta i su, n. fr. itaisu, and of 
similar meaning. 

ma i ta mu a, n. fr. tamua; a 
bell; also maitamua. 

ma i te l du su ki, n. lit. mate¬ 
rial for washing the face ; soap. 

ma i te i ki pa ki si, n. fr. ite, i 
and kipakisi; a towel. See T[ 44. 

ma i ti du su ki, n. a contracted 
form of maiteidusuki commonly 
used. 

ma l' ti pe, n. fr. itipe; a fall- 
trap. 

ma i tsi mu a, n. fr. tsimua; 
ornamental metallic pendants. 

ma i tski ti, n. fr. itskiti; a 
scissors. 

ma i tu hi i ki pki ti, fr. ituhi 
and maikipkiti, and synonymous 
with the latter. 

mak [wak], a prefix to verbs 
denoting opposition, reciprocity, etc. 
Sec maki and par. 151. 


ma ka. n. my daughter — form 
of address. 

ma ka di sta[-ri-], n. fr. ka- 
dista; a child, a young person. 

ma ka di sta i” dak u dsi, n. 
fr. makadista and dakudsi; a child’s 
swing, or swinging cradle; an ar¬ 
rangement, for rocking children, 
made of ropes and blankets and sus¬ 
pended from a beam. See maidakudsi. 
ma ka di sta ke, n. a doll, 
ma ka di sta ma tse, n. (matse, 
a man) ; a young boy. 

ma ka di sta mi a, n. (mia, a 
woman); a young girl. 

ma ka di sta ti, n. See Local 
Names. 

ma’ ka hpl ta mi [-wi], u. hail, 
ma ka ptsi, v. t. ls£ pers. of da- 
kaptsi. 

ma ka ta, n. large fruit, particu¬ 
larly plums. 

mak i. v. i. and adverbial prefix, 
same as mak. 

mak i a, v. i. fr. maki; to con¬ 
test, to oppose, to struggle with one 
another, to play a game in which 
opposite sides are taken. 

mak i a pe, adj. checkered, cross- 
barred. 

mak i a pe ke, v. t, to checker, 
to ornament with intersecting lines. 

mak i a ti da e", v. i. fr. tidie; 
to run a contested race. 

mak i a ti di e” ke, v. t. fr 
tidieke; to cause to run in contest, 
i.e. to race horses, to have a horse¬ 
race. 

ma ki da ksi, n. fr. kidaksi; a 
very young child, one tied up in a 
bundle(as these Indians usually carry 
children until they are about six 
months old), the bundle and child 
together. 


mak 


1^2 


mak 


ma ki de ksa, n. fr. kidcksa; 
an excessive vomiting, a sickness 
characterized by prolonged or execs' 
sive vomiting. 

ma ki di ki, n. fr. kidiki; a 
hammer. 

ma ki di si, n. fr. kidisi; a 
dance. 

ma ki du tskl si, n. fr. kidu- 
tskisi; a lot of washed clothes. 

mak i e ke, v. i. and t. to con¬ 
test, or cause to contest; used in 
much the same sense as makia. 

mak i hi, v. i. to stand mutually 
in contact; as two sticks placed so 
as to support one another. 

mak i hi ta, negative of makihi; 
to be separated mutually. 

mak i i de, v. i. fr. maki and ide; 
to interebange speech, to hold a dia¬ 
logue. 

mak i i ku’ pa, v. t. fr. maki and 
iku’pa; to hate one another. 

mak i i si, n .fr. maki and isi,— 
so called because the covers or flaps 
close from opposite directions; a 
meat-case, or parfleche case; which 
is an arrangement made of decorated 
raw-hide for holding dried meat aud 
other articles. 

mak i ki de si, v. t. fr. maki 
and kidesi; to love one another. 

ma ki ku a, n. fr. kikua; a sol¬ 
dier, one of the soldier band of the 
tribe. 

mak i ma ka da ha, v. to pass 
and repass one another coming from 
opposite directions. 

mak i ma ka da ha ti di e, 
v. (tidie, to run ); to run or ride rap¬ 
idly, passing and repassing one an¬ 
other, coming from opposite direc¬ 
tions; as when two persons, on foot 
or mounted, make a war signal. 


ma ki mak i a [bakiwakia], 

n. fr. ki and makia; a battle, a fight. 

ma ki pa hi, n. fr. kipahi; a 
song.— makipahi muk, give (us) a 
song — a common mode of asking a 
person to sing. 

mak i pa ta ki, v. t. fr. maki 
and pataki; to shut together, to 
close together; to shut anything 
■when two sides are moved in the 
act, as in closing a book or a covered 
mirror. 

ma ko’ pa, n. my comrade; 
said by one female to another. See 
iko’pa. 

mak sa ki, v. t. ls< person of 
daksaki. 

mak se sa, same as maksese. 
mak se sa dsi, adj. fr. maksese; 
seeming to resemble one another. 

mak se sa du i, v. i. becoming 
more and more alike. 

mak sd se [wak-], v. i., adj./r. 
sese; mutually resembling one an¬ 
other, alike. 

mak se se de, adj. closely but 
not exactly resembling one another. 

mak se se ke, v. t. to cause to 
resemble one another, to make alike. 

mak si a, adj./r. mak and sia; 
nearly the same as maksese. 
mak si a de, adj. much alike, 
mak s a ka, adj./r. maksia and 
ka; of the same size or length as one 
another; nearly synonymous with 
siaka and seka.— maksiakats, they 
are of equal size. 

mak si a ka dsi, adj. apparently 
alike in size or length. 

mak si a ka ke, v. t. to increase 
or reduce in size so as to make two 
things of equal length or size. 

mak tsa ki, v. t. 1st person of 
daktsaki. 


mak 


123 


mas 


ma ku, n. the cottonwood tree; 
perhaps so called in allusion to its 
height. 

ma ku, n. night. The word is 
also used to denote the astronomical 
day or cycle of twenty-four hours; 
and sometimes to denote a year, 
ma ku, adj. tall, lofty, 
ma ku a du o" ki pa di, n. 
young cottonwood shrubs, growing 
at the base of a tree. See aduokipadi. 

ma ku du, adv./r. maku; during 
the night. 

ma ku duk, adv. during the 
coming night. 

ma ku ka za, n. same as next 
word, but less in use. 

ma ku ka zi, n. dim. of maku; 
a young cottonwood tree. 

ma ku ke, v. t. fr. maku; to 
make tall,— made tall. 

ma ku mi di [-bidi], n. fr. 
maku, night, and midi; the moon. 

ma ma, v. a word used impera¬ 
tively when trying to get an infant 
to drink or nurse. 

ma ma da ki, n. fr. madaki; a 
picture, a painting, a book. 

ma mak i e ke, n .fr. makieke; 
a game in which opposite sides are 
taken. 

ma o de sa [-nesa], n .fr. desa, 
flit, a thing which is not; a thing of 
imaginary existence, a groundless 
story, etc. 

ma o de sa a zis, n. See Local 
Names. 

ma pa si pi sa, n. sunflower 
seeds,— used as food by these In¬ 
dians. 

ma pa tska ki di ti, n. a wasp, 
ma pe or ma pe, n. day, day¬ 
time, a period of twenty-four hours.— 
liidi-mape, to-day. 


mape du, adv./r. mape; during 
the day. 

ma pe ho pa, n. fr. mape and 
hopa; any day observed as sacred 
by white men, as Sunday and 
Christmas. 

ma pe mi di [-bidi], n./r.mape 
and midi; the sun. 

ma pi da hpa, n. fr. pidahpa; 
ribbon. 

ma po ksa, n. any animal or ani¬ 
mals offensive to the sight of these 
Indians or unfit for food, as insects, 
worms, snakes, etc. 

ma p6 sa, n. a term applied to 
flies and insects less offensive to the 
sight than the mapoksa. 
ma po sa ki di ti, n. an ant. 
ma pu dsi ke, n .fr. pudsike; a 
cord of buckskin or other material 
having porcupine quills or other 
ornamental trimming wrapped 
around it. 

ma ro ka, n. same as madoka. 
ma ru hta, n. same as madulita. 

ma sa mi, ) n. my aunt. See 
ma sa wis, f isami and disami. 

ma si, n. a buffalo-robe, a blanket 
worn as a robe. 

ma si, n. a white man. The word 
was origiually applied only to the 
French and Canadians, who are 
now sometimes designated as masi- 
ka’ti, the true whites. 

ma si a de, v. to dream.— ma- 
masiade, I dream, madasiade, you 
dream. 

ma si a ha, v. to sweep out dirt, 
to clean by sweeping with a broom. 

ma si a i ha, n. fr. masialia; a 
broom. The position of the particle 
‘i’ in this word is unique. 

ma si da ha mi, n. fr. masi and 
dahami; a shawl. 


mas 


124 


mat 


ma si l Hi, n. fr. masi and ilii; 
dry-goods of any description. 

ma si i Hi Ha pi, n. (Rapi, thin ); 
light cotton goods, muslin. 

ma si i Hi pu zi, n. (puzi, spotted !); 
calico prints. 

ma si i Hi ta tsi, n. (tatsi, thick ); 
cloth, woolen goods. 

ma si l ptse, n. fr. masi and 
iptse; a wide, embroidered band in 
the centre of a robe or blanket. 

ma si" i ta da Hpi tsi, lit. white 
man's bear ; a hog. 

ma si" i ta da Hpi tsi su i, 
(sui, fat)-, bacon. 

ma si i ta i mak i e ke, n. lit. 
white-man's gaming materials ; cards. 

ma si i ta mi te [-wite], n. lit. 
white man's buffalo , or cow ; domestic 
cattle. 

ma si" i ta tsa ka ka, n. lit. 
white man's bird ; the domestic cock, 
ma si ka, n. chewing-gum. 
ma si pi sa, u. fr. sipisa; grapes, 
raisins. 

ma si pi sa a ku du" ti, n. lit. 
grape-eater, the cedar bird. 

ma si si pi sa, n. fr. masi and 
sipisa; the negro. 

ma si ta, n. my back; from isita 
or the hypothetical word sita. 

ma si ta ka ksu, n. lit. ichite 
man's tuber; the potato. 

ma si ta ra Hpi" tsi, same as 
masiitadaRpitsi. 

ma su a ka za, n. dimin. of ma- 
suka; a puppy; willow catkins are 
also so called. 

ma su ka, n .fr. suka; a dog. 
ma su ka ak su, n. fr. masuka 
and ? aksue; the coral-bcrry or wolf- 
berry, Symphoricarpus. 

ma su ka ak su a ma sis", n. 
See Local Names. 


ma su ka ic ke, n. lit. Dog Band; 
one of the orders or societies among 
the men of the tribe. 

ma su ka ka di sta, n. lit. Little 
Dogs; an order or society of the men. 

ma su ka ma da ki, n. another 
of the bands or orders of the Hidatsa 
men. 

ma ta, n. prob.fr. ta, to kill; au¬ 
tumn. 

ma ta du, adv./r. mata; during 
the autumn. 

ma ta duk, n. adv. fr. mata; 
next autumn, during next autumn, 
ma ta Hi n. a turtle, 
ma ta Hi i sa, lit. resembling a 
turtle; a padlock. 

ma ta Hpi, n. a heavy cord, a 
rope, a lariat. 

ma ta ki, n. a plate, a shallow 
dish. 

ma ta ki a du ki du sa, n. a 
cup-board. See adukidusa. 

ma ta ki a zi, n. See Local 
Names. 

ma ta ko a, adv. same as mate- 
koa. 

ma ta si, n. my robe, or blanket. 
See itasi. 

ma ta tsi da Ho ke, n. fr. tatsi 
and dahoke ; an Indian pad-saddle. 

ma ta tsi na Ho ke, same as last 
word. 

ma te. n., adv. fr te or tie; long 
ago, a long time; the last vowel is 
often lengthened to indicate very dis¬ 
tant past time. 

ma teko a, adv. fr. mate; at a 
distant time in the past. 

ma ti, n. a boat.— hutsi-mati 
( wind-boat ) a sail boat, mida-mati, a 
wooden boat. 

ma ti si sa, n. a steam-boat, 
ma to ke, n. a clam. 


mat 


125 


mia 


ma tsa mi di [-bidi], a. a bowl, 
a basin. 

ma tsa mi di ka zi, n. dimin. of 
matsamidi; a small bowl or basin. 

ma tse [watse, batse], n. a 
man. 

ma tse di di, n. fr. matse and 
didi; a war-party. 

ma tse e tsi, n. a chief, a person 
of prominence. 

ma tsho ki, n. eagle tail-feathers, 
ma tsi, n. contraction of maatsi. 
ma tsi, n. my foot See itsi. 
ma tsi ta hi du, n .fr. tsita and 
liidu; the coccyx, 
ma tsi to, n. a needle or awl. 
ma tsi to ic ti" a, n. (ictia, 
large); an awl. 

ma tsi to-u" ti po a du i, n. 

(uti and poadui); a pin. 

ma tsu, n. small fruit, particu¬ 
larly cherries. 

ma tsu a, n. a cherry-tree, 
ma tsu a, n. tibrous tissue from 
the back of the buffalo, elk, deer, 
etc.; it is dried and split into fine 
threads for sewing. It is commonly 
called sinew by the whites. 

ma tsu a pa ki si, n. fr. matsua 
and pakisi; “ sinew ” twilled by rub¬ 
bing; as it is fixed preparatory to 
being used in sewing. 

ma tsu a tsa, n. fragrant grass, 
ma tsu a zis, n. See Local 
Names. 

ma tsu ka, n. my younger bro¬ 
ther. See itsuka. 

ma tsu o tak a, n. the smaller 
dogwood, Corn us stolonifera. 

ma tsu o tak i, n.fr. matsua/nZ 
taki; the berries of C. stolonifera. 

ma tsu ta pa, n.fr. matsu and 
tapa; the service-berry, Amelanchier 
Canadensis. 


ma tsu ta pa a, n. the service- 
berry-tree, shad-bush. 

ma tu, v. there are, there is, he 
has, they have, etc.; opposite of 
desa. 

ma tu a, n. green corn, roasting 
ears. 

ma tu hi, n. my dress or shirt. 
See ituhi. 

ma u pa ki, n. a mallet, 
ma u pa ki hu" pa i sis. See 

Local Names. 

ma wa da ki, same as mama- 
daki. 

ma zi, n. a legend, a tale, 
me, n. a louse. 

me pa ka, n. contr. of maepaka, 
but more common. 

me pi, n. contraction of maepi, 
much used, 
mi’, n a rock. 

mi [wi, wits], prob. auxiliary 
verb, suffixed to denote 1st person, 
future. (*[ 165). 

mi, simple pers. pron., 1st pers., 
used independently or incorporated, 
nom. and obj., usually singular, but 
when incorporated may refer to 
more than one. (See TH[ 108, 109, 
170 and 202). 

mi [wi, wits], a suffix indicat¬ 
ing number. See tuami andhidimi. 

mi, a syllable or prefix of uncer¬ 
tain significance, beginning many 
nouns in the language; often pro¬ 
nounced bi; sometimes, wi. 
mi a [wia, bia], n. a woman, 
mi a do ka ta [-no-], n. a har¬ 
lot. This is the proper word; but 
maduhta, fool, is often used. 

mi a ka za, n.fr. mia and kaza; 
a young woman. 

mi a ti, n.fr. mia ; a man who 
dresses in woman’s clothes and per- 


16 


mia 


126 


mid 


forms the duties usually allotted to 
females in an Indian camp. Such 
are called by the French Canadians 
“ berdachesand by most whites 
are incorrectly supposed to be her¬ 
maphrodites. 

mi a ti he, v. t. to become a 
miati; said of a man who assumes 
the dress and tasks of a woman. 

mi a ti ke, v. t. to cause to be a 
miati. 

mic ki, comp. pers. pronoun, 1st 
person; I, myself. See par. 115. 

mi da [wi-,bi-], n. a wild-goose. 

mi da, n. wood, a tree, a forest. 

mi da a ku du ti, n. lit. icood- 
eaters ; caterpillars which live on 
trees. 

mi da du e tsa, n. fr. mida and 
duetsa; a wooden canoe, a “ dug- 
out.” 

mi da ha, n. fire. 

mi da ha dsi, n. willows; a 
name applied to all shrub willows. 

mi da ha dsi hi si, n. red wil¬ 
low. 

mi da ha i du ka pi, n. a fric¬ 
tion-match. 

mi da ha tie ke, v. i. to play as 
young children play, to play at any 
amusement in which opposite sides 
are not taken. 

mi da ho pa, n. fr. mida and 
hopa; red cedar. 

mi da ho pa-o ka tsa du, n. 

trailing cedar. 

mi da hu pa, n. fr. mida and 
hupa; boots and shoes, such as are 
used by the whites. The Hidatsa 
originally supposed them to be 
made of wood. 

mi da hu pa i ki tsa" ti ke, n. 
blacking. 

mi da ha, n. a pot, a kettle. 


mi da ha si, n. a basket, 
mi da i, n. elm. 
mi da t a ka ki, n. a chair, 
mi da i a ma ha ti, n. fr. mida, 
and amahati; a torch, a candle, 
mi da i a ma ha ti-i o"ki, n. ' 
mi da i a ma ha ti-i o" pe, n. 
mi da i a ma ha ti-i o" ptsa- 
ti, n. a candlestick. See old, _ 
ope and optsati. 
mi da i a pi, n. a spool, 
mi da 1C ke, n. fr. mida and 
icke; the Goose Band, one of the 
orders among the women of the 
tribe. 

mi da ic pa ti, n. sunken tree or 
snag in a river. 

ma da i ka ki, n. (kaki, roll), a 
w T agon. 

mi da i 6 pe, n. fr. mida and 
iope; a box of any kind, particularly 
a wooden box. 

mi da I si, n. fr. mida and isi; 
bark. 

mi da ka mic ka, n. (kamicka, 
tough)-, oak. 

mi da ki, n. a shield, 
mi da ksi, n. a palisade or stock¬ 
ade ; a skillet or pan; so called 
perhaps because like a palisaded en¬ 
closure. 

mi da lu e tsa, same as nhdadu- 

etsa. 

mi da ma l du tsa da, n a 

wooden sled. See maidutsada. 

mi da tsa pi, n. ashes, gunpow¬ 
der. 

mi da tsa pi a zis, u. See Lo¬ 
cal Names. 

mi da tsa pi i si, n. a powder- 
horn. 

mi da tsu ka, fr. mida and 
tsuka; boards, a floor. 

mi de, n. a door, a door-way. 



mid 


127 


mid 


mi de di, v. t. to come through 
a door-way, to enter a house, to pay 
a visit. 

mi de ko a, n. at or near the 
door, the seat around the fire nearest 
to the door. 

mi di [bidi, mini], n. water. 
The latter pronunciation, corre¬ 
sponding with the Dakota, is most 
commonly used in compound words. 

mi di, n. a name given to both 
sun and moon; it may be translated 
luminary or great luminary. When 
there is danger of ambiguity they 
are distinguished as mape-midi (day 
luminary) and oktsi-midi or maku- 
midi (night luminary). 

mi di [widi], verbal root; turn, 
twist. See pamidi, dumidi, etc. 

mi di apoka, n. lit. water head¬ 
dress ; a rainbow. 

mi di a te, adv., n.fr. midi and 
ate; when the sun (or moon) rises, 
sunrise. 

mi di a te de, adv. near sunrise, 
just before sunrise. 

mi di a te du, adv. at sunrise, 
during the time the sun is rising. 

mi di a te duk, adv. when the 
sun shall next rise. 

mi di a te 6 dak si pi, adv. after 
sunrise. See daksipi. 

mi di de ta, n.fr. midi, water, 
and deta; the bank of a river, the 
shore of a lake. 

mi di di di [-niri], fr. midi 
and didi; to swim. 

mi di ho pa, n. See Local 
Names. 

mi di 1 da ftu pi, n.fr. midi, i 
and daliupi; a sponge. 

mi di i hi’ ke, n.fr. midi, i and 
hike; a drinking-vessel, a cup. 


mi di i ma hpi [-wa-], n. adv. 
fr. midi and iruahpi; sunset. 

mi di i ma hpi de, adv. near 
sunset. 

mi di i ma hpi du, adv. at sun¬ 
set, 

mi di l ma hpi duk, adv. when 
the sun shall next set. 

mi di l ma hpi se du, adv. 
when the sun did last set. 

mi di i ta tsu, n. fr. midi and 
itatsu; the half-moon. 

mi di ka, adv. fr. midi, tenter ; 
in or by the water. 

mi di ka ki hi n. fr. midi, moon, 
and kakihi; the full-moon. 

mi di ka ki hi de, n. the gib¬ 
bous moon. 

mi di ka 6 ze [mini-], n. fr. 

midika and oze, lit. They Plant by, or 
in, the Water; a band of the Teton 
Dakotas. 

mi di ke, v. t. fr. mide and ke; 
to liquefy, melt. 

mi di ki da he, fr. midi, moon, 
and kidahe; the new moon, the 
crescent. 

mi di ki dak tsi e, n. clear 
water, water allowed to settle. 

ml di 6 pe, contraction of mida- 
iope. 

mi di ma pe du pa hi [bidi- 
waperupahi], n. fr. midi, mape 
and dopahe, lit. the sun divides the 
day in two ; noon. 

mi di ma pe du pa hi-dak a- 
mi di, n. afternoon. 

mi di ma pe du pa hi-dak 
si pi, n. synon. with last word. 

mi di ma pe du pa hi de, n. 
nearly noon. 

mi di mi ta ha he, n. the Man- 
dan medicine-ark. 


mid 


128 


mit 


N 


mi di pi, v. to enter the water, 
i. e. to bathe one’s self. 

mi di sa, v., adj. turbid; said of 
water. 

mi di sa a zis. See Local 
Names. 

mi di sa ke, v. t.fr. midisa; to 
make turbid, roiled. 

mi di si, n. contraction of mida- 
isi. 

mi di si pi sa, n.. fr. midi and 
sipisa; coffee, the infusion or decoc 
tiou. 

mi di ta di [minitari], n., 

comp. y. fr. midi and ladi; to cross 
water, to go across a stream. The 
Hidatsa Indians; so called by the 
Mandans. 

mi di ti, v. t. to cook by frying, 
mi di tsi, adj. of a water}' con¬ 
sistency. 

mi do, pers. pron., plural; we, 
us. 

mi do ki, pers. pron. compound, 
plural; we, ourselves. 

mi du e, v. i. fr. midi; and ue ; 
to bubble, to boil as water. 

mi du e he, v. t. to boil water, 
mi du e ke, v. t. to cause to 
boil, to set to boil, boiled. 

mi e, n. woman, same as mia. 
mi ha ka, n. a generic name for 
ducks. 

mi’ i, n. a stone or rock, same as 
mi’. 

mi’ i da’ ta, n. lit. stone heart; 
a geode. 

mi ka, n. a mare; as a suffix it 
indicates the the female of all lower 
animals except buffalo. 

mi ka’, n. grass, sedges, all grass¬ 
like plants. 

mi ka’ i dutsi, u .fr. rnika’ and 
dutsi; a pitchfork. 


mi ka’ ki ksa, n. lit. Grass-fixers; 
an order or degree among women. 

mi ka’ to hi sa, adj. fr. mika’ 
and toliisa; green. 

mi ka’ tsa ki, n. a name some¬ 
times applied to fragrant grass. 

mi ka’ u dsi, n. lit. dry grass; 
hay. 

mi ka’ u ta ku du ti, n. fr. 
mika’uti and akuduti; a caterpillar 
that eats onions. 

mi ka’ u ti, n. fr. mika’ and uti; 
onions, wild garlic. 

mf’ ka za, n. dim. of mi’; gravel, 
pebbles. 

mi kta [wi-], n. the bottom, the 
lower part or surface of anything. 

mi ktaka [wi-], adv./r. mikta; 
at the lower part, below. 

mi kta ko a, adv. fr. mikta; 
near or at the bottom, under. 

mi kta ta, adv. fr. mikta; down¬ 
ward, in the direction of the bottom. 

mi’ ma u pa ki, n. fr. mi’ and 
maupaki; a stone-headed mallet, 
such as is ordinarily made by these 
Indians. 

mi spa [bispa], n. the ash-tree, 
mi te, n. a buffalo-cow; the word 
is also used generically. 

mi te a ka zi, u. dimin. of mite; 
a buffalo-calf. 

mi te ata di ke [biteatarike], 

n. the box-elder, Negundo aceroides. 

mi te a ta ki, n. fr. mite and 
ataki; an albino buffalo, white buf¬ 
falo. 

mi te a ta ki ic ke, n. the White 
Buffalo Band, a secret degree or 
order among women of the tribe. 

mi te ktsa tsa, n. the black cur¬ 
rant. 

mi te ktsa tsa a, n. the currant- 
bush. 


mit 


129 


oda 


mi td o da hpi, n. a buffalo-liide. 
mi' ti, 1 v. i. to creep, as a hunter 
approaching game, 
mi tsa ki, v. I alone, I unaided, 
mi tsi, n. a wedge for splitting 
wood. 

mi' tsi, v. root; mince, com¬ 
minute finely. 

mi’ tsi a da zi. See Local 
Names. 

mi tsi i ta mi da ksi. See Lo¬ 
cal Names. 

mi tska pa, n. the fruit of the 
rose; it is eaten hy Indians, 
mi tska pa a, n. a rose-bush, 
mi tska pa 6 dak a pa ki, n. 
rose-blossom. See odakapaki. 
mo tsa, n. a coyote. 

m.6 tsa i ta ma ka ta, n. lit. 
coyote's plum ; the fruit of Astragalus 
caryocarpus. 
mu, v. root. See mua. 


mu a, v. or v. root; to sound, to 
make a noise. See hamua, tamua, 
tsimua, etc. 

mua [bua], n. generic name for 
fish. 

mu a da ki, v. i. to bark as a 
wolf or dog ; to imitate the howl of 
a wolf, as Indian hunters commonly 
do when calling to each other in the 
woods. 

mu a l du tsku pi, n. a fish¬ 
hook. 

mu a pa de hi, n.fr. mua, apa, 
and dehi; sturgeon. 

mu a pa ha tski,/r. mua, &pa, 
and liatski; gar-pike (?). 

mu a tsu ka, n. (tsuka, flat) ; sun- 
fish. 

mu dsi [wudsi], v. root; roll 
up, fold by rolling. 

mu pi [wupi], v. t. to smell, 
mu ti, v. 1 . 1 st pers. of duti; I eat. 


n. 

n. Words heard to begin with the sound of n may be found under 
d; n and d being interchangeable letters. See pars. 20 and 21. 


O. 


o, ad r. much; used in com¬ 
pounds ; synon. with ahu, which 
may be derived from o. 

o, a prefix to verbs forming nouns 
which are names of places and ac¬ 
tions; often synonymous with adu. 
(1H 49 and 50.) 

o, a prefix of undetermined mean¬ 
ing to verbal roots. In the 1st and 
2d persons it commonly takes m and 
d as pronouns, preceded by a. (1 
194). 


6 da [-ra], v. t. to pass another 
person on the road, either by over¬ 
taking or meeting him. 

o da hpi [-nahpi,-rahpi], n. 
fr. dahpi; the hide of an animal, the 
entire hide. 

6 dak a pa ki, n. fr. dakapaki; 
a flower, a blossom; sometimes ac¬ 
cented on penultimate. 

6 dak a pi hi, n. fr. dakapihi; 
an ornamental flap on a garment; 
also odakapihi. 


oda 


130 


o’pa 


6 da ki, v. i. to chirp, to make a 
stridulous sound. 

6 dak sa ki, n. fr. daksaki; a 
contused wound, the act of giving a 
contused wound. 

6 dak si pi,, n. fr. daksipi; a 
subsequent time, a time after some 
other time mentioned. 

o da mu, n. fr. damn ; a deep 
spot in a stream, the channel of a 
river. 

6 da pi [ -ra-], v. t. to find, to 
make an original discovery; not to 
recover something lost. 

6 da sa’ ti [ona-], n. a name, a 
designation not a proper name. 

6 da sa’ ti, v. t. to name, to speak 
of or call by name. In the conjuga¬ 
tion of this word ‘o’ is not preceded 
by ‘a’ as in other verbs beginning 
with ‘o.’—omadasa’ti, I name, oda- 
dasa’ti [olanasa’ti], you name. 

o di di, n. fr. didi; gait, walk.— 
oi idi isia, said of a lame person. 

o du se, n. fr. duse ; a place of 
deposit. 

o du ska ska pka, n. spruce 
gum, such as the Indians themselves 
gather. That obtained from the 
traders is called masika. 

o du tsi, n. fr. dutsi; a mine, a 
place where anything may be ob¬ 
tained with certainty. 

6 hi, v. t. to be fond of; said of 
the affection of pets for their owners. 

6 ha ta dui, v. i. becoming pale. 

6 ha ti, adj. fr. liati; white, 
bright, clear or pale; often used 
synonymously with iliotaki. 

6 ha ti ke, v. t. to make pale, to 
bleach or whiten. 

6 ha ti ksa, adj. continually or 
habitually pale. 

6 ka, n., adv. yonder, over there. 


6 ka du, adv. in a distant place 
(pointed to), yonder, beyond. 

oka ko a, adv. at a distant place, 
at yon place, at the other side. 

6 ka ta, v. t. to put on an article 
of clothing, to dress. 

6 ki, v. t. to surround the base, 
to surround one end of an object; 
to maintain in position or support by 
thus surrounding,— as a candle is 
held in a candlestick, as the teeth 
are held in the gums. 

6 ki, n. a plume, a feather, some¬ 
thing plumose. 

o ki l'e pu, n. fr. oki and icpu; a 
tassel. 

6 ki pa di, v. t .fr oki and apa- 
di; to grow up around; said of 
young saplings or twigs growing 
around a parent tree. 

6 ki pa pi, v. t. to find, to re¬ 
cover something lost. See par. 194. 

6 ktsi, n. ? fr. katsi; darkness; 
hence one of the names for night, 
liidi-oktsi, this night. 

6 ktsi a de, n., adv. almost night, 
almost dark, after sunset. 

o ktsi a du [-ru], adv. during 
the night. 

o ktsi a duk [-ruk], n., adv. 
next night, during the approaching 
night. 

o ktsi se du,n., adv.,last night, 
during last night (1T[ 252 and 253).— 
oktsisedu itaokakoa, before last 
night. 

o ktsi se ru, same as last word. 

o na wu, same as odamu. 

6’ pa, n. evening, near sunset. 

6’ pa de, n. adv. near evening, 
late in the afternoon. 

6’ pa du, adv. during the evening. 

6’ pa duk, adv. during the com¬ 
ing evening. 


4 


6pa 


131 


pad 


6 pa pe, v. t. to bedaub slightly, 
to bespatter, to stick on in small 
quantities. 

6 pa sa, ? n. a tucking. 

o pa sa ku, n. fr. opasa and ku; 
to give a tucking; i. d. to tuck in the 
edges of bedding. 

6 pa se, v. t. to tuck bedding. 

6 pe, v. t. to contain, to bold ; as 
a box or vessel. 

6 pe, n. tobacco. This name is 
often applied to articles mixed with, 
or used in place of tobacco; as bark 
of Cornu$ or leaves of uva tirsi. 

6 pe ha sa or opehasa, n. 
the bark of Cornus stolonifera, or 
C. sericea, dried and prepared for 
smoking, “ kinnekeniek.” 

6 pe hi, v. t. comp, of ope and hi; 
to smoke tobacco or any substitute 
for tobacco. 

6 pe i si, n .fr. ope and isi; a to¬ 
bacco-bag. 

6 pe pa mi tsi, n. fr. ope and 
pamitsi; a board on which tobacco 
is cut. This word is not formed ac¬ 
cording to ordinary etymological 


rules; it was probably originally 
opeipamitsi. 

6 psa sa, v. t. to stop, to jar, to 
arrest motion; said of an object 
against which a person stumbles in 
walking. 

6 ptsa ti, v. t. to encircle or sur¬ 
round closely, to hold by surround¬ 
ing closely; often used synonym¬ 
ously with oki. 

6 ti, v. i., adj. cooked, ripened, 
scalded. 

6 ti he, v. t. to scald or cook. 

6 ti ke, v. t. to cause to cook or 
ripen, to put fruit away to ripen. 

6 tsha mi [-wi], v. i. adj. numb, 
paralyzed; said of the feeling in the 
limbs produced by pressure, com¬ 
monly' called “sleepiness.” matsi, 
otshawits, my foot is asleep. 

6 tsha mi ke, v. t. to make 
numb, or “ sleepy.” 

o ze, n, fr. the verb; a drink, a 
cup of water or other fluid. 

6 ze, v. t. to pour into, to fill or 
partly fill a vessel; also to plant or 
sow seed. 


P- 


pa, v. t. to reduce to powder by 
grinding or pounding. 

pa, a prefix to verbs, commonly' 
signifying that the action is perform¬ 
ed by the hands or is capable of being 
performed by the hands. (Tf 152). 

pa do pi, adj. ?/r. padui; short 
in stature, low-sized. 

pa do pi di, adj. very short, 
pa du a du i, v.fr. padui; short¬ 
ening, decreasing in length, 
pa du i, adj. short. 


pa du i di di, n. fr. padui and 
didi; ceremonial processions, per¬ 
formed by bands or secret orders 
of the tribe, in which the performers 
follow one another in a circle, taking 
very short steps and singing as they 
move. These processions are com¬ 
monly called “ medicine dances ” 
by the whites; but the Hidatsa ap¬ 
ply a different term to a dance. 

pa du i ke, v. t. to shorten, 
shortened. 


pad 


132 


pat 


pa du i ksa, v.,adj. constantly 
and excessively short, 
pa hi, v. to sing, 
pa ha du i, v. i. becoming chafed 
or blistered. 

pa ho hi, v. t. ?fr. hohi; said of 
ice when it begins to break in the 
spring. 

pa hu, v. t. to spill; imperative 
form. 

pa hu e, v. t. fr. hu or hue; to 
spill out, to pour, to empty by pour¬ 
ing. 

pa ka de, v. t. to stick into or 
thrust through, to impale. 

pa ka pi, v. i. fr. kapi; to be 
torn, as in walking through rose¬ 
bushes. 

pa ki di, v. t. to push, to shove 
away with the hand. 

pa ki si, v. t. to rub gently in one 
direction with the hand, as in 
smoothing the hair or stroking a cat. 

pa ki ti, v. t. fr. kiti; to press to 
smoothness, to make smooth by 
pressure with the hands. 

pa mi di, v. t. fr. midi; to twist 
with the hand. 

pa ml tsi [-witsi], v. t. fr. 
mitsi; to cut fine by pressing on 
with a knife held in the hand; as in 
cutting up tobacco or other material 
on a board preparatory to smoking. 

pa mu dsi [-wudsi], v. t. to roll 
up with the hands; to roll as a long 
strip of cloth or carpet, or bandage is 
rolled; to fold or pack by rolling. 

pa sa ki, v. t. to engirdle or cover; 
as a belt. 

pa sa ki, v. t, to love or like; 
possibly a figurative application of 
pasaki, to engirdle. 

pa sku, v. t. sku ;fr. to extract by 
pushing with the hand, to shove a 


cork into a bottle, to push a bullet out 
of a wound. 

pa’ ta, imperative of pa’te. 
pa ta ki, v. t. to place in contact. 
See ipataki, kipataki and makipa- 
taki. 

pa’ te, v. t. to turn over, to tum¬ 
ble over. 

pa ti, v. i. to fall down off of, to 
drop from a height. 

pa ti he, v. t. to throw or knock 
down, to throw down from. 

pa ti ke, v. t. to cause to fall, to 
throw down, to remove a support 
and allow to fall. 

pa to’ ti, v. t. fr. to’ti; to wave, 
or agitate back and forth, to wave 
with the hand, to make a signal by 
waving. 

pa tsa’ ti, v. t. fr. tsati; to punc¬ 
ture, to impale. 

pa tsa ti, n. the west, the laud to 
the west of the Hidatsa. 
pa tsa ti ha, adv. westward, 
pa tsa ti koa, adv. at or in the 
west, west. 

pa tska, adj. flattened, having 
one or more plane surfaces. 

pa tska pi, v. t. fr. tskapi; to 
prick with a pin, to stick with an 
instrument held in the hand. 

pa tskas, n. proper. See Local 
Names. 

pa tski di a, n. fr. patska; cac¬ 
tus, particularly the different species 
of Opuntia or prickly pear. 

pa tski di a 6 ka, n. fr. patski- 
diaoki and a; the round cactus of 
the Upper Missouri, which bears a 
pleasant edible fruit. 

pa tski di a 6 ki, n .fr. patski- 
dia and oki (alluding to the way in 
which the fruit grows on the plant); 
the fruit of the round cactus or Mam- 


* 


pat 


133 


pita 


milaria. The name has recently 
been applied to figs. 

pa tsku pi, v. t. fr. tskupi; to 
fold up as a blanket or robe is folded, 
pa wi di, same as pamidi. 
pe, v. t. to swallow, to take a meal 
in which both liquid and solid food 
are served. 

pe, v. t. to grind, as coffee in a 
mill. 

pe da ku du ti, n .fr. pedi,aku, 
and duti; a vulgar name sometimes 
applied to dogs; offensive epithet 
applied to persons whom they wish 
to liken to dogs. 

pe da ku pa’ te, n. fr. pedi, 
aku and pa’te; a species of beetle. 

pe de tska, n. the large crow or 
raven. 

pe de tska i ta Hi" pi sa, n. 

Phlox aristata. 

pe de tski sta pe di, n. fr. pe- 

detska and istapedi; a sort of soft 
hail, or snow falling in globular 
flakes, “ mountain snow.” 

pe di, n. any offensive matter or 
excretion, dregs, ordure, 
pke ta, n. nasal mucus, 
pile ta l si, n. a pocket-handker¬ 
chief. 

pliu, v. root, or ?fr. hu ; squeeze 
out and let fall. 

pliu ti, v. or v. root ffr. phu or 
liu; squeeze forward, squeeze out. 
See kiphuti. 
pi, v. t. to tattoo, 
pi, v. root; penetrate. As a verb, 
often used synonymously with ipi. 
mapi, dapi. 
pi a, v. i. crepitate, 
pi a ti, v. i. fr. pia; denoting de¬ 
sire or readiness. 

pi da lipa, v., adj. light, fragile, 
as silken goods. 


pi di a, v., adj. ruffled or frilled, 
ornamented with a ruffled border. 

pi e, v., adj. smoky; said of 
atmosphere rendered disagreeable 
by smoke. 

pi e ksa, adj. constantly and dis¬ 
agreeably smoky. 

pi ta kie ti a, adj. See pitikic- 
tia. 

pi ti ka, num. adj. ten. 
pi ti kic ti a, num. adj. fr. 
pitika and ictia; one hundred. 

pi ti kic ti a-a ka ko di, num. 
adj. one thousand. 

pki ti, v. t. fr. kiti or pakiti; to 
smooth out, to iron clothes.— map- 
kiti, I smooth, dapkiti [na-], you 
smooth. The word pkiti alone is 
rarely heard; for in the third person 
the intensive form, kipkiti, is used. 

po a du a dsi, adj. fr. poadui; 
of a hemispherical or somewhat 
spherical appearance. 

po a du i, adj. globular, hemi¬ 
spherical, nodular. 

po a du i ke, v. t. to make globu¬ 
lar. 

psu, v. root; dislocate, knock out 
of line. 

psu ki, v. i. to belch. — mapsuki, 

I belch, dapsuki, you belch. 

psu kic ti, v. i. fr. psuki; denot¬ 
ing desire or readiness. 

psu ti, v. t. fr. psu; to dislocate, 
kipsuti is the more common form. 

ptsu ti, v. t. to shove or thrust 
forward, to protrude. See kiptsuti, 
which is the form most commonly 
used. 

pu a, v. i., adj. to swell,—to be 
swollen, as a bruise; also to rot or 
become putrid. 

pu a de, v. i., adj. to be tainted 
or sour, but not decidedly rotten. 


17 


pua 


134 


sah 


pu a du i, v. i. becoming swollen, 
swelling gradually and constantly. 

pu a ke, v. t. to cause to swell, 
to inflict an injury which produces 
swelli ng,—swollen. 

pu a ksa, v. i. constantly swollen, 
pu dsi, v. t. to mark with fine in¬ 
dentations closely set, to sew with 
fine stitches, to wrap fine thread 
closely around, to wind colored 
horsehairs or porcupine quills closely 
around a buckskin string for orna¬ 
ment. The object of this verb is the 
name of the material used in wrap¬ 
ping or marking. 

pu dsi ke, v. t. to cause to be 
finely sewed,indented or enwrapped. 
The object of this verb is the name 
of the article on which the marking 
or wrapping is done. 

pu e, n. visible steam from waim 
water, mist, fog. 

pu 6, v. i. to steam (said of water), 
misty. 

pu ha ki, n. sand. 


pu” lia ki a te, n. fr. puhaki 
and ate ; a sand-bar appearing above 
the surface of the water, a sandy 
island. 

pu hi, n. foam, lather, 
pu hi, adj. freckled, blotched, 
pu hi, v. i. to foam, 
pu hi ke, v. t. to cause to foam, 
to agitate until a foam is produced. 

pu pu, n. a tall species of grass, 
the Dakota cedi. 

pu zi, adj. spotted, figured, 
striped. 

pu zi ke, v. t. to mark or orna¬ 
ment with spots or figures, spotted. 

pu zi ke, n. the domestic cat, an 
animal not long known to this tribe. 
The name is said to come from pu- 
zi; but it was probably, to some ex¬ 
tent, suggested by the English term 
pussy cat, puzike sounds just as the 
Hidatsa would be most likely to 
corrupt or mispronounce pussy-cat. 
pu zi ke da ka, n. a kitten, 


r. 

r. Words heard to begin with the sound of r, may be found under d : 
these letters being interchangeable. See pars. 19, 20 and 22. 


S. 

S. Words heard to begin w r ith the sound of s may be found in this dic¬ 
tionary with ts for their first letters. See par. 17. 


sa, n. same as sada. 
sa a ka, n. a frog, 
sa da, n. pudenda, 
sa he, n. the Cree or Knistineaux 
Indians. Assineboine “ sha-i-ye.” 


Other tribes of this region call the 
Crees by names which sound much 
like salie or sliaiye. There are vari¬ 
ous explanations of the derivations, 
but they are all doubtful. 


sak 


135 


sla 


sa ka, n. same as saaka ; a frog. 
In the first syllable, the vowel is pro¬ 
longed or pronounced as if doubled. 

sa ka du su ki, n. fr. saki and 
adusuki; tlie knuckles, 
sa ka pi, adj. tepid, lukewarm, 
sa ka pi he, v. t. to make tepid, 
sa ki, n. the human hand; some¬ 
times applied to the fore-paws of 
brutes, saki, alone and in derivatives 
beginning with it, is commonly pre¬ 
ceded by the pronouns. See isaki. 
sa ki a du tsa mi he, n. fingers, 
sa ki du ma ta du, n. fr. saki 
and dumatadu; the middle finger. 

sa ki i 6 ptsa ti, n .fr. saki and 
ioptsati; a finger-ring. 

sa ki i ta ki da ka" he, n. fr. 
saki and itakidakahe; a span, a span 
measure. 

sa ki ka zi, n. dimin. of saki; 
the little finger. 

sa ki ka zi u ti du, n. the third 
finger. See utidu. 

sa ki 6 ptsa ti, a contraction of 
sakiioptsati. 

sa ki ta, n. the thumb, 
sa ku pa du i, v. i. becoming 
crooked, warping. 

sa ku pi, adj. crooked, 
sa ku pi he, v. t. to distort, to 
bend. 

sakupi ke, v. t. to make crooked. 

sa mi, hypothetical w T ord; aunt. 
See isami. 

sa pu a, num. adj. seven, 
sa pu a he, v. t. to make into 
seven forms or parts. 

sa pu a he ke, v. t. to cause to 
make into seven; nearly synonym¬ 
ous w ith sapuake. 

sa pu a ke, v. t. to separate into 
seven parts, to divide into sevenths, 
—divided into sevenths. 


sa pu a pi ti ka, num. adj. 
seventy. 

sasa, v., adj. to fork or divide 
—forked, branched. 

sa su ka du i, v. i. becoming 
dull or blunt. 

sa su ki, adj. dull, as an edge- 
tool. 

sa su ki he, v. t. to tickle.— ni 
sasukimawits, I will tickle you. 

sa su ki ke, v. t. to cause to b 
dull. 

se, demonstrative pronoun ; that 
one, that thing.—sets, that is he, that 
is the very one. 

se du, adv. fr. se and du ; there, 
then, at that very time or place. As 
a suffix, this word is used to denote 
time, as the English last or ago. See 
par. 252. 

se i ske, adv. fr. se and iske; 
just as directed, just as ordered. 

se' ka, adj. fr se and ka; of the 
same size as something previously 
described. 

se ko a, adv. fr. se and koa; 
there, at that very place, 
se ru, adv. same as sedu. 
se sa, adj., adv. fr. se and isa or 
ise; same as sese. 

se se, adj., adv. resembling some¬ 
thing previously described, ‘just 
like that.’ 

se sets, a form of the last word 
used when it is desired to agree with 
some particular version of a story ; 
‘ it is just as you say.’ 

se ta, adv. ‘ not the same as that,’ 
not just that.—setats. 

se tsa ki, verb or phrase used as 
a pronoun; that alone, he or she 
unaided or unaccompanied. 

si a, synon. with se. Possibly the 
latter is a contraction. 


sia 


136 


ta 


si a ka. See seka. siakats. 
si di, adj. tawny, dull yellow, 
si di ke, y. t. to make tawny, to 
color a dull yellow. 

si di si, v. i. fr. clisi; to hasten, to 
be in a hurry, disidisi, hurry thou. 

si di si ke, v. t. to cause to hurry, 
to make hasten. 

si ka ka, n. a young man. 
si ki a, adj. curly, as the hair of 
a buffalo ; said also of tangled under¬ 
wood. 

si ki he, v. t. to curl, 
si pa, n. the bowels, 
si pe, adv. tangled, hard to pene¬ 
trate ; said of bad-lands, dense 
woods, etc. 

si pi, adj. black, pure black, 
si pi he, v. t. to blacken, to apply 
powdered charcoal. 

si pi sa, adj. fr. sipi and isa; 
blackish; of a very dark blue, brown, 
or other color scarcely distinguish¬ 
able from black; often applied to 
pure black. 

si pi sa de, adj. almost black, 
distinguishable from black but ap¬ 
proaching it. 

si pi sa dsa du i, v. i. becom¬ 
ing dark, as the face from exposure 
to -weather. 


si pi sa dsi, adj. resembling 
black, seeming to be blackish. 

si pi sa dsi he, v. t. to darken, 
to deepen or darken the color. 

si pi sa dsi ke, v. t. to dye of a 
darkish color. 

si pi sa du i, v. i. darkening, be¬ 
coming blackish (as iron allowed to 
cool); said when reporting the pro¬ 
gress of an operation for dyeing of a 
blackish color. 

si pi sa ke, v. t. to make very 
dark, to dye anything of a black or 
blackish color. 

si ta, hypothetical. See isita. 
ske, v. command, direct, 
sku, v. root; force through, ex¬ 
tract. 

so ki, adj. broad ; often used for 
dull. See sasuki. 
su a, adj., adv. slow, slowly, 
su a ha, adv. slowly, 
su a ke, V. t. to cause to move 
slowly, to retard motion, 
su e, v. t. to spit, 
sui, n. unmelted fat, adipose tissue, 
su ka, perhaps hypothetical; a 
dog, a beast of burden; same as Da¬ 
kota, sunka; found in the words 
itsuasuka, itasuka, rnasuka, etc. 
su ki, adj. same as soki. 


t. 


ta, adv. only, but; commonly pro¬ 
nounced as if suffixed. 

ta or ta’, an adverb and adverbial 
suffix denoting negation; not. As 
it commonly terminates a sentence 
it is often heard pronounced tats. 
Ex.— itskits, it is large enough, its- 
kitats, it is not large enough. *f 256. 


ta, a suffix to nouns and pronouns 
denoting possession, particularly 
acquired or transferable possession. 
IT 84. 

ta, prep, toward, in the direction 
of, etc.; suffixeck to nouns it forms 
adverbs. T 257. 

ta, v. i. and t. to kill, to be killed. 


tad 


137 


tfs 


ta da to di [-la-], to discharge 
a gun. 

ta de, v. i. almost killed, nearly 
dead. 

ta dl [-ri], v. t. to cross over, to 
go from one side to the other, to row 
or swim across a steam. 

ta du, hypothet. See itadu. 
ta he, v. t. fr. ta; to kill, he kills, 
tamats, I kill, tadats, you kill, tahets, 
he kills. 

ta hu’, n., v. thunder, to thunder. 
Like most other tribes of the plains 
the Hidatsa attribute thunder to the 
movements of a great bird. 

ta hu i da ka, n. fr. tabu’ and 
idaka; low rumblings of thunder 
following a loud peal. 

ta hu i ki sis, n. See Local 
Names. 

ta ka, inter, pron. what, which, 
ta ka da [-ra], what do you 
say? 

ta ka ta, inter, adv. fr. taka; in 
what direction, whither.—tapata and 
tota are synonyms, more commonly 
employed. 

ta ki, adj. white. See ataki and 
ihotaki. 

ta mu a [tabua], v./r. mua; to 
make aloud ringing sound, to be ring¬ 
ing, to ring. 

ta mu hi, adj. very fine, minute, 
ta mu hi di, adj. exceedingly 
fine, very minute, 
ta pa, int. pron. what, what is it. 
ta pa, adj. soft, easily broken, 
yielding. 

ta pa i, adj. tame as tapa. 
ta pa ta, adv. in what direction, 
whither.— tapata dade, where are 
you going? 

ta pe, int. pron. who. 

ta pe l ta, int. poss. pron. whose. 


ta pe ta, same as tapeita. 
ta pi, v. root; press, squeeze. 
See dutapi, etc. 

ta ta, adv. referring to past time 
not very distant; a short time ago, 
some time ago. 

ta ta ko a, adv. at or during a 
past period not very distant. 

ta tsa dsi, adj. fr. tatsi; thickish, 
appearing to be thick, 
ta tsa du i, v. thickening, 
ta tsi, adj. thick, as cloth, etc., 
also used to express total obscurity 
of the sky. See apaliitatsi. 

ta tsi ke, v. t. to thicken, thick¬ 
ened. 

ta wu hi, same as tamulii. 
te, v., adj. dead.— tets, he is dead, 
te du ti [-ruti], n. a prairie ter¬ 
race, a low open plain. 

te he, v. to die.—temats, I am dy¬ 
ing. temamits, I will die. 

ti, a suffix to verbs denoting readi¬ 
ness or desire to perform an action; 
to be about it. 
ti a, adv. same as tie. 
ti di a, v. i. to run. 
ti di e ke, v. t. to cause to run, 
to race a horse. 

ti e, n., adv. a long time, long 
continuing. 

ti e duk [-ruk], adv. referring 
to distant futurity. 

ti e hi duk, adv. when a distant 
future time shall arrive, 
ti pi a, n. mud. 

ti pi a da zi. See Local Names, 
ti pi a tsa ki, v., adj. fr. tipia 
and tsaki; soiled with mud, bespat¬ 
tered with mud. 

ti pi a tsa ki ke, v. t. to cause 
to be soiled with mud. 

ti sa or ti se, adj., adv. far, dis¬ 
tant, to a distance. 


tit 


138 


tsa 


ti tsa du i, v. i. fr. titsi; thick¬ 
ening, increasing in diameter. 

ti tsi, adj. thick; as a fat or 
swollen limb, or the trunk of a large 
tree; refers to diameters of cylindri¬ 
cal bodies. 

ti tsi ke, v. t. to thicken, to in¬ 
crease in diameter,— thickened. 

ti tsi ksa, adj. thick excessively 
and habitually, as a permanently 
swollen limb. 

to, interrogative adv. and pron. 
what place, what person, what kind 
or. color. 

to du [-ru], adv. fr. to and du; 
in what place, wherein, whereat. 

to ha dsa du i, v. i. fr. tohadsi; 
assuming a bluish hue. 

to ha dsi, adj. having a bluish 
or impure blue color. 

to ha dsi ke, v. t. to dye an im¬ 
pure blue color. 

to ha du i, v. i. assuming a blue 
color. 

to hi, adj. blue; denotes pure or 
positive blues, sky blue, ultramarine. 

to hi ke, v. t. to dye anything a 
pure blue. 

to hi sa, adj./r. tohi and isa; of 
a color allied to blue, green. See 
mika’tohisa. 

to hi sake, v. t. to dye anything 
green or other color allied to blue. 

tok, adv. it is used after sentences 
and verbs to denote probability or 
uncertainty; hence it is often used 
interrogatively and is frequently 
followed by madiets, I suppose. 

to ka, adv./r. to a/wZka; whereto, 
where, whither, 
to pa, num. adj. four, 
to pa he, v. i. and t. to part in 
four. 


to pa he ke, v. t. to cause to part 
in four. 

to pa ke, v. t. to divide into four 
parts, divided into four parts. 

to pa pi ti ka, n., adj. fr. topa 
and pitika; forty. 

to sa, int. adv. fr. to; how, in 
what manner. 

to se, int. adv. why, wherefore, 
to ta, int. adv. fr. to; in what 
direction, toward what place.—tota- 
dade [totarade, totalale], in what 
direction are you going ? 

to’ ti, v. root; implying sudden, 
repeated reversion of motion. See 
dato’ti, duto’ti, pato’ti, etc. 
tsa, adj. raw, uncooked, 
tsa, v. root; separate, divide, 
tsa da, n. grease, oil. 
tsa da, v. or v. root; slide, move 
smoothly. 

tsa da ke, v. t. to make slide, 
to cause or assist to slide. 

tsa da tsa ki, adj. fr. tsada, 
grease, and tsaki; soiled with grease. 

tsa hi du mi di, v. i. fr. dumi- 
di; to suffer from vertigo. 

tsa ka dsi, adj. fr. tsaki; mode¬ 
rately good, rather pietty. 

tsa ka dsi ke, v. t. to make mo¬ 
derately good. 

tsa ka du i, v. i. improving, be¬ 
coming good. 

tsa kak', int. an expression of 
contempt or disapprobation, 
tsa ka ka, n. a bird, 
tsa ka ka da ka, n. an egg, 
eggs. 

tsa k st ka hi, n. fr. tsakaka and 
lii; feathers, any portion of a bird’s 
plumage. 

tsa ka ka i ki si, n. a bird’s 
nest. 


tsa 


139 


tsi 


f 


tsa ke or tsaki,, modified v. 
root; to cause to be divided. 

tsaki, v. i., adj., to be stained 
with, to be rendered offensive; suf¬ 
fixed to nouns it forms adjectives; 
as amatsaki, tsadatsaki, et al. 

tsa ki or tsakits or sakits, adj. 
good, pretty ; often accented on last 
syllable. 

tsa ki, v. alone, by itself; used 
only with pronouns. See itsaki 
mitsaki and setsaki. 

tsa kio ti, adj. fr. tsaki; very 
good, very beautiful. 

tsa kic ti di, denotes a still 
higher degree of excellence than 
tsakicti. 

tsa ki ha. adv. quiet, quietly, 
tsa ki ha mak, v. comp., impe¬ 
rative, fr. tsakilia and arnak; sit 
quietly, stay quiet. 

tsa kihe, v., adv. fr. tsaki; well, 
in a satisfactory manner, to act 
well. 

tsa ki ke, v. t. fr. tsaki; to im¬ 
prove, to make good, to cure a dis¬ 
ease,—improved, cured, restored.— 
kitsakike is more frequently em¬ 
ployed. 

tsa kls, n. something inferior or 
worthless, a nuisance. 

tsa mak, a form of tsame, used 
in the sense of a noun.—tsamak 
isiats, its being hot is bad, i. e. the 
beat is oppressive. 

tsa me [-we], adj. hot, very 
warm.—tsawets, it is hot. 

tsa me a te [-we-], v. i. fr. 
tsame and ate; to perspire, 
tsa me he, v. t. to heat, 
tsa me ke, v. t. to make hot, to 
change from hot to cold, heated. 

tsa me ksa. adj. constantly 
warm, very warm. 


tsa mu tsa dsi [-wu-], adj. 
fr. tsamutsi; straightish, nearly 
straight, or appearing to be straight. 

tsa mu tsa du i, v. i. straight¬ 
ening. 

tsa mu tsi [-wu-], adj. straight, 
tsa mu tsi de, adj. almost 
straight. 

tsa mu tsi he, v. t. to straighten, 
tsa mu tsi ke, v. t. to straighten, 
straightened. 

tsa pi, adj. puckered, wrinkled, 
tsa ti, v., adj. smoothed, oiled, 
polished. 

tsa’ ti, v. root; or fr. tsa; stick, 
impale. 

tsa ti ke, v. t .fr. tsati; to polish, 
tsa tsu i ta ma pa, n. the pasque¬ 
flower or pulsatilla. 

tsa tsu ki, adj. fr. tsuki and ? 
tsa; hard to break, not brittle. 

tsa tsu ki ke, v. t. to render 
hard, hardened. 

tsi, n. hypotliet. word ; foot, hind 
paw. See itsi, ditsi and matsi. 

tsi, a prefix to verbs denoting a 
low or jingling sound. See tsimua 
and tsitside, 
tsi. See tsidi. 

tsi da dsi, adj. fr. tsidi; yellow¬ 
ish, orange-colored, 
tsi da du i, v. i. becoming yellow, 
tsi di, adj. yellow. In com¬ 
pound words this is often repre¬ 
sented by its first syllable ‘tsi,’ which 
may be a word wherefrom tsidi is 
derived. 

tsi di a, name as tsidie. 
tsi di a du i, v. i. becoming cold, 
tsi di e or tsi di ets, adj. cold; 
refers chiefly to reduction of tempe¬ 
rature in inorganic bodies. 

tsi di e, n. cold weather; winter 
is sometimes so called. 




tsi 


140 


ts6 


tsi di e ke, v. t. to cause to be 
cold, chilled. 

tsi di ke, v. t. fr. tsidi; to dye of 
a yellow color. 

tsi di se pi, adj. fr. tsidi and 
sipi; bay ; said in describing horses. 

tsi ko a- adj. having a marked 
but not unpleasant taste, sweet, salty, 
savory. 

tsi ko a de, adj. almost salty, 
having a slight saline taste; said of 
such “ alkali springs ” and creeks as 
have water not very strong or un¬ 
palatable. 

tsi ko a dsi, adj. sweetish, 
tsi ko a du i, v. i. becoming 
sweet; said of coffee which is being 
alternate^ sweetened and tasted. 

tsi ko a ke, v. t. to sweeten, 
sweetened. 

tsi mu a [-bua], v. i. and t. fr. 
mua ; to jingle, as metallic pendants, 
steel chains, etc. 

tsi pa, n. a marmot, a prairie- 
dog. 

tsi pa ku su ti, n. the burrow¬ 
ing owl, which dwells along with 
the prairie-dog. 

tsi pa tso pe, n. fr. tsipa and ? 
tsope; the striped marmot, Sperrno- 
philvs tridecem-lineatus. 

tsi pi, v. i. to sink, to sink in 
water. 

tsi pi de, v. i. almost sunken, 
sinking but rescued in time. 

tsi pi ke, v. t. to cause to sink; 
to scuttle, overload or upset a boat 
and make it sink. 

tsi pi ti, v. i. fr. tsipi; to be in 
a condition to sink, or x’eady to sink; 
said if something falls on the surface 
of the water, and it is yet uncertain 
whether it will sink or not; said of 


a river bank which is being gradu¬ 
ally washed away. 

tsi pi ti de, v., adj. nearly in a 
position to fall upon water ; said of 
portions of a river bluff that are 
cracked off and ready to topple, or 
of anything in danger of falling on 
water. 

tsi pi ti ke, v. t. to cause to fall 
upon water, to place in a condition 
favorable to sinking, 
tsi ta, n. the tail of a quadruped, 
tsi ta si pi sa, n. fr. tsita and 
sipisa ; the black-tailed deer. 

tsi ta ta ki, n. fr. tsita and taki; 
the white-tailed deer. 

tsi tsi de, v. i. fr. tsi and ide; 
to whisper. 

tsi tska, n. the “ prairie-hen ” of 
western Dakota — the sharp-tailed 
grouse or Tetrao pTiasianellus. 

tsi tska do kpa ka, n. fr. tsi- 
tska and dolipaka; the Prairie-hen 
People, one of the hereditary bands 
or totems of the Hidatsa tribe. 

tsi tska ic ti a, n. fr. tsitska and 
ictia; the sage-hen. 

tsi tu ki, adj. turned up, pugged, 
tska pi, v. root; denotes pressure 
on a small surface; pinch, squeeze, 
poke. 

tska ti, v. root; pass or force 
through an aperture. 

tski ti, v. root; denotes pressure 
on a small surface from different 
directions; strangle, shear, etc. 

tsku pi, v. root; bend, fold, 
double. See datskupi and patskupi. 

tso ka du i, v. i. fr. tsoki; be¬ 
coming hard, solidifying, congealing. 

tso ki, adj. hard, resisting pres¬ 
sure, but not necessarily hard to 
break. 


tso 


141 


tua 


ts6 ki he, v. i. and t. to harden, 
tso ki ke, v. t. to harden, by bak¬ 
ing or otherwise,— hardened by any 
obvious cause or process. 

tso pe, v. i. to make a chirping 
or smacking sound. 

tsu, n. half, side, division, com¬ 
partment. 

tsu, adj. (radicle); smooth, flat, 
tsu a, adj. narrow, 
tsu a de, adj. almost narrow 
enough. 

tsu a dsi, adj. narrowish, seem¬ 
ingly narrow. 

tsu a ke, v. t. to make narrow, 
tsu a ta, n. brains, 
tsu he, v. t. fr. tsu; to divide 
into two parts, to halve. 

tsu i ta do ta du, n., adv. fr. 
itadotadu; bottom-land on the near 
side of a river; in the bottom-land, 
etc. 

tsu i ta do ta ko a [-lota-], 

adv. at or on the portion of bottom¬ 
land or flood-plain on the near side 
of the river, “ on the point this side.” 

tsu i ta 6 ka du [-ru], n.,adv. 
fr. itaokadu; the part of the bottom¬ 
land beyond a river; on the opposite 
side of the river in the bottom. 

tsu i ta 6 ka ko a, adv. at or 
in the bottom on the opposite side 
of a river. 

tsu ka, adj. flat, as low ground, 
tsu ka, adv. at, or in, the bottom¬ 
land. 

tsu ki, adj. same as tsoki. 


tsu ta, n., adv. a half, the side.of 
a house, an apartment; in an apart¬ 
ment. 

tsu ta he, v. t. to break into 
halves. 

tsu ta ka, adv. within a half or 
portion, in one side. 

tsu ta ta, adv. toward one side, 
toward one half or portion. 

tsu tsu hi, v. i. to rattle or stamp 
loudly. 

tsu tsu ti, adj. smooth to the 
touch, soft. 

tse se, n. the large wolf, 
tse sa do hpaka [-no-], n. lit. 
Wolf People ; the Pawnee Indians. 

tse sa ma si, n. fr. tsesa and 
masi; a grey blanket. 

tu a, interrogative adverb, nearly 
synonymous with ‘to.’ 

tu a ka, iuter. adj. fr. tua; how 
much, how many. 

tu a ka duk, adv. fr. tuaka and 
duk; how long hence, how many 
days or nights hence. 

tu a ka ruk, adv. same as tua- 
kaduk. 

tu a ka se du[-ru], interrog. 
adv. fr. tuaka and sedu; how long 
ago, how many days ago. 

tu a kats, when tuaka stands 
alone as an interrogative it takes this 
form. 

tu a mi, interrog. adv. fr. tua 
and mi; how many. 

tu a wits, same as tuami, with 
terminal ‘ts.’ 


18 


u 


142 


uma 


U. 


u, v. to wound, to be wounded, 
u a, v. t. to envy, lie envies.— 
amats, I envy, adats, you envy, 
uats, he envies. 

u a, n. a wife, a wife by actual 
marriage; not perfectly synonymous 
with itadamia. 

u a he, v. t. to marry. T[ 200. 
u a he ke, V. t. to cause to marry, 
to give or take in marriage; said 
usually of the female. 

u a ke, v. t. to cause to be a wife, 
—married. 

u a hpi, v. t. to smash by shoot¬ 
ing. 

u a ka, n. ffr. ua and ika; a man’s 
brother’s wife. 

h a ki, n. anything used as bed¬ 
ding, except a pillow; a mattress, 
sheet, blanket, robe or skin used as 
bedding. 

u a ki ta tsi, n. fr. uaki and 
tatsi; a mattress, a tick. 

u a ksa, v. i. and t. fr. ua; to 
envy habitually, to be of an envious 
disposition. 

u a ti, v. t. to ridicule, 
u a ti ksa, v. t. to ridicule un¬ 
reasonably or habitually. 

u dsa du i, v. i. drying, becom¬ 
ing dry. 

u dsi, adj. dry, devoid of moist¬ 
ure, thirsty. 

u dsi de, adj. nearly dry. 
u dsi ke, to cause to dry, to 
place before a fire to dry,—dried, 
u e, v. i. to boil. See midue. 
u e he, v. t. to boil, he boils, 
u e tsa, n. metal of any kind, 
coin recently applied to money of 


any description and to the unit of 
our money, a dollar.—uetsa duetsa 
[luetsa], one dollar, uetsa topa, four 
dollars, uetsa itatsuhe, half a dollar. 

u e tsa hi si" si, n. (hisisi, red¬ 
dish) ; copper. 

u e tsa l du ti, n. fr. uetsa and 
iduti; a bridle-bit. 

u e tsa ka’ ti, n. (ka’ti, true ); 
gold. 

u e tsa ma i kta de", n. fr. 

uetsa and maiktade; a nail. 

u e tsa si di, n. (sidi, tawny); 
brass. 

u e tsa si pi sa, n. (sipisa, black ); 
iron. 

u hi, n. American antelope. 

’ u hi ma du ti, n. lit. antelope 
food ; the prairie sage, Artemesia. 

u i, n. paint for the face, rouge, 
vermilion. 

u i l si, n. fr. ui and isi; a paint- 
bag, a small embroidered bag for 
holding vermilion or other paint for 
the face. 

u ka ki, v. i. ffr. kaki; to roll, as a 
horse rolls himself on the ground. 

u ka ta ka zi, n. See Local 
Names. 

u ka ta ki, n. fr. uki and ataki; 
a white earth which these Indians 
use in decorating their bodies. 

u ki, n. indurated clay, compact 
earth of uniform appearance, 
u ki a ta ki, same as ukataki. 
u ma ta, n. the south, land south 
of the Hidatsa hunting-grounds. 

u ma ta ha, adv. toward the 
south, 

u ma ta ko a, adv. at the south. 



uma 


143 


z 


u ma ta ta, adv. southward, 
looking or moving south. 

u sa ti, n. east, land east of the 
Hidatsa country. 

u sa ti ft a, adv. eastward, toward 
the east. 

u sa ti ko a, adv. at the east, in 
the east. 

u sa ti ta, adv. facing the east, 
u si, n. the anal region. 

. u ti, n. base, bottom, root, larger 
extremity. 


ft ti fta, adv. toward the base or 
bottom ; qualities verbs denoting 
motion. 

u ti du, adv. in the base, bottom 
or root. 

ti ti ko a, adv. at the base, uti- 
koa and utidu are often used in the 
sense of near, beside or adjoining. 

u tsi tsa, n. a variety of change¬ 
able weasel, or so-called “ermine.” 

u zi a, v. t. to pay a visit, to meet, 
to encounter. 


W. 

w. Words heard to begin with the sound of w, may be found under 
m. See paragraphs 5, 20 and 21. 


Z. 


z. No words have been noted as beginning with z. 



LOCAL NAMES. 


The names of some localities known to the tribe are here given together 
for convenience of reference. The translations are in italics. 


a. 


a di sa i ta pa" his fr. adisa, 
ita and pahi; Song of the Ravens or 
Singing-place of the Ravens ; a high 
butte situated between the Missouri 
and Little Missouri rivers, west of 
Fort Berthold. 

a ma de ta ku si" dis, fr. 

amadeta, aku and sidis; Tawny 
Bluff; a prominent river bluff on 
the south side of the Missouri, about 
fifteen miles below the mouth of the 
Yellowstone. 

a ma de ta ma pa" his, fr. 

amadeta and mapahi; Song Bluff; 
a prominent point on the Missouri, 
below the last. 

a ma ic pu sa sas,/r. amaicpu 
and sasa; Forked Hill-top; a high 
butte south of the Missouri in the 
neighborhood of the upper Great 
Bend. 

a ma mak i ma ka da, Lands 
Crossing One Another; the lower 
Great Bend of the Missouri,near Fort 
Thompson. The derivation is indi¬ 
cated in the word mgkimakadaha, 
which see. 


a ma ti, The Missouri River. 
Some of the tribe say that the name 
comes from ama, earth , and alludes 
to its muddiness; others think it is 
from rnati, a boat , and alludes to its 
navigability. 

a ma" ti a du sa sas, fr. 

amati and adusasa; Fork of the 
Missouri; Milk river is sometimes 
so called. 

a ma ti ka za, fr. amati and 
kaza; Little Missouri River. The 
English name is a literal translation 
of the Hidatsa. 

a ma ti pa" du is, fr. amati 
and padui; Short Missouri; a small 
stream entering the Missouri from 
the south, above Fort Berthold. 

a ma tsi di o du tsi [-tsisj, 
fr. amatsidi and odutsi; Ochre Mine ; 
a place south-east of the mouth of 
the Yellowstone, where a yellow 
mineral pigment is obtained. 

a pa di a zis, fr. apadi and 
azi; Porcupine River; a stream 
entering the Missouri in Montana 
Territory. 



dah 


145 


ite 


d. 


da hpi tsa" tu a du a ma 
kis [na-], fr. dahpitsi, atu, adu 
and amaki; Place Where the 
Bear's Head Sits; a high kill ris¬ 
ing from the plateau, south-east of 
Fort Buford and north of the Little 
Missouri. 

da Bp! tsi adu ama" kis,/r. 

dalipitsi, adu and amaki; Place 
Where the Bear Sits ; the termination 
of a mountainous ridge, immedi¬ 
ately opposite the mouth of Milk 
river, Montana. 

da lipf tsi a zis; Bear River; 
Milk river, Montana. 


da’ ta a zi [-zis],/r. da’ta and 
azi; Heart River ; the Heart river 
which enters the Missouri from the 
west, above Fort Rice. 

de zi a zi [neziazis], fr. dezi 
and&zi ; Tongue River; the Tongue 
river, a branch of the Yellowstone. 

do ki da hi ta pa his [no-], 
fr. dokidahi, ita and pahi; Singing 
of the Ghosts , or Where the Ghosts 
Sing ; a high pinnacle of red rocks 
about mid-way between the Littlo 
Missouri, and Yellowstone rivers 
near the point of greatest proximity 
of the two streams. 


h. 

ha ha" tu a a du ta hes, fr. village of this tribe when they dwelt 
hakatua, Chippeway, adu, and take; on Knife river. 

Where the Chippeway Was Killed; hi da tsa ti, fr. hidatsa and ati; 
a locality near the foot of the upper Dwelling of the Hidatsa Indians ; 
Great Bend of the Missouri. the present village of the tribe at 

hi da tsa, formerly the principal Fort Berthold. 


i. 


i hie ti" a a du ta hes, Where i te ma tse e tsis, fr. ite and 

Big Forehead Was Killed ; the To- matseetsi; Face of the Chief ; the 
bacco Garden bottom, at the mouth Black Hills of Dakota, 
of Tobacco Garden creek. 


mae 


146 


mid 


m. 


ma e tsi a zis, fr. maetsi and 
azi; Knife River ; a name applied 
to two streams, one of which enters 
the Missouri from the north, above 
Fort Berthold, and the other from 
the south, below that place. 

ma ka di sta ti, fr. makadista 
and ati; House of the Infants ; a 
cavern near the old villages on 
Knife river, supposed to be inhabited 
by mysterious infants.* 
ma ode saa zi[-ne-],/V. mao- 
desa, and azi; Nothing River or 
Nameless River ; an affluent of the 
Little Missouri, entering the latter 
about one hundred miles above its 
mouth. 

ma po ksa a ti, fr. mapoksa 
and ati; Snake House ; a cave near 
the Missouri river, on the north or 
left bank, close to Snake creek. It 
is said, at some seasons to swarm 
with serpents. 

ma po ksa a ti a zi [-zis], 

Snake House River. So called by 
these Indians ; but Lewis and Clark 
have given the name as “ Snake 


creek,” and it has been thus known 
to the whites ever since. It enters 
the Missouri five miles east of Fort 
Stevenson, Dakota Territory. 

ma su" ka ak su ama sis ,fr. 
masukaaksu and amasi; Earth-trap , 
or Eagle-trap, of Coral Berry ; a 
point on the left bank of the Mis¬ 
souri, immediately below the upper 
Great Bend. See note, p. 147. 

ma ta ki a zis, Dish River; 
Platte river, Nebraska. 

ma tsu a zi [-zis], fr. matsu 
and azi; Cherry River; a stream 
which enters the Little Missouri 
from the east, above the maode- 
saazis. 

ma u" pa ki hu pa i sis, fr. 

maupaki, hupa and isis; Like the 
Handle of a Mallet ; a prominent 
bluff on the south side of the Mis¬ 
souri, nearly opposite the mouth of 
upper Knife river. 

mi da l si a zis,/r. midaisi and 
azi; Bark River; a stream which 
enters the Missouri from the south 
above the Yellowstone. 


♦The door of the cavern was but a span wide. It was said, that if you visited the cavern 
after a rainy night, you could see the tracks of the infants where they went to a distance from 
the cave and returned. Their belief concerning the fabled children was as follows:—It was 
difficult to see them, for they came out only at night and followed a wise leader who knew 
the scent of man and shunned his observation. The childless husband, after a long fast, 
would repair to the neighborhood of the cave at night and secrete himself behind a boul¬ 
der to the leeward to watch; if he saw the infants, he returned home, confident that he 
would be a father within a year, The barren Wife who desired children would, at sunset, 
lay at the mouth of the cave a tiny play-ball and a little bow and arrow. If the ball was 
missing in the morning, she believed that within a year she Would be the mother of a girl; 
while if the bow and arrow were missing, she supposed she would be the mother of a boy. 
If neither were “ taken,” she went back with little hope; and could not consult the oracle 
again until a year had elapsed. They had many other beliefs connected with the cavern. 
Since the removal of the Hidatsa to their present residence, the custom of visiting the 
cave has been abandoned. 



mid 


147 


ped 


mi da tsa pi a zis, fr. midatsapi 
and azi; Powder River or Dust River; 
the branch of the Yellowstone now 
known as Pow r der river. 

mi di ho pa [bidi-], fr. midi 
and hopa; Sacred, Medicine, or Mys¬ 
terious Water ; the Minnewakan or 
Devil’s Lake, in northern Dakota. 

mi di o da mu a zis [bidio- 
nawuazi], fr. midi, odamu and 
azi; River with Deep Spot or Channel. 
Some say that this name signifies 
the River that Rises, or River that 
Deepens, and such may be liberal 
translations of the word; hence the 
English name of Rising-water and 
the French I’eau-qui-mont. This 
stream enters the Missouri from the 
north, about twenty-five miles west 
ot the Grosventre village. 

mi di si a zis, fr. midi, isia and 
azi; Bad Water River ; the Muddy, 


a stream flowing from the north and 
entering the Missouri about twenty- 
five miles east of Fort Buford. 

mi di to hi a zis.fr. midi, tolii 
and azi; Blue Water River ; a creek 
near Fort Bertliold to the west. 

mi te a ta di ke a zis, fr. mi- 
teatadike and azi; Box Elder River; 
a stream entering the Missouri from 
the south, about thirty miles below 
the mouth of the Yellowstone. 

mi tsi a da zi [mitsianazi], 
prob. fr. mi’, tsi ortsidi, and azi; the 
Yellowstone river. 

mi tsii tamidaksis,//’. mitsi, 
ita and midaksi; Palisade of the 
Wedge; a high conical hill in the 
valley of the Little Missouri, some 
eighty miles south-east of the mouth 
of the Yellowstone, a prominent 
landmark. 


P* 

pa tskas, fr. patska; the Coteau the bottom-land in the neighborhood 
of the Missouri. of Dry Fork, on the road between 

pe de tski' hi i ta a ma si's, Forts Buford and Stevenson.* 
Eagle-trap of Crow-(Crop) Breast; 


* A great many places are named by these Indians, as somebody’s amasi’, eagle-trap or 
earth-trap. An explanation of this seems advisable. Late in the autumn or early in the 
winter, when they go out on their winter hunt, a few families seek some quiet spot in the 
timber and make a camp with a view to catching eagles. After pitching their tents they 
first build a small, roundish, wooden lodge, where the ceremonies, supposed to be indis¬ 
pensable, are performed; and then make several traps on high places among the neighbor¬ 
ing hills. Each trap consists of a hole dug in the earth and covered with sticks, sods, etc.: 
a small opening is left in the covering; a dead rabbit, grouse, or other animal is tied on 
top; and an Indian is secreted in the excavation below. The eagle, seeing the bait, 
sweeps down and fastens his claws in it; but, the bait being secured, he is unable to 
remove it. When his claws are stuck, the Indian puts his hand out through the opening, 
and, catching the eagle by both legs, draws him into the hole and ties him firmly. The 
trapper then rearranges the top of his trap and waits for another eagle. In this way many 
eagles are caught; they are then brought alive into camp, the tails are plucked out and 
the bird is set at liberty, to suffer, perhaps, a similar imprisonment and mutilation at 
some future time. The religious ceremonies connected with the trapping, are interesting, 
but too numerous to be described in this place. When the trapping season is over they 
break up the camp; and, if the locality is not already provided with a name, they call it 
the amasi’, or earth-trap, of whoever was master of ceremonies during the season. Only 
two instances of this manner of naming are given above. 



tah 


148 


uka 



ta lau i ki sis, fr. tahu and ikisi; ti pi a a zis or tipianazis, 

Nest of the Thunder; a prominent Mud River; the Big Muddy river, a 
flat-topped hill lying south of the stream flowing from the north and 
Missouri, near the amaicpusasas. entering the Missouri about twenty 

miles west of Fort Buford. 


TI. 


u ka ta ka zis, fr. ukiataki and 
azi; White-earth River. The White 
Earth river enters the Missouri from 
the north in W. long. 102° 30' (near¬ 


ly); it w T as formerly the extreme 
western boundary of Minnesota Ter¬ 
ritory. 



SHEA’S 


AMERICAN LINGUISTICS. 


SERIES II. 

No. 2. 








HIDATSA (MINNETAREE) ENGLISH 


DICTIONARY. 


BY 


WASHINGTON 


MATTHEWS. 


NEW YORK: 

CRAMOIS Y PRESS. 
1874. 











SOUNDS OF LETTERS IN THE HID ATS A 
WORDS. 


a — a in father, or a (short) in what. 
a = u in tun. 

e = ei in their, or e (short) in them. 
i = i in marine, or i (short) in tin 
o = o in note. 
u = u in rude. 

The apostrophe (’) denotes an aspirated vowel. 

C = German eh in ich. 
li = German cfi in machen, nearly, 
s = sh in shun. 
z = z in azure. 

The other letters have nearly, or quite, the ordinary 
English sounds, 

The letters h, m and w are interchangeable ; so also are 
d, l, n and r. 











ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY. 


Abase, v. t. isiake. 

Abash, v. t. itodike, kiitodike. 
Abating, par. kadistadui. 
Abdomen, n. edi. 

Abed, adv. maaduRapikoa. 
Abject, adj. adiasadsi ka’ti. 
Aboard, adv. matikoa, mati ama- 
lioka. 

Abode, n. ati, atike. 

Abolish, v. t. ludesake. 

Above, pr ., adv. aka, akoka. 
Abridge, v. t. kipaduike. 

Absorb, v. t. daRupi, liupi. 
Accelerate, v. t. kibitake. 
Accelerating, par. liitadui. 
Accept, v.t. dutse. 

Accompany, v. t. ikupa, ikupa de. 
Accomplished, par. komi, kiko- 
mike. 

Ache, v. i. ade, kiade. 

Add, v. t. ikupake. 

Adhere, v. i. kaditskapa. 

Adjust, v. t. kiksa. 

Admire, v. t. kideta, ite. 

Adult, n. maictia. 

Advance, v. t. kiitsikake. 
Afloat, adv. dakapihi. 

Afraid, adj. kie, kiets. 

After, adv. ipita, ipitakoa. 
Afternoon, n. midimapedupahi- 
daksipi. 

Afterwards, adv. ipitadu. 
Agitate, v. t. liakalie. 

Ago, adv. sedu. Long ago, tata- 
koa. 


Ahead, adv. itekoa, itsika. 

Alike, adv. maksese, maksiaka 
[waksiakats]. 

Alive, adj. tetats, liidakatsa. 

All, adj. etsa, liakalieta. 

Aloft, adv. hakoka. 

Alone, adv. itsaki (mitsaki). 
Also, adv. isa. 

Alter, v. t. kiiliake, iliake. 
American, n. maetsiictia. 

Amidst, prep, dumatadu [numa- 
taru.J 

Ample, adj. itski, itskits. 
Anecdote, n. mazi. 

Angle, n. adupaRi.— v. i. mua 
kikidi. 

Angry, adj. adelie. 

Annihilate, v. t. kidesake. 
Another, n. ilia, aduiha. 
Antelope, n. ulii. 

Antiquate, v. t. liieke, kiliieke. 
Antler, n. aziRami. 

Anus, n. uzi. 

Apart, adj. ihadu, iliakoa, maki- 
Rita. 

Apex, n. icpu, adufcpu. 

Appear, v. i. ate. 

Approach, v. t. kiatseke. 

Apron, n, isutipsaki. 

Aqueous, adj. miditsi. 

ARICKAREElNDIANS,7l.adakadallO. 

Arise, v. i. iduki, kiduba. 

Arm, n. ada, adaaduictia. 

Around, adv. iaRalia. 

Arouse, v. t. itsilie. 


19 



Aro 


150 


Ben 


Arrange, v. t. kiksa. 

Arrow, n. ita, maita. 
Arrow-case, n. maitaisi. 
Arrow-head, n. italii’, maitalii’. 
Arrow-quills, n. itaisu.maitaisu. 
Artichoke, n. kaksa. 

Ash, n. mispa. 

Ashamed, adj. itodi, itodike. 
Ashes, n. midatsapi. 

Asleep, adj. liidami. 
Assinneboine Indians, n. liidu- 
sidi. 


B 

Baby, n. makadista, makidaksi. 
Back, n. isita, adv. ipita, ipitadu. 
Backbone, n. isitabidu. 

Backward, adv. ipitakoa, ipitaba, 
isitakoa, isitaba. 

Bacon, n. masiitadabpitsisui, 
sui. 

Bad, adj. isia. 

Bad lands, n. amasia, amasipe. 
Badger, n. amaka. 

Bag, n. isi. 

Baker, n. madaliapi-akulifdi. 

Bald, adj. ada desa. 

Ball, n. mjiotapi. 

Band, n. icke. 

Bank, n. amadeta, midideta. 
Banner, n. madakapilii. 

Barge, n. mida-mati. 

Bark, n. midaisi,midisi [bidisi].— 
v. i. muadaki.— v. t. daliapi. 

Barrel, n. midiope kakibi. 
Barter, v. t. mailiu [bailiu, wa- 
ihu]. 

Base, n. uti, aduuti.— adj. isia. 
Basin, n. matsamidi. 

Basket, n. midabasi, [bidabasi]. 
BAT,n. isuatisia. 

Bathe, v. rnidipi, midipike [bi- 
dipij. 

Battle, n. makimakia. 


At, pi'ep. ka, koa. 

Attempt, v. t. maike [wailie]. 
Auger, n. mfda-ikibopike. 

Aunt, n. isami, ika. 

Auricle, n. akubi, apa. 

Aurora Borealis, n. apabiada- 
ba, amasitakoa-amabati. 

Autumn, n. mata. 

Autumnal, adj. matadu. 

Awake, adj. itsi, liidamitats. 
Awl, n. matsito, matsitoictia. 

Axe, n. maiptsa, maiptsadaka. 


Bay, adj. tsidisipi. 

Beads, n. akutolii, maabiduba. 
Beak, n. tsakaka apa. 

Bean, n. amazi. 

Bear, n. dabpitsi. 

Bear, v. t. ki; edede. 

Beard, n. iki. 

Beat, v. t. diki. 

Beautiful, adj. tsaki [sakits], ite- 

tsaki. 

Beaver, n. midapa [bidapa, mira- 
pa]. 

Bed, n. adubapi, itadubapi, maa- 
dubapi. 

Beef, n. miteiduksiti. 

Beetle, n. pedakupa’te. 

Before, prep , adv. itekoa, itsika. 
Beg, v. t. kadi. 

Beggar, n. akukadiksa. 

Behind, adv. ipitadu, ipitakoa. 
Behold, v. t. ika, ikada’, ikaka. 
Belch, v. i. psuki. 

Believe, v. t. idie. 

Bell, n. maitamua. 

Below, prep., adv. miktata,mik- 
takoa, utikoa. 

Belt, n. maipasaki, maikipasaki. 
Bend, v. t. dutskupi, patskupi. 
Bent, part, kipatskupike. 
Benumb, v. t. otsbamike. 



Bes 


151 


Buf 


Bespatter, v. t. opape. 

Bewitcii, v. t. dusk a. 

Beyond, prep, itaokadu, itaoka- 
koa, oka. 

Bid, v. t. iske. 

Big, adj. ictia. 

Bigger, adj. ictia itaokakoa. 
Billow, n. mididabisi. 

Bind, v. t. duti. 

Bird, n. tsakaka. 

Bisect, v. t. dopalie, dopalieke. 
Bison, n. mite, kedapi. 

Bit, n. kausta abpi; uetsa iduti. 
Bite, n. adudatsa,— v. t. datsa, 
datapi [latapi]. 

Black, adj. sipi, sipisa. 
Black-bird, n. tsakaka sipisa. 
Black-dye-stuff, n. isipisake. 
Blacken, v. t. sipibe, sipisake. 
Blackish, adj. sipisadsi. 
Bladder, n. usikadiibi. 

Blanket, n. itasi, masi, uaki. 
BLEAcn, v. t. ibotakike, kiatakike. 
Bleed, v. i. idibu. 

Blind, adj. ista desa. 

Blood, n. idi. 

Bloody’, adj. iditsaki. 

Blossom, n. odakapaki.— v. i. 
dakapaki. 

Blow, v. t. kadse, katsi. 

Blue, adj. tolii— dye-stuff, n. 
itobike, ikitobike. 

Bluisii, adj. tobadsi, tolii si. 
Bluff, n. amadeta, amadetaku- 
maku. 

Blunt, adj. sasuki. 

Boar, n. masiitadabpitsi kedapi. 
Board, n. midatsuka. 

Boat, n mati. 

Bodkin, n. matsitoka. 

Body, n. ibo, (lio, dibo, mabo). 
Boil, n. aduitudi, adupua. 

Boil, v. i. inidue [bidue].— v. t. 
midueke. 

Bold, adj. kiadetsi. 

Bone, n. bidu. 


Bonnet, n. apoka.’mia apoka. 

Boot, n. midabupa [bidabupa]. 

Border, n. deta, adudeta. 

Bosom, n. imaki. 

Bottle, n. midiaduiisi [bidielui- 
isi]. 

Bottom, n. mikta, uti. 

Bow, n. itaduba, miduba. 

Bowels, n. sipa. 

Bowl, n. matsamidikaza. 

Box,/i. maiope, midaiope, midiope 
[bidiope]. 

Box-elder, n. miteatadike. 

Boy, n. makadistamatse. 

Braid, n. adaiduti.— v. t. daktsuti. 

Brain, n. tsuata. 

Brass, n. uetsasidi. 

Bray t e, n. maadukiadetsi. 

Brave, adj. kiadetsi. 

Bread, n. madaliapi, madabapi- 
bopi. 

Break, v. t. adabobi, dabobi, da- 
kabobi, bobi, dubobi, pabolii; dak 
ata [nakabobi, rubolii, nakata], etc. 

Breast, n. imaki, a’tsi. 

Breech-cloth, n. idiipsaki. 

Brethren, n. itametsa. 

Bridle, n. iduti. 

Bright, adj. itsitsi, kaditska. 

Bring, v. t. akliu, kiakbu. 

Broad, adj. soki, sasuki. 

Broom, n. masiiba. 

Broth, n. liupa. 

Brother, n. iaka (miaka, diaka), 
itadu (matadu, ditadu), itametsa 
(matametsa, ditametsa), itsuka (mat- 
suka, ditsuka). 

Bruise, n. odaksaki.— v. t. dak- 
sg,ki. 

Buck, n. tsitataki kedapi. 

Bucket, n. midaba. 

Buckskin, n. tsitataki odabpi, a- 
tisia. 

Buffalo, n. See bison. 

Buffalo-robe, n. dabpi, itasi, 
masi, mite-odabpi [bite-orabpij. 


Bui 


152 


Col 


Bulky, adj. titsi. Butcher, n. akukitalie. 

Bull, n. kedapi. Butter, n. a’tsimidi-tsada. 

Bullet, n. adupoadui. Button, n. ikatipe, imakikatipe, 

Bundle, n. makidaksi.— v. t. ki- maikatipe. 
daksi. Buy, v. t. maiku. 

Burn, v. t. adalia, adakiti, adapapi. 


c 

Cache, n. amaisi, kokatiisi. 

Cake, n. madaliapi tsikoa. 

Calf, n. daktsidi [naktsidi], mite- 
idaka. 

Calico, n. masiiRipuzi. 

Cambric, n. masiiRiRapi. 

Camp, n. ati, adati. 

Candle, n. midaiamallati. 
Candlestick, n. madaiamaliati- 
ioki. 

Candy, n. matsikoa-katski, matsi- 
koa-puzi. See sugar. 

('annon, n. midulia-aduliopi-ictia. 
Canoe, n. midaduetsa [bidaluetsa]. 
Cap, n. apoka. 

Captive, n. da’ki. 

Caress, v. t. kidalipa. 

Cart, n. lialxatua midiikaki. 

Cave, n. ama-aduliopi. 

Cease, v. liaka’ta, kiliaka’take. 
Cedar, n. midaliopa. 

Cemetery, n. dokteodusa. 

Centre, n. dumata ka’ti. 

Central, dumatakoa. 

Certain, adj. ka’ti, ka’timats. 
Change, d. t. iliake, kiihake. 
Chair, n. midaiakaki. 

Channel, n. odamu. 

Cheap, adj. imasi kausta. 

Check, v. t. kiliaka’take. 

Checker, v. t. tnakiapeke. 
Checkered, adj. makiape. 

Cheek, n. dodopa. 

Cherry, n. matsu.— tree, matsua. 
Chew, v. t. dasa, duti [rutij. 
Cheyenne Indians, n. itasupuzi. 
Chicken, n. tsitska, masiitatsa- 
kaka idaka. 


Chief, n. matseetsi. 

Child, n. daka, idaka, makadista. 
Chill, v. t. kiliapake. 

Chimney, n. atisi, aduue. 

Chin, n. ika. 

Chippeway Indians, n. lialiatua. 
Chirp, v. i. odaki. 

Choke, v. t. dota dutskiti, dutapi. 
Chop, v. t. daktsaki [naktsaki], 
dakamitsi. 

Circle, n. adukakilii. 

Circular, adj. kakiRi. 

Clam, n. matoke. 

Clarify, v. t. deliike, kideliike. 
Claw, n. tsakaka itsi. 

Clay, n. ama, uki. 

Clean, v. t. dusuki, dutskisi, liat- 
sa, ilia kidesake. 

Clear, adj. delii, oliati. 

Cliff, n. ama daliapesi. 

Clip, v. t. datskiti. 

Clock, n. midiikikiski ictia. 
Close, v. t. makipataki. — adj. 
atse. 

Cloth, n. masiiRitatsi. 

Clothe, v. t. okata, ituRi okata. 
Clothes, n. ilioisi. 

Cloud, n. apaRi, apaRi adusipisa. 
Cloyed, adj. Rapati, Rapatiksa. 
Club, n. midakaza titsi. 

Coal, n. amaadalia. 

Coat, n. ituRi, matse ituRi. 

Cob, n. hupa, koliati-Rupa. 
Cochineal, n. iliisike. 

Coffee, n.amazisipisa.maadaRa; 
midisipia [minisipisa], matsikoa. 
Cohebe, v. i. makikaditskapa. 
Cold, adj. akliapa, Rapa, tsidia. 


Com 


153 


Dec 


Comb, n. ikidulioki, maadaikidu- 
lioki, maikidul’ioki.— v. t. dulioki, 
kiduftoki. 

Combat, n. makimakia. 

Come, v. i. liu, ate. 

Command, v. t. iske, ske. 


Companion, n. 


?■ 


idakoe,(madakoe, 
didakoe), iko’pa, 
(mako’pa, diko’- 
Comrade, n. j pa). 

Confine, n. adudeta, deta.— v. t. 
duti*. 


Conical, adj tsolii, tsualie. 
Contain, v. t. itski, matu. 
Continue, v. i. daka, liidakatsa. 
Contract, v. t. kikadistake, ki- 
kaustake. 

Converse, v. t. ikupa ide. 
Convex, adj. poaduadsi. 

Cook, n. akamadihe.— v. t. madi- 
lie. 


Cool, v. t. katsi, tsldiake. 

Copper, n. uetsakisisi. 

Copse, n. mida-sikla, mida-sipa. 
Copy, ». t. kutski. 

Cord, n. asu, matalipi. 

Corn, n. hopati,kohati,madaskihe. 
— COB, liupa. — husk, liopatisi.— 
stalk, koliatia. 

Corpse, n. dokte [nokte]. 
Corpulent, adj. idipi. 

Cost, n. imasi. 

Costly, adj. imasi aliu. 
Cottonwood, n. maku. 


Cough, v. i. liua, huaksa. 
Country, n. ama, itama. 

Court, v. t. akape, mia akape. 
Cover, n. iitipe, isi, maisi. 

Cow, n. mite, masiitamite. 
Cowardly, adj. kiadetsitats. 
Cradle, n. maidakudsi, maikida- 
kudsi, makadistaidakudsi. 

Crane, n. apitsa. 

Craze, v. t. kimadaliapake, mada- 
liapake. 

Crazy, adj. madaliapa. 

Cree Indians, n. salie. 

Crescent, n. midikidalie. 
Crimson, adj. hisadsi.— dye¬ 
stuff, n. iliisadsike. 

Crooked, adj. sakupi. 

Crooken, v. t. kisakupike, saku- 
pike. 

Crop, n. ilii. 

Cross, adj. atska.— v. t. akalipi, 
tadi. 

Crow, n. pedetska. 

Crow Indians, n. kiliatsa. 

Cry, v. i. imia. 

Cub, n. idaka. 

Cup, n. midiiliike. 

Cupboard, n. matakiadukidusa. 
Cure, v. t. kidesake, kitsakike 
tsakike. 

Currant, n. mitektsatsa. 

Cut, v. t. daktsaki, datskiti pam- 
itsi, pat sake, etc. 


Dakota Indians, n. itahatski. 
Damage, v. t. isiake, kiisiake. 
Damp, adj. adatskui. 

Dance, n. makidisi, paduididi.— 
v. i. kidisi. 

Dark, adj. lia’pesa, sipisadsi. 
Darken, v. t. lia’peseke, kilia’pe- 
seke, aduoktsilie. 

Daub, v. t. ipkiti, opape. 
Daughter, n. lka (ka, maka, dikaj. 


D. 

Dawn, n. ata, atade, kiduhakute. 
Day, n. mape. 

Dead, adj. te, tets. 

Deaf, adj. akulii desa. 

Debase, v. t. kiisiake. 

Deceitful, adj. mitapaksa. 
Deceive, v. t. mltapa [witapa], 
mitapadsi. 

Decrease, v. t. kadistake, kau- 
stake, kikadistake, kikaustake. 




Dee 


154 


Dyi 


Decreasing, part, kadistadui, 
kaustadui, kikadistadui, kikaustadui. 
Deep, adj. damu, nawuts]. 
Deepen, v. t. damuke, kidamuke. 
Deer, n. tsitasipisa, tsitataki. 
Degenerating, part, isiadui, kii- 
siadui. 

Deity, n. itakatetas, itsikama 
liidis. 

Delirious, adj. madakapa. 
Deride, v. t. uati. 

Descend, v. i. miktata de. 
Desert, n. amaisia. 

Deter, v. t. kiliaka’take. 

Devour, v. t. kiduti [kiruti]. 

Die, v. i. te, ta. 

Different, adj. ika. 

Dirt, n. ama, ika. 

Dirty, adj. amatsaki, ikatsaki, 
tsadatsaki. 

Dirty, v. t. amatsakike, ikatsa- 
kike, tsadatsakike, kiamatsakike, etc. 
Discover, v. t. odapi. 

Disease, n. ikoade, maikoade. 
Dish, n. mataki. 

Dishonest, adj. asadiksa. 
Dislike, v. t. iku’pade, iku’padsi, 
kidesitats. 

Dislocate, v. t. kipsuti, psuti. 
Displease, v. t. da’taisiake [na’ 
taisiake]. 

Disregard, v. t. ikatats. 
Dissipated, v. t. madukapaksa. 
Distant, adj. tisa. 

Distend,®. £.dakapusi,kidakapusi. 
Distress, v. t. kida’taisiake. 
Divide, v. t. — in two, dopake, 
[nopake ].—in three, damike[naw- 
ikej.— in four, topake, kitopake, 
etc. 

Diverge, v. i, kami [kawi]. 
Divorce, v. t. haketa, lialietake. 
Dizzy, adj. tsaliidumidi. 

Doe, n. tsitataki mika. 


Dog, n. masuka. 

Dog Band, n. masuka icke. 

Doll, n. makadistake. 

Dollar, n. uetsa duetsa [luetsaj. 
Done, part, komi, [kowi, kowits]. 
Door, n. mide [bide]. 

Double, v. t. patskupi. 

Dough, n. madaliapi tsa. 

Dove, n. madaitakupeic"ki. 

Down, adv. miktadu [wiktaru], 
miktakca [wiktakoa]. 

Downward, adv. miktata [wik- 
tataj. 

Doze, v. i. kamide, liidamide. 
Drag, v. t. duliade. 

Drain, v. t. dakupi, kidakupi. 
Dream, v. i. masiade. 

Dress, n. ikoisi.— v. t. okata. 
Dried, part, kiudsike. 

Drink, n. oze.— v. t. hi, midiki. 
Drop, v. i. pati, kipati.— v. t. 
patilie, patike, kipatike. 

Drowned, part, tsipiik tets. See 
tsipi. 

Drowsy, adj. kamicti, liidamicti. 
Drum, n. midaka.— stick, mida- 
kadiki. 

Drunk, adj. madakapa. 

Dry, adj. udsi.— v. i. udsike, ki¬ 
udsike. 

Duck, n. mikaka. 

Dull, adj. sasuki, sold. 

Dung, n. aduedi, pedi. 

During, adv. du, kuadu, sedu. 
Dusk, n. oktsiade. 

Dust, n. midatsapi. 

Dwell, v. i. amaki, amakadaki. 
Dye, v. t. —black, sipisake. — 
blue, toliike, kitokike.— red, lii- 
sike, kiliisike.— yellow, tsidike, ki- 
tsidike. 

Dye stuff, n. See names of differ¬ 
ent colors. 

Dying, part, tade, ladets. 





Eag 


155 


Fat 


E. 


Eagle, to. ipRoki, maisu, tsatsi. 
Ear, n. akuRi.— of corn, liopati. 
Early, ado. itsikakoa, kidubaku- 
tedu. 

Earth, to. ama. 

Earthward, a<Z». ainakoa, amata. 
East, to. usati.— ern, usatikoa.— 
ward, usatiRa. 

Eat, v. t. duti, kiduti, pe. 

Eater, to. akuduti. 

Ebb, v. i. kidamoki. 

Edge, to. aduaptsa, adudeta, deta. 
Egg, to. tsakakadaki. 

Eight, adj. dopapi [nopapi]. 
Eighth, adj. idopapi. 

Eighthly, ado. idopapidu. 
Eighteen, adj. alipidopa. 

Eighty, adj. dopapitika. 

Elastic, to. idupupi.— adj. dupupi. 
Elbow, n. ispaRi, (maspaRi, dis- 
paRi). 

Eleven, adj. aRpiduetsa [aRpil- 
uetsa]. 

Elk, n. madoka [maroka]. 
Elsewhere, ado. ihadu, ibakoa. 
Emaciated, adj. RadaRiksa. 
Embers, to. midabapoksa. 
Embrace, v. t. kidaRpa. 

Ejierge, v. i. ate, atebe. 

Emetic, n. maikade. 

Empty, v. t. kidaRupi, kipaRue. 

F 

Face, n. ite. 

Fair, adj. deRi, oRati. 

Fall, n. See autumn.— v. i. Rue, 
pati, kipati. 

Fan, n. maikidakudi.— v. t. daku- 
di, kidakudi. 

Far, ado. tisa, oka tisa. 

Farm, n. adukati.— v. t. amaoze. 


Encamp, o. i. atihe. 

Enchant, o. t. dusku. 

End, n. ataka, icpu. At end, a- 
takakoa. 

Enemy, n. maiba. 

Enemy-woman Band, n. maiba- 
miaicke. 

Enl.auge, o. t. ictiake, kiictiake. 
Enough, ado. abu, komi. 

Enrage, c. t. kiadebeke. 

Enter, o. t. midedi [bidedi], pi. 
Entire, adj. Rakabeta. 

Envy, o. t. ua, uaksa. 

Equal, adj. maksese, maksiaka. 
Equalize, o. t. makseseke, kima- 
kseseke, etc. 

Erase, v. t. adasuki. dusuki. 
Ermine, n. utsitsa. 

Evening, n. oktsiade, o’pa. 
Examine, o. t. kibiski. 

Excavate, v. t. bo’pike, kibo’pike. 
Exhibit, o. i. I atebe, atebeke. 
Expose, v. t. ) kiatebe.kiatebeke. 
Extend, v. t. kidakabe. 
Exterminate, o. t. kidesake, etsa 
kidesake. 

External, adj. atasikoa. 
Extinguish, v. t. katsi. 

Extract, v. t. duska, pasku. 

Eye, n. ista.— lash, istapi—. lid, 
istadaRpi.— wash, istaoze. 


Fast, adj. Rita, tsoki. 

Fasten, v. t. duti, kitsokike. 

Fat, n. sui, tsada.— adj. idipi. 
Father, to. ate, tatis. 

Fatigue, o. t. dabeka’tike, kidalie- 
ka’tike. 

Fatigued, ad), daheka’ti. 
Fatten, v. t. idipike, kiidipike, 


Faw 


15 G 


Gar 


Fawn, n. tsitataki idaka. 

Fear, v. t. kie. 

Feast, n. maihadi. 

Feather, n. hi, tsakakalii. 

Feed, v. t. kidutike, maduti ku. 
Female, n. adumika, mia, mika, 
mikats. 

Femur, n. idikihidu. 

Few, aclj. kausta. 

Field, n. adukati. 

Fierce, adj. atska. 

Fifteen, adj. alipikihu. 
Fifteenth, adj. ialipikihu. 
Fifth, adj. ikihu. 

Fifthly, adv. ikifiudu. 

Fifty, adj. kiliuapitika. 

Fight, n. See battle.— v. t. kim- 
akia [kiwakia]. 

Figured, adj. puzi. 

Fill, v. t. kimaazike, maazilie, oze. 
Find, v. t. odapi, okipapi. 

Fine, adj. tamulii [tawuhi], tamu- 
liidi. 

Finger, n: sakiadutsamilie, isaki- 
adntsamilie. — nail, sakiicpu, isa- 
kiicpu.— ring, sakioptsati. 

Finish, v. t. komike [kovvilie]. 
Fire, n. midalia. 

First, adj. itsika. 

Firstly, adv. itsikadu. 

Fish, n. mua.— v. See angle. — 
hook, muaidutskupi.— line, muaid- 
utsi. 

Fit, v. tf.itski. 

Five, num. adj. kiliu. 

Fix, v. t. kiksa. 

Flag, n. madakapihi. 

Flat, n. amatsuka.— adj. tsuka. 
Flay, v. t. daliipi. 

Flee, v. i. kada [kara]. 

Fleet, adj. hita, hitats. 


Fleetly, adv. hita, liitalia. 
Flesh, n. iduksiti. 

Float, v. t. dakapiliike.— v. i. da- 
kapilii, kidakapihi. 

Flour, n. kohatitapa. 

Flower, n. and v. i. See blossom. 
Fly, n. maapoksa. 

Foam, n. pulii. 

Fog, n. pue. 

Foggy, adj. pue, pueksa. 

Fold, v. t. kipamudsi, pamudsi, 
patskupi. 

Fond, adj. old. 

Food, n. maduti. 

Fool, n. maduhta. 

Foot, n. itsi.— print, itsiti. 
Forehead, n. ilii. 

Forest, n. mida. 

Forget, v. t. kidahise. 

Fork, n. adusasa; maipatsati; 
mika’idutsi. 

Forked, adj. sasa. 

Formerly, adv. itsikadu. 

Fort, n. akumakikua ati. 

Forty, adj. topapitika. 

Forward, adj., adu.itelia, itekoa. 
Four, num. adj. topa. 

Fourth, n. adj. itopa. 

Fourteen, num. adj. ahpitopa. 
Fox, n. ilioka.— trap, iliokaitipe. 
Fox Band, n. iliokaicke. 
Fragrant, adj. iditsitsaki. 

Fresh, adj. tsa. 

Friend, n. See comrade. 

Frog, n. saaka, saka. 

Fruit, n. makata. 

Fry, v. t. miditi. 

Full, adj. maazi. 

Fur, n. aduki, hi, i. 

Further, adv. itaokadu, okadu, 
okakoa. 


G-. 


Gait, n. odidi. 

Gander, n. mida kedapi 


Garment, n. itulii. 
GARNisn, v. t. iptsi. 


Gar 


157 


Hoa 


Garter, n. idikediksa. 

Gaze, v. i. ika ka’ti. 

Get, v. t. dutsi. 

Ghost, n. dokidalii [nokidal’ii], 
idalii. 

Girdle, n. maipasaki,— ®. kipa- 
saki, pasaki. 

Girl, n. makadistamia, miakaza. 
Give, v. t. ku, kiku, muk. 

Glad, adj. da'tatsaki.— v. t. kida’- 
tatsakike. 

Glass, n. maikika. 

Glisten, v. i. kaditska. 

Gloomy, adj. apaliitatsi. 

Glove, n. buki. 

Glue, n. maikaditskapa.— v. kika- 
ditskapake. 

Gldtton, n. akudutiksa. 

Go, v. dakoa, de, koe, kada. 

Gold, n. uetsa, uetsaka’ti. 

Gone, part. dets. 

Good, adj. tsaki, tsakits [sakits]. 
Goose, n. mida. 

Gosling, midaidaka. 
Grandchild, n. itamapisa, (mata- 
mapisa, ditamapisa). 


Grandfather, n. adutaka. 
Grandmother, n. iku. 

Grape, n. masipisa.— vine, rnasi- 
pisaa. 

Grasp, n. adalielii. 

Grass, n. mika’ [bika’]. 

Gratis, adv. isatsa. 

Grave, n. dokteodusa amakoa. 
Gravel, n. mi’kaza. 

Grease, n. tsada.— v. kitsadatsa- 
kike. 

Greasy, adj. tsadatsaki. 

Green, adj. mika’toliisa. 

Grey, adj. liota.— ish, liotisa. 
Grind, *. t. pa, pi. kipa. 

Groove, n. aduliakupi. 

Ground, n. ama. 

Grouse, n. tsitska [sitska]. 

Grow, v. i. apadi.— v. t. apadike, 
kiapadike. 

Gully, n. amadaktsaki. 

Gun, n. midufia [bidulia],— pow¬ 
der, midatsapi [bidatsapi]. 

Gypsum, n. madolia. 


H. 


Hack, v. t. dakaptsi. 

Hail, n. nia’kabpitami. 

Hair, n. ada, bi, i. 

Half, n. adj. itatsu, itatsulie, 
tsuta. 

Halve, v. i. kidopake, tsutalie. 
Hammer, n. makidiki. 

Hand, n. isaki, saki. 
Handkerchief, n. plietaisi. 
Handle, n. hupa. 

Hang, v. t. ikoki, kiikoki. 

Happy, adj. da’ta-tsaki. 

Hard, adj. tsatsuki, tsoki. 
Harden, v. t. tsatsukike, tsokike, 
kitsokike. 

Hare, n. itaki, itaksipisa. 

Has, v. raatu. 


Hasten,®, i. sidisi.— v.t. sidisike, 
kisidisike. 

Hat, n. apoka. 

Hatchet, n. maiptsadaka. 

Hate, ®. t. iku’pa. 

Haw, n. mamua [mabua].— tree, 
mamuaa. 

Hay t , n. mika’udsi. 

He, pron. i, se. 

Head, n. atu.— ache, atuade.— 
dress, apoka. 

Heal, ®. t. kitsakike. 

Hear, ®, t. kikua. 

Heart, n. da’ta [na’ta]. 

Heat, n. maade, tsame.— ®. t. 
tsamelie [tsawehe]. 

Heavens, n. apatii. 


20 


Hea 


158 


Kic 


\ 


Heavy, adj. daktsia [naktsiats.] 
Her, pron. i, ita. Hers, itamae. 
Heron, n. apitsatolii. 

Hiccough, v. i. liatsakeki. 

Hide, v. t. aboe [aRue], ialioe. 
High, adj. maku. 

Hill, n. amadia, amadeta, ama- 
maku. 

Him ,pron. i.— self, icki. His, ita¬ 
mae. 

Hit, v. t. diki. 

Hoe, n. amae .—of bone, bidu- 
amae.—OF iron, uetsa-amae. 

Hog, n. masiitadaRpitsi. 

Hold, v. t. adaReRi, optsati, oki. 
Hole, n. aduhopi. 


I. 

I, pron. ma, mi, [wa, ba, wi, bi]. 

Ice, n. maduRi. 

Icicle, n. maduRi-icpu. 

Ignorant, adj., v. i. adaRise. 
Illuminate, v. t. kiamaRatike. 
Imitate, v. t. kutski, ikutski. 
Imitator, n. maikutskisa. 
Impoverish, v. t. kiadiasadsike. 

In, prep, amahoka, ka. 

Inclose, v. t. kiamaliokake. 
Increase, v. t. kiabuke, kiictiake. 
Indent, v. t. datapi [latapi]. 
Indian, n. amakadoRpaka [ama- 
kanoRpaka], 


Hollow, adj. bopi, bo’pits. 
Hominy, n. makipa. 

Horn, n. azi, aziRami. 

Horse, n. itsuasuka, itasuka. 

Hot, adj. tsame [tsawets]. 

House, n. ati. 

How, adv. tose.— many, tuami.— 
much, tuaka. 

Hum, v. i. boike. 

Hundred, adj. pitikictia. 
Hungry, adj. adiiti. 

Hunt, v. t. kidi, kikidi. 

Hurry, v. i. sidisi. 

Husband, n. kida, kidas. 

Husk, n. bopatiisi. 


Inferior, adj. isia itaokadu. 
Infirm, adj. itsiitats. 

Inflate, v. t. dakapusi [nakapusi]. 
Ingenious, adj. kiadetsi. 

Inhale, v. t. bi. 

Ink, n. amasipisa. 

Insect, n. mapoksa. 

Inside, n. amabo.— adj. amaboka. 
Intersect, v. t. dumatitski. 
Intoxicate, v. t. maduRapake. 
Iron, n. uetsa, uetsasipisa. 

It. pron. i, se. 

Itchy, adj. Raka, Ridia. 

Itself, pron. icki. 


J. 


Jar, v. t. opsasa. 

Jealous, adj. miaRteksa [wiaR- 
teksa]. 

Jingle, *. i. tsimua.— x. t. kitsim- 
uake. 


Jog, v. t. dapsuti [napsuti]. 
Joint, n. adusuka. 
Journey, n. didi. 

Juice, n. adumidi. 


K. 

Keep, v. t. e. I will keep, me- Key, n. mideiduska, midiopeidu- 
wits. ska. 

Kettle, n. midaRa. Kick, v. t. adaRape. adape. 


t 


Kid 


159 


Lyn 


Kidney, n. aboka. 

Kill, v. t. ta, talie, kitahe. 

Kindle, v. t. kadaba. 

Kindred, n. itadobpaka. 

Kiss, n. ikidatsope, maikidatso- 
pe.— v. t. ikidatsope, kidatsope. 
Kitchen, n. akumadiheati. 
Kitten, n. puzikedaka. 

L 

Ladle, n. azi. 

Lake, n. midiictla. 

Lame, adj. odidi isia. 

Land, n. ama. 

Land slide, n. amadeta tsipiti, 
ama tsipiti. 

Language, n. aduide, ide. 

Lap, n. isuti. 

Larder, n. maduti adukidusa. 
Large, adj. ictia. 

Lariat, n. iduti, matabpi. 

Lark, n. imaksidi [iwaksidi]. 

Last, adj. ipita, ipitadu. 

Last night, oktsisedu.— summer, 
adesedu.— winter, madasedu. 
Lately, adv. tata, tatakoa. 

Laugh, v. i. ka’. 

Lay, v. t. dusa, liapilie. 

Lazy, adj. da’taliepi [na’taiiepi]. 
Leaf, n. midaapa, midapa [bida- 
pa]. 

Leak, v. i. datskati [latskati]. 

Lean, adj. liadaM.— v. i. ipataki. 
Left, n. adj. aduidakisa, idakisa. 
Leg, n. idiki. 

Legend, n. mazi. 

Leggings, n. itadsi. 

Lengthen, v. t. liatskike, kilia- 
tskike. 

Less, adv. itadotadu. 

Level, adj. tsuka. 

Liar, n. akumltapaksa. 

Lick, v. t. datsipi [latsipi]. 

Lid, n. iitipe. 


Knead, v. t. dutsuki. 

Knee, n. liuafia, iliual'ia. 
Knife, n. maetsi [baetsi]. 
Knife-case, n. maetsiisi. 
Knock, v. t. daktsuti. 

Know, v. t. eke. See par. 195. 
Knuckle, n. sakiadusuka. 


Lie, v. i. See deceive.— down, 
liapi. 

Lift, v. t. dulii. 

Light, n. amaliati.— adj. daku- 
liti. . 

Lighten, v. t. dakubtike [nakuli- 
tike], kidakubtike. 

Lightning, n. kadicka [karicka]. 
Lignite, n. amaadaba. 

Like, v. t. ite, kideta, kidesadsi. 
Like, adj. adv. kuisa, kuisadsi, 
kupi, maksese, sese. 

Lip, n. aputi, ideta. 

Liquefy, v. t. midike, kimidike. 
Liquid, adj. miditsi [biditsi]. 
Little, adj. kadista [karista], 
kadistadi. 

Liver, n. apisa. 

Lo, int. ika, ikaka. 

Lock, n. matabisi — v. t. kitsokike. 
Lodge, n. ati, atitsualie. 
Lonesome, adj. bemi [bewi], be- 
miksa. 

Long, adj. liatski. 

Look, v. t. ika.— behind, ikipa- 
midi. 

Looking-glass, n. inaikika. 

Lose, v. t. bapilie. 

Lost, part, bapi, bapits. 

Love, v. t. kidesi, kideta, old, ite. 
Low, adj. padopi, padopidi. 
Lukewarm, adj sakapi. 

Lungs, n. dabo [naboj. 

Lynx, n. itiipapuzi. 


Mag 


Nig 


Magic, n. See mystery. 

Magpie, n. icpe. 

Maiden, n. adukidadesa. 

Maize, n. koliati. 

Make, v. t. lie, liidi, kiksa. 

Maker, n. akuliidi. 

Male, adj. adumatse, adukedapi. 
Mallet, n. maupaki, mi’maupa- 
ki. 

Man, n. matse, itaka, sikaka. 
Mandan Indians, n. adabpakoa. 
Mankind, n. dolipaka [nolipaka]. 
Many, adj. aliu. 

Mare, n. mika, mikats. 

Marry, v. t. ualie, uabeke, kidahe. 
Marsh, n. malia. 

Massacre, n. ditsi [nitsi]. 

Match, n. midaliaidukapi. 
Mattress, n. uakitatsi. 

Me ,pron. mi [bi, wi]. 

Meal, n. See feast. Corn-meal, 
koliati pi. 

Measure, v. t. kikiski, kutski. 
Meat, n. iduka [iruka], iduksiti. 
Medicine, v. liopadi. 

Meet, v. t. uzia. 

Melancholy, adj. liemiksa [liewi- 
ksaj. 

Melt, v. t. midike. 

Mend, v. t. kiksa, kitsakike. 
Meteor, n. icka pati. 

Middle, n. dumata. — adj ., adv. 
dumatadu. 

N 

Nail, n. uetsa-maictade ; isakicpu, 
sakiicpu, itsiicpu.— v. ^.daktade. 
Name, n. dazi [nazi], odasa’ti. 
Nauseate, v. t. kikadeke. 
Nauseated, adj. kade, kadeti. 
Navel, n. itadelipa. 

Near, ado. atsa. 

Neck, n. am pa.— lace, luaapi. 


Milk, n. a’tsimidi fatsibidi].— 
v. t. dutskipi. 

Mine, n. odutsi.— pron. matamae. 
Mink, n. daktsua [naktsua.] 
Minute, adj .tamuM [tawubi], ta- 
muliidi. 

Miss, v. t. aati. 

Moccasin, n. liupa, itapa. 

Moist, adj. adatskui, adatskuide. 
Molasses, n. matsikoa-akutidue. 
Money, n. uetsa. 

Moon, n. midi [bidi], makumidi, 
oktsimidi. 

Moose, n. apatapa (soft-nose). 
Mop, n, midatsuka idusuki. 
Morning, n. ata, kiduliaknte. 
Morrow, n. ataduk. 

Mortar, n. mepi. 

Mosquito, n. apaka. 

Mother n.n. hidu,hu, bus, ikas. 
Mountain, n. amaliami. 

Mouse, n. itabu. 

Mouth, n. i .—of river, aziuti. 
Mow, v. t. itskiti. 

Much, adj. abu. 

Mucus, n. plieta. 

Mud, n. tipia. Mudda", tipiatsaki. 
Mule, n. apictia. 

Muslin, n. masiibibapi. 

My, pron. ma, mata. 

Myself, pron. micki. 
Mysterious, adj. bopa. 
Mystery, n. liopadi, mabopa. 


Needle, n. matsito. 

Negro, masisipisa. 

Nest, n, ikisi, tsakakaikisi. 

Nibble, v. t. datskapi [latskapi]. 
Nick, n. adudakaptsi.— v. t. dak- 
aptsi. 

Night, n. maku, oktsi. 

Nightly, ado. makudu, oktsidu. 


Nin 


1G1 


Pet 


Nine, num. duetaapi. 

Ninth, num. duetaapi. 
Nineteen, num. aRp id uetsap i [aR- 
piluetsapi]. 

N in ety, num. adj. duetsapiapitika. 
Nipple, n. a’tsiicpu. 

No, adv. desa [nesatsl. 

Noon, n. midimapedupahi. 
North, n., adj., adv. amasita, ama- 
sitakoa. 

Northern-light, n. apaRiadaRa. 


Nose, n. apa.— bridge of, apa- 
adusuka.—ROOT of, apahedapi.— 
wing of, apadaka. 

Nostril, n. apaaduhopi. 

Not, adv. ta, tats. 

Notch, n., v. See nick. 

Nothing, n. desa, maodesa. 

N umb, adj. otsRami. 

Numerals, See page 56. 

Nurse, v. i. and t. a’tsilii, a’tsi- 
liike. 


o. 

O, int. u. 

Oak, n. midakamicka [bidaka- 
wicka]. 

Oar, n. il'ioki. 

Obliquely, adv. dumiiia. 

Obtain, v. t. dutsi [rutsi]. 

Ochre, n amatsidi. 

Odor, n. iditsi, maiditsi. 

Odorous, adj. iditsi matu. 
Officer,?!, akumakikua matseetsi. 
Oil, n. tsada.— v. t. kitsatike. 

Old, adj. Re, iiie.— man, n. ita- 
kalie. 

On, prep ., adv. aka. 

Once, adv. iduetsadu. 

One, n. adj. duetsa [luetsa]. 


Onion, n. mika’uti [bika’uti]. 
Open, v. t. duske. 

Opposite, adv. kuplieda. 

Order, v. t. iske. 

Ordure, n. aduedi, pedi. 

Other, adj. ilia, iliats. 

Otter, n. midapoka [bidapoka]. 
Our, pron. mata. Ours, matamae. 
Ourselves, pron. midoki[wiroki]. 
Out, adv. atazikoa. 

Outside, n. atazi. 

Outward, adv. atazilia. 

Over, prep., adv. akoka, liakoka. 
Overturn, v. t. kipa’te, pa’te. 
Owl, n. liute, itakupe. 

Own, adj. mae, itamae. 


Pad-saddle, n. matatsidalioke. 
Pain, v. i. ade. 

Paint, n. ui.— v. t. madaki. 
Palate, n. akata. 

Pale, adj. iRotaki, ol'iati. 

Pan, n. iduksiti iiniditi, midaksi. 
Pare, v. t. datskipi [latskipi]. 
Pass, v. t. itsauzie, makimaka- 
dalia. 

Paste, n. maikaditskapa.— v. t. 
kikaditskapake. 

Path, n. adi [ari]. 

Paunch, n. kiRa. 


P. 

Pawnee Indians, n. tsesadoRpa 
ka. 

Pea, n. amazi. 

Pelican, n. apasaki. 

Pelt, n. daRpi, odaRpi. 

Pen, n. uetsa maiakakasi. 
Pencil, n. maiakakasi. 

People n. dolipaka. 

Perforate, v. t. liopike, kilio 
pike. 

Perforated, adj. ho’pi, Ropits. 
Perfume, n. aduiditsi tsaki. 
Petrify, v. t. kiini’ke. 


102 


Rav 


Phy 


Physician, n. rnaisi liopa, uiatse 
liopa. 

Picture, n. mamadaki [mawa- 
daki]. 

Piece, n. adabpi. 

Pillow, n. dabkisi, odaksisi. 
Pillow-Case, n. dabkisisi, [naliki- 
sisi]. 

Pin, n. matsito-utipoadui. 

Pincii, v. t. datskapi, dutskapi. 
Pine, n. maatsi, matsi. 

Pink, adj. hisi-amahu-bota. 

Pipe, n. ikipi.— stem, ikipiliupa. 
Place, n. kuadu, sedu, [^[ If 47,50]. 
Plain, n. teduti [terutis]. 

Plant, v. t. amaoze. 

Plate, n. mataki. 

Play, v. i. makia, midaliaticke. 
Pleiades, n. ickalialiua. 

Pluck, v. t. dukiti. 

Plum, n. makata.— tree, maka- 
taa. 

Plume, n. matskoki. 

Point, n. icpu. 

Poke, v. i. dutati. 

Polish, v. t. kitsatike. 


POMME-BLANCHE, Ti. alii’. 

Poor, adj. adiasadsi, liadalii. 
Popgun, n. miduliake. 

Poplar, n. midaliadsi-pakpaksi. 
Porcupine, n. apadi.— quills, ap- 
adilii. 

Post, n. iptsa, iptsi, aduiptsi. 

Pot, n. midalia [bidalia]. 

Potato, n. kaksa, maslitakaksa. 
Pouch, n. isi, opeisi. 

Pour, v. t. pabue. 

Powder, n. midatsapi.— horn, 
midatsapiisi. 

Prairie, n. amaadatsa, teduti. 
Pregnant, adj. edi-ictia. 

Press, v. ^.datati, dutapi, dutskapi. 
Pretty", adj. ite-tsaki. 

Pi^ce, n. imasi. 

Pull, v. t. dukidi, 

Puma, h. itupaictia. 

Pumpkin, n. kakui ictia. 

Punch, v. t. patskapi. 

Pupil, n. ista-adusipisa. 

Pup, n. masuakaza. 

Purulent, adj. itudi. 

Push, v. t. adakide, pakide. 


Q, 

Quadrangle, n. adupaM-topa. 
Quarter, n. adukitopake.— v.l. 
kitopabeke. 

Quench, v. t. katsi. 

Quick, adv. batataki, sidisi. 


Quicken, v. t. sidisike. 

Quiet, v. tsakihamak. 

Quill, n. apadi, apadibi, karaic 
kisn, matsboki. 

Quiy t er, ii. maitaisi. 


R 

Rabbit, n. itaki, itaksipisa. 

Race, v. t. tidieke, makiatidieke. 
Rain, n., v. bade, badets. 

Rainbow, n. midiapoka. 

Raise, v. t. dulii, kiduhi. 

Raisin, n. masipisa. 

Rake, n. maikidubadi.— v. t. kidu- 
bade. 

Rancid, adj puade. 


Rapid, adj. batataki. 

Rapidly, adv. batataka, batata- 
kalia. 

Rat, n. italiuictia. 

Rattle, v. i. bamua [babua]. 
Rattlesnake, n. adutsidiamatu. 
Rayen, n. adisa, pedetska. 
Ravine, n. amadaktsaki, amaadu- 
bakupi. 



Sha 


Raw 

Raw, adj. tsa. 

Raze, v. t. dutsiti [rutsiti]. 

Razor, n. maidakakiti. 

Red, adj. liisi. 

Reddish, adj. liisadsi, liisisi. 
Redden, v. t. liisike, kiliisike. 
Reflection, n. idakilii. 

Refuse, v. t. itsa. 

Relation, n. itadokpaka. 

Reptile, n. mapoksa. 

Rib, n. duta. 

Ribbon, n. mapidakpa. 

Riddle, v. t. kiko’pike. 

Ride, v. t. kidie. 

Ridicule, v. t. uati. 

Right, n. idapa.— adv. idapaka, 
idapakoa. 

Rind, n. aduaka, aduisi. 

Ring, n. See finger-ring.— ®. i . 
tamua. 

Ripe, adj. oti.— v.t. kiotike, otike. 
Rise, v. i. ate, iduki. 

River, n. azi. 

S 

Sacred, adj. kopa, liopats. 

Sad, adj. kemiksa. 

Sage. n. ikokataki, ukimaduti. 
Sage-hen n. tsitskaictia. 

Salt, n. amakota. 

Sand, n. pukaki.— bar, pukakiate. 
Sapling, n. aduokipadi. 

Satiate, v. t.) kapatike, kika- 
Satisfy, v. t. ) patike. 

Satiated, kapati, kapatiksa. 
Saturate, v. t. kiadatskuike. 

Saw, n. midiiapati. 

Scar, n. adueta [erueta]. 

Scared, adj. kopase. 

Scarlet, adj. kisi, liisi ka’ti. 
Scissors, n. maitskiti. 

Scorch, v..t. adapapi, adapapike. 
Scrape, v. t. liatsa. 

Scratch,®, t. kike. 


Road, n. adi. 

Roast, v. t. katsite. 

Robe, n. dakpi, itasi, masi, miteo- 
dakpi. 

Rock, n. mi’. 

Rock, v. 1. dakudsi, liakalie, kida- 
kudsi. 

Roll, v. t. dumudsi, pamudsi; 
kaki; ukaki 

Roof, n. atidutidu. 

Root, n. uti. 

Rope, n. asu, matakpi. 

Rose, n. mitskapa. 

Rotten, adj. pua, puats, 

Rouge, n. iteui. 

Round, adj, kakiki. 

Rouse, v. t. itsike. 

Row, v. i. koki (makoki, dakoki). 
Row, n. In a row, daktsike, ki- 
daktsike. 

Rub, v. t. kipakisi. 

Ruffle, n, adupidie.— adj. pidie. 
Run, v. i. tidie, makiatidie. 


Seam, n, adukikaki. 

Season, n. kadu. 

Second, adj. idopa. 

Secondly, adv. idopadu. 

See, v. t. ika (^[ 198), aktsisa- 
Seek, v. t. kidi, kikidi. 

Seize, v. t. adakeki. 
Service-berry, n. matsutapa. 
Set, v. i. imakpi. 

Seven, adj. sapua.— tii, isapua. 
Seventeen, adj. akpisapua. 
'Seventy, adj. sapuapitika. 
Sever, v. t. adatsaki, dutsaki. 
Sew, v. t. kikaki. 

Shade, n. daki, daliiki. 

Shadow, n. aduoktsi. 

SnAKE, v. t. kakahe, dakato’ti, ki- 
pato’ti. 

Shallow, adj. kepi, kepiksa. 


< 


Sha 


164 


Squ 


Shame, v. t. itodike, kiitodike. 
Sharp, adj. aptse. 

Shave, v. t. dakakiti, kidakakiti. 
Shawl, n. masidakami. 

She, pron. i, se. 

Shear, v. t. datskiti. 

Shell, v. t. dasie. 

Shield, n. midaki. 

Shine, v. i. amaliati. 

Shirt, n. matse ituki. 

Shiver, v. i. dada. 

Shoal, n. adukepi. 

Shoe, n. liupa, itapa. 

Shore, n. midideta. 

Short, adj. padui, padopi. 

Shot, n. adupoadui kadista. 
Shoulder, n. idaspa. 

Shoulder, v. i. idaspakipe. 
Shovel, n. amaidakise. 

Show, v. t. atehe, atelieke. 

Shut, v. t. kipataki, makipataki. 
Sick, adj. ilioade. 

Side, n. adupatska. 

Sigh, v. i. idialii. 

Silver, n. uetsaihotaki. 

Sinew, n. matsua, matsuapakisi. 
Sing, v. i. palii, kipahi. 

Sink, v. i. tsipi.— v. t. tsipike, kit- 
sipike. 

Sister, n. idu, itakisa, itaku, iku, 
isami. 

Sit, v. i. atnaki. 

Six, n. adj. akama. Sixth, iakama. 
Sixteen, adj. akpiakama. 

Sixty, adj. akamaapitika. 

Skate, n. maidaktsadake.— v. i. 
daktsadake. 

Skin, n. See pelt and robe. 
Skull, n. atuliidu. 

Skunk, n. koka. 

Sky, n. apaki. 

Sled, n. maidutsada, midamaidu- 
tsada. 

Sleep, v. t. hand, hidami. 

Sleepy, adj. hamicti, kidamicti. 


Slide, v. i. dutsada. 

Slow, adj. sua. 

Slowt.y. adv sua, sualia. 

Small, see little.— pox, makaka, 
Smart, v. i. hasisi. 

Smash, v. t. dakata [nakata]. 
Smell, v. t. mupi. 

Smoke, n., v. i. pie, pieksa.— v. t. 
opelii. 

Smooth, adj. tsutsute. 

Snake, n, mapoksa. 

Snap, v. i. adatakpe. 

Sneeze, v. i. liakpi. 

Snow, n. ma’pi, ma’pits. 
Snow-bird, n. madadaka. 

Snuff, n. mailiakpi. 

Soap, n. maitidusuki [maitiru- 
suki]. 

Soft, adj. tapa. 

Soften, v. t. tapake. 

Son, 71 . idisi. 

Song, n. makipahi. 

Soon, adv. itekoakiduk. 

Sore, See scar.— v. i. ade, hasisi. 
Soup, n. liupa. 

Source, n. aziicpu. 

SouTn, n., adv. umata, umataka, 
umatakoa. 

Sow, v. t. amaoze. 

Span, n. itakidakahe, sakiitakida- 
kake. 

Span, v. t. kidakalie. 

Spill, *. t. adaliu, ku, paku. 
SpraiT, 7i. daki, idaki, dokidalii. 
Spit, v. aksue, sue. 

Sponge, n. midiidakupi. 

Spool, n. midaiapi. 

Spoon, n. azi, azideki, azisipisa, 
aziuetsa. 

Spotted, adj. puzi. 

Spread, v. t. dakake. 

Square, ti. adupakitopa. 

Squaw, ti. mia, amakadokpaka- 
mia. 

Squint-eyed, adj. istaduta. 


Squ 


165 


Thi 


Squirt, v. t. datskati. 

Star, n. icka. 

Starve, v. t. kiadiitike, kiliada- 
liike. 

Steal, v. t. asadi. 

Steam, v. i. pue. 

Steep, adj. daliapesi. 

Stem, n. aduhupa, liupa. 

Stench, n. aduiditsiisia. 

Sternum, n. imakidu. , 

Stick, n. midakaza.— v. t. datsati, 
patsati. 

Sting, v. t. hasisike, kihasisike. 

Stone, n. ini’. 

Stop, v. liaka’ta, liaka’tike, kilia- 
ka’tike. 

Stopple, n. iapati. 

Stove, n. uetsa-aduua. 

Straight, adj. tsamutsi [tsa- 
wutsi]. 

Straighten ,v. t. tsamutsike, ki- 
tsamutsike. 


T 

Tail, n. icpe, tsita. 

Tainted, adj. puade. 

Take, v. t. dutse. 

Tale, n. mazi. 

Talk, n. aduide, ide.— v. i. ide. 
Tally, v. i. dakaptsike [nakaptsi- 
de]. 

Tangled, adj. sikia, sipe. 
Tapering, adj. tsolii, tsliualie. 
Taste, v. t. kikiski. 

Tattoo, v. t. pi. 

Tattooing, n. pi. adupi. 

Tea, n. midapa [bidapa]. 

Tear, v. t. adaliese, daliese [la-], 
liul'iese. 

Tears, n. istamidi. 

Tediously, adv. hopa. 

21 


Strawberry, n. amaal'ioka. 
Striped, adj. puzi. 

Strong, adj. itsii, itsiits. 
Strouding, n. akuhisi. 

Suck, v. t. datsuki, a’tsilii. 

Sugar, n. matsikoa ( fr. tsikoa). 
Sultry, adj. adeksa. 

Summer, n. ade, maade. 

Sun, midi [bidi], mapemidi. 
Support, v. t. aksie. 

Surfeit, d. t. kiliapatike, kiliapa- 
tiksake. 

Survey, v. t. ama kikiski. 
Swallow, n. amasodisa.— v. t. pe. 
Sweet, adj. tsikoa. 

Swell, v. i. kipuake, puadui. 
Swim, v, i. midididi [bidiniri]. 
Swing, n. maikidakudsi.— v. t. da- 
kudsi, kidakudsi. 

Swollen, adj. pua, puats. 

Sword, n. midiisi. 

Syringe, n. maidatskati. 


Tell, v. t. kime. 

Temple, n. atihopa. 

Ten, >i. adj. pitika. Tenth, ipitika. 
Tenthly, adv. ipitikadu. 
Tendon, n. akazi. 

Tent, n. atitsualie, masiibi ati. 
Tepid, adj. sakapi. 

Terrify, v. t. liopasike, kiliopasi- 
ke. 

That. pron. liido, se, kutsaki, etc. 
Tiiee, pron. di [nij. 

Theirs, pron. itamae. See p. 39. 
Themselves, pron. liidoki. 

Then, adv. sedu [seru]. 

TnERE, adv. liidikoa, liiduka, kua- 
du, sekoa, etc. 

Thick, adj. soki, tatsi, titsi. 


Thi 


1G6 


Us 


Thicken, v. t. tatsike, titsike, ki- 
tatsike, etc. 

Thin, adj. kapi; kadaki. 

Think, v. i. and t. idie. 

Third, n. adj. idami [inawi]. 
Thirty, n. adj. damiapitika. 
Thirteen, n. adj. akpidami. 

This, pron. hidi. 

Thou, pron. da, di. 

Thousand, n. adj. pitikictia-aka- 
kodi. 

Thread, n. maikikaki. 

Three, n. adj, dami [nawi]. 
Throat, n. doti [loti]. 

Through, prep., adv. duinatadu. 
Throw, v. t. ise. 

Thumb, n. sakita. 

Thunder, n. tahu. 

Thus, adv. liidise. 

Tick, n. uakitatsi. 

Tie, v. t. dutskiti. 

Tire, v. t. daliika’tike, kidahika’- 
tike. 

Tired, adj. dalieka’ti. 

To, prep. Ra, ka. 

Tobacco, n. ope. 

To day, n., adv. Mdi-mape. 

Toe, n. itsiadutsamilie. 
Together, adv. ikupa. 
To-morrow, n. adv. ataduk [ata- 
ruk]. 

Tongue, n. dezi. 


Ugly, adj. isia, iteisia. 

Uncle, n. ate, itadu. 

Under, prep, miktakoa, [wikta- 
koa]. 

Unfold, v. t. dakatike. 

Unite, v. t. kiikupake, kiduetsake. 


Tooth, n. i, isa, ki. 

Top, n. icpu. 

Totem, n. daki. 

Tough, adj. kamicka. 

Toward, prep, ka, ta. 

Trade, v. i. See buy. 

Trader, n. akumaiku. 

Trail, n. adi. 

Tramp, v. i. dakataki. 

Trample, v. t. adatapi, adatelie. 
Transparent, adj. deki. 

Trap, n. itipe, maitipe. 
Travelling-party, n. dadi. 
Tremble, v. i. See shiver. 
Triangle, n. adupahidami. 
Truly, adv. ka’ti. 

Try, v. t. maihe [waihe]. 

Tuck, v. t. opasa, opasaku. 
Tumor, n. adupua. 

Turn, v. t. dumidi, dumika. 
Turnip, n. alii’. 

Turtle, n. mataki. 

Twelve, n. adj. akpidopa. 
Twenty, n. adj. dopapitika. 
Twice, adv. dopa, dopatsakoa. 
Twilight, n. ka’pesede. 
Twinkle, v. i. kaditska. 

Twin, n. dakadutska [nakalu- 
tska]. 

Twist, v. t. adamidi, dumidi, pa- 
midi. 

Two, n. adj. dopa [nopats]. 


Untie, v. t. dusipi, dutsipi. 
Upland, n. amaadatsa. 
Upon, prep., adv. akoka. 
Upset, v. t. adaliue, kue. 
Ursa Major, n. ickasapua. 
Us, pron. mido [miro, wido] 


Worn 


Val 


Valley, n. amaftakupi. 
Varnish, n. maikitsatike. 
Venison, n, tsitataki iduksiti. 
Venus, n. ickaictia. 
Vermilion, n. ui, iteui. 
Very, adv, ka’ti. 

Vest, n. mapatope. 


Wagon, n. midiikaki. 

Waist, n. liedapi. 

W ait, v. i. haka’ta. 

Waken, v. t. itsibe. 

Walk, v. i. dide. 

War, n. makimakia. 

War-party, n. matsedidi. 

Warm, adj. ade. 

Warrior, n. akumakikua. 

Wash, v. t. dusuki [rusuki], duts- 
kisi. 

Washing, n. makidutskisi. 
Watch, n. midiikikiski, [bidi—]. 
Water, n. midi. 

Wave, n. mididaliisi [bididaliisi]. 
Wave, v. t. pato’ti. 

Weasel, n. utsitsa. 

Wed, v. t. ualie. 

Wedge, n. mitsi. 

Weep, v. i. imia, istamidi pati. 
Wet, adj. adatskui.— v. t. ada- 
tskuike, kiadatskuike. 

What, pron. tapa, takada. 

When, adv. tuakaduk, tuakasedu. 
Where, adv. todu [toru], toka. 
Which, pron. tapa, tape. 

WniP, n. iki. 


167 


Village, n. ati, ati aliu. 
Vine, n. masipisaa. 

Violin, n. masiitamakipalii. 
Visit, v. t. uzie, kiuzie. 
Vomit, v. i. kade. 
Voracious, adj. adiitiksa. 


Whiskey, n. midiadtu [bidiaiui]. 
Whisper, v. i. tsitside. 

Whistle, n. ikozi.— v. kozi. 
White, adj. ataki, ihotaki, oliati. 
— man, w.masi. 

Whiten, v. t. ihotakike, kiataki- 
ke, etc. 

White-wash, n. atiipkiti. 

W hither, adv. tapata, tokata, tota. 
Who, pron. tape. 

Whole, adj. liakabeta. 

Whose, pron. tapeta, tapeita, ta- 
peitamae. 

Why, adv. tose. 

W ide, adj. soki. 

Wife, n. itadamia, ua. 

Wild, adj. idapudi. 

Willow, n. mabubisa, midabadsi. 
Wind, n. hutsi. 

Window, n. maikika. 

Wing, n. icpa. 

Wink, v. i. istabubi. 

Winter, n. mada, tsidie. 

Wyvk, prep, api, apika, ikupa. 
Wolf, n. motsa [botsa], tsesa. 
Wolf-berry, n. masukaak§u. 
Woman, n. mia. 


Woo 


168 


You 


Wood, ?i. mida [bida]. 

Work, v. dalie, kiksa. j 
Wormwood, n. iliokataki-akusi- 
pisa. 

Worse, adj. isia-itaokakoa. 
Wound, n. aduu, aduaksaki. 
Wound, v. t. u, daksaki. 


Wrap, v. t. pudsike. 

Wrinkle, v. t. hipike, kiftipike. 
Wrinkled, adj. fiipi, liipits. 
Wrist, n. ikuti. 

Write, v. i. akakasi. 

Writing, n. maakakasi. 


Yardstick, n. maikutski. 

Yawn, v. i. ida. 

Ye ,pron. dido [niro]. 

Year, n. rnada.— last, madasedu. 
Yellow, adj. tsi, tsidi.— dye, itsi- 
dike. 

Yes, adv. e. 


Yesterday, n. liudisedu [liuri- 
seru]. 

Yonder, adv. oka. 

You, pron. da, di [na, ni]. 

Your, pron. di, dita. 

Yours, pron. ditamae [nitawaets]. 
Yourself, pron. dicki. 
Yourselves, pron. didoki. 


N ote. — There are some Hidatsa words in this section, which are not con¬ 
tained in the Dictionary proper. In such words, the accent is indicated ; in 
the^others, as a rule, it is not 


THE END. 


C 156 


ENGLISH 

HIDATSA DICTIONARY. 


MATTHEWS. 


















Cr \ '• 3 ’ A 

' w *. -o t* • 

* 5? e A ^ 

+ '*€&/*’y* A ^ / 

, * * » 1 * A® <>, * o N o 9 ^ 

C\, 4? V *i/r’'* ^ V »!••* "C‘ AV 

\.f ’mM,\ W '**<? • 

; A*. :peiP. aV-^. : 

.<?A *». 



•<y . 6 J^ :- ^°o j** yj/tp?^ 

vL* 4 . /Or u!/A/ / s / *Z> 



s V\. V^'V 0 '... X 

^ A* *j> 



y v \ : $ 5 R. : V \ 1 S §7 ** v % °*flPl® ; «/\ 

v <d> '«•.* A* %. *7^- A ^ '».»* *0* \ 

‘Mt^. ^ 0 « n>t>* :^§ll»' W 


^0*0 


* * 


w * 


cv tf* - 

1 At 

A°.*ww* ^ 

. !> V <• 


\V ^ * • ' ’ 

V •’*•- c* 

• ^ A* %* 

: v^ v 'f m//A4 - 

** A 0< ^ ^ V/V*^ 

^ o-o. % iP r 11 

^o x ;<CM& • . nV 

; vSiSlS^' \ 

* V'"N^5 a • <a.^ C' o 0 ^T" 1 

aO »’^ 

T. AA^ . v «! 



» * «, 


w *i«a*. w • mewM v +? °/SBm: 

/% -ISP;* /% °Ww. : /\ *^K*y v \ ; wP** * 

k Cr ^5. '^-' n .s s A <!^ 'o.a* «Cr < '^..s* A '<>.*'• ,Cr 

o - O . A » J ^ fi* o M o . l t 0 ^ ft> 

^ ^ ^ ^ jT C/ W ^ •] 




: 


1>**A 


>* # 

; '" . 0 ° % ' T ^' A ■ 

V v ,»•<*, v 

N ^ «. *• A*, 'r 

* A V * 

- -; 


% 0 O 

• "§ V 

•* / ^ \/*'^- A % **.-•’ .0- 

a 9 V **Vf» N> V % *••»-■ c\ *p v 

a. v v <• ,a a > • “P, a v 

aV^a * ^rn iiw ^y O aV^ *o««- 3 r A, ,.,|||„„ - 

' *'f. . ■* 4 <c^ "^vvi*^ A *'o.^** .6* ^b ,, V7vJ»' A 

<^> A> 0 *• o 4 *^s i • 6 A v 0 ** 0 « 

*_**«-♦. wv c° o y y c° .^vv^v °o ^ , 

: *o *t 0<i " 

* o *’&£$/*’** .o ^ <y o *y%iij&y* ^ 

^ ° * * * ■« * ^ * o „ o ° y- o *■,,, • ^o ^ 

^ *1^.'* > v ov* ^ jP > 

• ’***• ' • *p. aTV 

</>. ey 




■*" ''KVs^“ • di' O 

*o«°’ ^ O -., 

?• V *> ‘ * °- c\ a 0 

%A :'Mg°, \y ?■ 

/\ '-SK* A\ W , 

0 y ^ a <b 'o-.** a 

^ -<V ,L/» 0 ^ ,.0*0* ^ 0 

0 * . X- , 

% OvN\\\T\^. ^ 

w ^o ^ 






91 aV^. oW 5 pl?‘ 

A <*'•..• , 


4 o 

<3? i<> 



o. .o° ‘V"'T^*' ^ r f 

^ * V % V V ' o I •«, 


V ' X, A - O * » - ,U X> «■ t , S - 

. -Q « 1 ' » * ^ . A V ,0*0. ,lU . A'X 

• •’bv^ ^o< “of .‘j^^o'- ^-o 4 

■•■'■- J* .. V*'^‘ / % 

f. C,^ x V ,4^-n^ 

^ o'H/ ^^\N* *♦ <•? Ya » \ 

• 0 V \D A <*. 'O , t * -CT »n “■.< y e 4 

‘* -•-!••-% o c •- k . -o d® 

i* m- - o y 





o A ~<^>zy/i\\ H#' -. 

► * o * o 0 . ^ * •»i • a 0 ,, * o«o 9 ^ •'*#'• A 0 .. 

-\ ^ t t o 0 £% Q v % ♦ f A \^ V n t • o # \0 > «, 5 Vl_ A 

<p > iO^A°o ^ * jQ*&3& • ’AmA'o e& * 

V^ v IsMWsl* ° r v*v b V 

A xf*_ - 2§I1 mmII^ ° A^’^f ^ ® aV^> o 

v °b • * av *>^, o mO|oO^ * v 5 * ^y *>^ 

.(P ^y*47vf*\A <» *'°* f ** *%> *■%?.**' A <v 





o w r • 

: >P t 







\* 4? 'p • 



*5* vV * 

- V^ V 




9 



* P A v * 

; v* v • 




* ,v V, 


7 'TrA' • 

: \WM: J*\, \ 

<a '®*» - *o. V^T* A <^ 'o.»* G* \ *^T»’ A 

* v c *75$$w* ^ 4** *^/r^b" %r c •7s$sw' o , 

;. *w .\s^ftr- .v^Sfer- ^ 




*oK 



; *° ^ : # 

°0 • ’ A.°° >4, « " 0 9 «$ 

V’ * f# ‘>- ^p. «0 V **!nL.'* *> 

r- ^ ^ * Wa* 0 \ ,# u & ♦ 


V*CT 


• Aq, 



"oK 


^ -J 


’ o o 

* ^ o # 


& . * * • ♦ ^ 


»° K<y * - ™ /iHP . „ 

•* <y % ■••.'•’ *° n*.■ 

V •!••* P, .0 ,*••% > 

• P- A* S 

vv :i £ py .*< 

^ J ?• A *V*. v- 

* <?* d 

S’ ... <v '••*• *° 




i- 'P 


,0- «^V-». a^ v "p 

c o J 


* v vA^.% > ,o' 


;- ++ j •< 


-o ^ Q, 


■a* \'%^2%7iibiy > y* v p * ° ^5 ^<> 

<^* <A O. +&£v^°y* -0 ^ ^ o *< 

~ * — 9 -* V #,,# ^° ,.. %> **" 9 ° °^ 


r **••% "> * N 


° o- 


r. ^ * 


• %$. A v * 

r P'V • 




*' A 


• i • » 4 

^ *V^sL*. •%, 


Of.* 


» • A ^r, - 

^ * *v ^ • ■ 

4 -V p - 


TmSS 


O. *^7Vt* A 


; >v 

• o>^ * 

,* ^ ^ - 


1 p A v * 
- V^ V 


’o • » 


’., '° 0 A yJ*?k-\ 

* •’oV*' ^nS •< 


4 P. - 


r ° ^ %<• 




L * *■< 


*$> ' * •To 9 A* 


^ * r ' 1 ’ <A° .. * 8 " 0 °^, * 9 ' 1 * A 0 %. 

• ^ ^ *Wa c ^ ts, £ /jaVa 8 V ^ 

I \VT 4 4 ^ V }m/ \w^ * vTV # j^jBiF^ ° Tf/ 08 \VT * 

*7r*$v& r '* * ^ ^ c^o ^ °* <1 

* jCr \d .. ** A <P 'o.A -Cr x 5 +< .,** A <v - 0 . »* .(? 

c 0 ^ c ^L°*r^°-, -A t* 1 "" ,0^ e 8 ! 8 * ^o -A V ^ , 0 * 



3c 



*° ^ , 

c\ 0 . 

o^ *., 4 • ^0 * o „ 0 A 

4,0 s'• * % 4> V 

\/ ;•«; \A .*' 

o O * C.^ vfk r% ■* 

* v ^ -yjCp.* *v % • 



o* A P 


4 a ^ 

• o_ *■ 




o ^ Q, 


\W* ' • 1 4 8 « 0 9 

. . R ^ • *P. 4ir a A ► .R5 • 4 

R,^ v :» W ;^&», 

o 



7*' A <^ 'o.7’*^ .0^ ^ ' a 

• ^ . v >,* a f\* ,O w O- V\ 4 ^ Ik # 0 aV* 0 * 0 . " /-v 

^ s*/r77?l ’ ^ c u °o J* ,‘*^4 ^ c° °o 



v .; fv 7 
P r.^ * 


, ;* 'i- 

»' .0' 05 4 ^7* s A '«».» 

c° ‘j^vkIp p? ^ ^ 

^ . 0 * 




l * r oV^ 





4 1 ‘ 




-o A q. 


, c* ,<)' 4 s ^ ( **i), cv (J* ( s • • / A A ^ r • o* (j 

. A . SV c ^o *ii Tit^ — ■ » 4 V • <? c. > A S\ i iTiv — ^ a . V & «o p\ . 


*„ *P. aT> S 

l° -P A * ' 
w 1 . d.? 



o 

: “is’ • m^/A \ 

•-J -_.__ NJ J' * ^ 

tf* v v’ , e » ■* <U V rf. 

* 0 , a ^ '».»• . 0 ^ V a 

> O' c ° " 8 ♦ % • *■ * 9 4 P» 0^ c 0 W ° ♦ 

Pa A ^ A + pA 0 ^ o^!T\- A 





: x5 v .i 
• A •; 



































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































